JP2016202961A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of suppressing deterioration in taste by an operation part by providing novel adjusting means for significantly reducing a player's burden when adjusting or holding shooting strength.SOLUTION: The game machine comprises: a shooting device capable of shooting a game ball to any position on an upper part of a game area by adjusting shooting strength; an operation unit 1700 including an operation base 1702 that has a sliding guide surface 1720 on an upper surface and is provided in a stationary state, a sliding operation part 1703 that is slidably supported on the sliding guide surface 1720 with the axial direction defined as a vertical direction to the slide guide surface 1720, and a performance operation button 1803 that is disposed on the sliding operation part 1703 and is depressedly operable; shooting strength adjusting means for adjusting the shooting strength according to the operation position of the sliding operation part 1703; performance execution means causing to execute a specific performance until a lottery result is displayed; and performance control means changing a performance mode of the performance in association with the operation of the performance operation button 1803.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 22

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”).

  In conventional gaming machines, an operation handle that protrudes from the lower front of the gaming machine toward the player side is provided so that a game ball can be launched at an arbitrary strength from the electric launching device toward the gaming area. It has been. The operation handle is supported so as to be rotatable around a rotation axis whose axial direction is the front-rear direction. When the player holds the operation handle and performs a rotation operation, the rotation operation amount (rotation The game ball is fired from the launcher with a strength according to the position.

  However, according to the conventional operation handle, the operation handle protrudes from the lower front surface of the gaming machine toward the player side, and can be rotated around the rotation axis whose axial center direction is the front-rear direction. When operating, it was necessary to grip the outer peripheral surface of the operation handle with the elbow bent at a substantially right angle and twist the arm. That is, it is necessary to perform an operation of twisting the arm in an unstable state in which the elbow is lifted from the wrist, and this increases the burden on the player's wrist and shoulder. In particular, since the operation handle is always urged toward the origin position (starting position where the game ball is not launched), the operation handle is at the origin position in order to keep hitting the game ball at an arbitrary strength. The holding force against the urging force is required so as not to rotate toward the player, and the player's burden is promoted. In addition, the conventional operation handle only functions as a means for adjusting the launch intensity of the game ball, and the interest cannot be enhanced by the operation handle.

  In addition to the operation handle described above, a handle such as a motorcycle handle (see Patent Document 2) and a handle like an operating rod (see Patent Document 3) have been proposed. However, even if such a handle is used, the burden on the player has not been significantly reduced.

  Therefore, in view of the above situation, the present invention provides a completely new adjustment means that greatly reduces the burden on the player when adjusting and maintaining the firing strength, and suppresses a decrease in interest by the operation unit. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can be used.

Means 1: “A game board in which a game area is formed on the front surface and a plurality of winning holes and obstacle nails are installed;
A launcher capable of driving a game medium into an arbitrary position above the game area by adjusting the launch intensity;
An operation base having a sliding guide surface on the upper surface and installed in a fixed state, and a rotation shaft having an axial direction perpendicular to the sliding guide surface on the sliding guide surface of the operation base. An operation unit having a sliding operation unit supported at the center so as to be slidable within a predetermined rotation range, and an operation switch disposed on the sliding operation unit and capable of being pressed.
Firing intensity adjusting means for adjusting the firing intensity of the launching device according to the operation position of the sliding operation unit;
Gaming state detection means for detecting a gaming state;
Lottery means for performing lottery based on the detection result of the gaming state detection means;
When the lottery result of the lottery means is a big hit, advantageous gaming state generating means for giving a specific profit to the player;
Lottery result display means for displaying the lottery result of the lottery means;
Production means for producing a visually changeable game,
Production execution means that can be executed until the lottery result is displayed, and that causes the production means to perform a specific production with respect to the possibility that the lottery result is the jackpot;
And an effect control means for changing the effect mode of the effect means in association with the operation of the operation switch disposed in the sliding operation section during execution of the effect.

  Here, the “launching device” includes, for example, a rotary solenoid that generates a rotational driving force on the output shaft when energized, and a ball striking ball that is fixed to the output shaft of the rotary solenoid and waits at a firing position. And a drive control means for supplying electric power to the rotary solenoid and driving the hitting ball.

  Further, the “sliding operation part” slides on the sliding guide surface of the operation base within a predetermined range, and preferably has a size that can be gripped by the player's hand.

  Further, the “fire strength adjusting means” connects the sliding operation unit and the launching device, and is an adjustment mechanism (for example, a slide member that adjusts the tension of the biasing spring) in conjunction with the sliding operation of the sliding operation unit. The position may be displaced, that is, mechanically adjusted. Alternatively, the operating position of the sliding operation unit is detected by a variable resistor and the energization of the rotary solenoid is controlled based on the output. The structure to adjust, ie, the structure adjusted by electrical control, may be sufficient.

  The “gaming state detection means” detects game media winnings, player operations, and the like, and a lottery is performed based on the detection results. The “advantageous game state” that occurs when the lottery result is a big win means a state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and various states can be exemplified as follows.

(1) In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a winning / closing opening that is opened / closed is repeatedly opened / closed a predetermined number of times, or is continuously opened for a predetermined time or until a predetermined number of game balls (game media) are won. A state where a large amount of game balls are easily won, so-called “hit game state”.

(2) In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a so-called “probability fluctuation state” in which the probability of occurrence of a big hit gaming state is higher than usual.

(3) In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery entrance device that makes a lottery to determine whether or not a big hit gaming state is generated by winning or passing a game ball is easier to enter the game ball than usual. The state where the lottery lottery is performed more frequently than usual, so-called “time reduction state”.

(4) In a gaming machine such as a slot machine, a state in which the drum is easily stopped by a pattern for paying out a medal as a game medium during a predetermined game, a so-called “bonus game state”.

(5) In a gaming machine such as a slot machine, a state in which the probability of occurrence of a bonus game state is higher than usual, a so-called “probability fluctuation state”.

  Further, the “lottery result display means” may display a special symbol representing the lottery result, or may display a decorated decorative symbol. As the lottery result display means, a light emitting diode, a liquid crystal display device, an EL display device, a plasma display device, a CRT, or the like can be used. Further, the “production means” may be anything that produces a production that can be visually changed along with the game, and may be exemplified by a movable accessory supported so as to be displaceable, or a production display device that displays a production image. it can.

  The “operation switch” is operated by the player and functions as an “effect switch” for selecting a character in the effect or promoting the operation of the effect means. The “production control means” may recognize that the contact of the operation switch is closed by the pressing operation as an operation signal, and the operation signal is that the pressing operation is released, that is, the contact of the operation switch is opened. You may recognize it.

  According to the configuration of the means 1, when the sliding operation portion of the operation unit is slid on the sliding guide surface of the operation base, the firing intensity of the launching device is adjusted according to the operation position of the sliding operation portion. Is done. That is, the game medium is driven from the launch device to an arbitrary position above the game area with a launch intensity corresponding to the operation position of the sliding operation unit.

  Here, since the sliding guide surface is formed on the upper surface of the operation base, the sliding operation portion is slid in a substantially horizontal direction while being placed on the sliding guide surface. . That is, the player can move the launching strength of the launching device, that is, a game that is driven into the game area by displacing the sliding operation unit in the horizontal direction with his hand placed on the sliding operation unit or holding the sliding operation unit from above. It becomes possible to adjust the momentum of the medium. Therefore, it is possible to easily adjust the launch intensity in the launcher and to operate with a comfortable posture. In addition, since the sliding operation unit placed on a substantially horizontal plane is gripped from above, the sliding operation unit can be stably held with a light force. In particular, since the friction between the sliding guide surface and the sliding operation unit is generated using the weight of the hand or arm, the arm force necessary to hold the sliding operation unit is greatly reduced. Is possible. Furthermore, not only the fingertips but also the entire palm can be positioned on the operation base, so there is no unstable feeling that the arm is floating, and there is no twist of the arm, greatly reducing the player's fatigue Can be reduced.

  In addition, since the sliding operation unit is configured to rotate within a predetermined angle range around a rotation axis whose axial center is a direction perpendicular to the sliding guide surface, the sliding operation unit is viewed from above. While being held, it can be slid (turned) only by bending the wrist, and the sliding operation becomes easier.

  On the other hand, when a predetermined gaming state is detected by the gaming state detection means, a lottery by the lottery means is performed based on the detection. When the lottery result is a big hit, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is generated. Further, the gaming machine is provided with a lottery result display means, and the lottery result of the lottery means is displayed. In other words, the player can grasp whether or not it is a big hit by visually recognizing the lottery result displayed on the lottery result display means. Moreover, in order to increase the sharpness in the lottery, a specific effect may be performed by the effecting means until the lottery result is displayed. This effect is related to the possibility that the lottery result will be a big hit (for example, a display effect that is displayed when all symbols are changing, a display effect that is displayed when symbols are changed after reaching, and a bonus feature placed on the board Among them, an effect that can change the effect mode to appear based on the operation of the operation switch is also included.

  By the way, some conventional gaming machines with a production button are also known. However, since each game machine has an operation switch (production button) arranged away from the operation handle, both of them can be operated simultaneously. It is necessary to hold the operation handle with one hand and press the production button with the finger of the other hand, and the operation switch cannot be operated with the finger of the dominant hand. For this reason, it may be difficult to operate the operation switch at an appropriate timing or repeatedly hit it. Note that if you release your hand from the operation handle and operate the operation switch with that hand, you can perform either operation with your dominant hand. There is a risk that the delivery of the game media will be interrupted and the willingness to play will be impaired.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the means 1, since the operation switch (production switch) is provided in the sliding operation unit, it is possible to press the operation switch with the fingertip of the hand holding the sliding operation unit. . This is because the palm of the player is placed on the sliding operation part when holding the sliding operation part, and the fingertip can be moved while holding the sliding operation part. According to this, it becomes possible to operate the operation switch with the finger of the dominant hand without interrupting the game medium. In addition, the player can operate the operation switch with almost no change in posture, and as a result, the player's burden can be reduced, and the player can participate in the production silently without worrying about the gaze of others. It becomes possible.

Means 2: “A game board in which a game area is formed on the front surface and a plurality of winning holes and obstacle nails are installed;
A launcher capable of driving a game ball, which is a game medium, at an arbitrary position above the game area by adjusting the launch intensity;
An operation base having a sliding guide surface on the upper surface and installed in a fixed state, and a rotation shaft having an axial direction perpendicular to the sliding guide surface on the sliding guide surface of the operation base. An operation unit having a sliding operation unit supported at the center so as to be slidable within a predetermined rotation range, and an operation switch disposed on the sliding operation unit and capable of being pressed.
Firing intensity adjusting means for adjusting the firing intensity of the launching device according to the operation position of the sliding operation unit;
A start opening arranged in the game area and capable of winning a game ball;
A winning state detecting means for detecting that a game ball has won the start opening;
A game ball payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game balls based on at least detection of game balls by the winning state detection means;
Lottery means for performing lottery based on detection of game balls by the winning state detection means;
When the lottery result of the lottery means is a big hit, advantageous gaming state generating means for giving a specific profit to the player;
Lottery result display means for displaying the lottery result of the lottery means;
An effect display means for displaying an effect associated with the game;
Production execution means that can be executed until the lottery result is displayed, and that causes a specific production to appear on the production display means regarding the possibility that the lottery result will be a big hit,
And an effect control means for changing an effect mode that appears during display of the effect in association with an operation of the operation switch provided in the sliding operation unit.

  Examples of the “effect display means” include a liquid crystal display device, an EL display device, a plasma display device, or a CRT.

  According to the configuration of the means 2, when the sliding operation portion in the operation unit is slid on the sliding guide surface of the operation base, the launching device has a firing strength corresponding to the operation position of the sliding operation portion. A game ball is shot at an arbitrary position above the game area.

  Here, since the sliding guide surface is formed on the upper surface of the operation base, the sliding operation unit is slid in a substantially horizontal direction while being placed on the sliding guide surface. Become. In other words, the player adjusts the momentum of the game ball that is driven into the game area by displacing the sliding operation part in the horizontal direction with the hand placed on the sliding operation part or the gripping part from above. Is possible. Therefore, it is possible to easily adjust the launch intensity in the launcher and to operate with a comfortable posture. In addition, since the sliding operation unit placed on a substantially horizontal plane is gripped from above, the sliding operation unit can be stably held with a light force. Further, since the entire palm can be positioned on the operation base and the arm is not twisted, the player's fatigue can be greatly reduced.

  In addition, since the sliding operation unit is configured to rotate within a predetermined angle range around a rotation axis whose axial center is a direction perpendicular to the sliding guide surface, the sliding operation unit is viewed from above. While being held, it can be slid (turned) only by bending the wrist, and the sliding operation becomes easier.

  On the other hand, when a predetermined gaming state is detected, a lottery by a lottery means is performed based on the detected game state. When the lottery result is a big hit, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is generated. Further, the gaming machine is provided with a lottery result display means, and the lottery result of the lottery means is displayed. Further, in order to increase the sharpness in the lottery, a specific effect may appear on the effect display means until the lottery result is displayed. This effect relates to the possibility that the lottery result will be a big hit, and includes an effect in which the effect mode to appear can be changed based on the operation of the operation switch.

  By the way, since the operation switch (production switch) is provided in the sliding operation unit that is slid in a substantially horizontal direction, it can be operated with the fingertip of the hand that holds the sliding operation unit. Accordingly, it is possible to operate the operation switch with the finger of the dominant hand without interrupting the game ball. In addition, since the player can press the operation switch with almost no change in posture, it is possible to reduce the burden on the player and participate in the production without worrying about the gaze of others.

Means 3: “A game board in which a game area is formed on the front surface and a plurality of winning holes and obstacle nails are implanted;
A launcher capable of driving a game ball, which is a game medium, at an arbitrary position above the game area by adjusting the launch intensity;
An operation base having a sliding guide surface on the upper surface and installed in a fixed state, and a rotation shaft having an axial direction perpendicular to the sliding guide surface on the sliding guide surface of the operation base. An operation unit having a sliding operation unit supported at the center so as to be slidable within a predetermined rotation range, and an operation switch disposed on the sliding operation unit and capable of being pressed.
Firing intensity adjusting means for adjusting the firing intensity of the launching device according to the operation position of the sliding operation unit;
A start opening arranged in the game area and capable of winning a game ball;
A winning state detecting means for detecting that a game ball has won the start opening;
A game ball payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game balls based on at least detection of game balls by the winning state detection means;
Lottery means for performing lottery based on detection of game balls by the winning state detection means;
An open / close winning device that performs a predetermined opening / closing operation and allows a game ball to win by changing from a closed state to an open state;
When the lottery result of the lottery means a big hit, the opening / closing time of the opening / closing prize-winning device is set to a predetermined time that allows a plurality of game balls to win with a margin, and the opening / closing of the opening / closing prize-winning device Advantageous game state generating means for giving a specific profit to the player by performing the operation a plurality of times;
A special symbol display for displaying a special symbol indicating the lottery result of the lottery means;
Stop symbol determining means for determining a stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the lottery means;
Special symbol variation control means for changing the special symbol based on the detection of the game ball by the winning state detecting means, and for stopping the variation of the special symbol at the stop symbol determined by the stop symbol determining means;
An effect display means for displaying an effect associated with the game;
The special symbol variation control means can execute it from the start of the variation of the special symbol to the time when the variation is stopped at the stop symbol, and the lottery result of the lottery means is specified with respect to the possibility of winning the jackpot Effect execution means for causing the effect display means to appear, and
And an effect control means for changing an effect mode that appears during display of the effect in association with an operation of the operation switch provided in the sliding operation unit.

  According to the configuration of the means 3, when the sliding operation unit in the operation unit is slid on the sliding guide surface of the operation base, the launching device has a firing intensity corresponding to the operation position of the sliding operation unit. A game ball is shot at an arbitrary position above the game area.

  Here, since the sliding guide surface is formed on the upper surface of the operation base, the sliding operation unit is slid in a substantially horizontal direction while being placed on the sliding guide surface. Become. For this reason, it is possible to easily adjust the firing intensity in the launching device and to operate with an easy posture. In addition, the sliding operation portion can be stably held with a light force, and the player's fatigue can be greatly reduced. In addition, since the sliding operation unit is configured to rotate within a predetermined angle range around a rotation axis whose axial center is a direction perpendicular to the sliding guide surface, the sliding operation unit is viewed from above. While being held, it can be slid (turned) only by bending the wrist, and the sliding operation becomes easier.

  On the other hand, at least a start opening is provided in the game area, and when it is detected that a game ball has won at the start opening, a lottery by a lottery means is performed. When the lottery result is a big hit, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is generated. Specifically, the opening time per opening / closing prize winning device is set to a predetermined time that allows a plurality of game balls to win with plenty of room, and the opening / closing operation is performed multiple times, thereby Grant certain benefits. In addition, a special symbol display is provided on the gaming machine, and the special symbol is variably displayed based on the winning of the game ball at the start opening, and then the special symbol is changed with the stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result. Stop. Thereby, the player can grasp the lottery result based on the stop symbol. In addition, in order to increase the sharpness during the change of the special symbol, the effect may appear on the effect display means during the change of the special symbol. This effect relates to the possibility that the lottery result will be a big hit, and includes an effect in which the effect mode to appear can be changed based on the operation of the operation switch.

  By the way, since the operation switch (production switch) used for this specific production is provided in the sliding operation unit that is slid in a substantially horizontal direction, it is operated with the fingertip of the hand that holds the sliding operation unit. It becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to operate the operation switch with the finger of the dominant hand without interrupting the game ball. Further, since the player can press the operation switch with almost no change in posture, it is possible to reduce the burden on the player and concentrate on the game.

Means 4: In any one of the means 1 to 3, the operation unit has a position signal output means for outputting a signal corresponding to the operation position of the sliding operation portion,
The launch intensity adjusting means includes launch control means for controlling the launch intensity of the launching device based on the output of the position signal output means ”.

  Here, as the “position signal output means”, a variable resistor (volume switch) whose resistance value changes according to the operation position of the sliding operation unit, or a position corresponding to the operation position of the sliding operation unit is arranged. It is possible to configure using a plurality of switches.

  According to the structure of the means 4, the signal according to the operation position of the sliding operation part is output from the position signal output means, and the firing intensity of the launching device is controlled based on the output. For this reason, it becomes possible to adjust the firing intensity by electrically controlling the launching device, and “to mechanically connect the sliding operation unit and the launching device and transmit the operation of the sliding operation unit to the launching device. It is possible to omit a complicated mechanism such as “to make” and to simplify the configuration of the entire apparatus. Furthermore, the operation unit including the sliding operation unit can be arranged at a position away from the launching device, and the degree of design freedom can be increased.

Means 5: In any one of the constitutions of Means 1 to 4, “It further comprises a push button device installed in a fixed state with respect to the gaming machine body,
The production control means changes the production mode in association with the operation of the operation switch and the operation of the push button device ”.

  Here, the “push button device” is operated by the player and functions as a “production button” for selecting a character or promoting the operation of the production means in the production.

  According to the configuration of the means 5, the push button device installed in a fixed state with respect to the gaming machine main body is further provided, and it is possible to change the effect mode to appear based on the operation of the push button device. Yes. Therefore, by combining the push button device arranged in the gaming machine main body and the operation switch arranged in the sliding operation unit, it is possible to diversify the change of the production mode or improve the usability of the player. It becomes possible.

  Means 6: The structure of means 5 is characterized in that “the effect control means recognizes the operation of the operation switch and the operation of the push button device without distinction”.

  According to the configuration of the means 6, the operation switch arranged in the sliding operation unit and the push button device arranged in the gaming machine main body function as the same switch. For this reason, the player can select a desired switch according to the gaming state and usability. For example, if you are interested in the operation itself, such as repeatedly hitting the switch, use a push button device that is relatively large and fixed to the main body of the game machine, while you want to operate it quietly with your dominant hand Can be selected such as using an operation switch provided in the sliding operation section. Therefore, usage according to the player's preference is possible, and interest in the production can be further enhanced.

Means 7: In the constitution of means 5, “the effect mode includes at least a first effect mode and a second effect mode,
The production control means changes the first production mode in association with the operation of the operation switch, and changes the second production mode in association with the operation of the push button device ”.

  According to the configuration of the means 7, the operation switch and the push button device are recognized as separate switches, respectively, and when the operation switch is operated, the first effect mode can be changed, and the push button device is operated. Then, it becomes possible to change the 2nd production mode. In other words, it is possible to associate and associate the function of changing the effect mode between the operation switch and the push button device. Therefore, by changing the production mode in a more complicated manner and by making the change in each production mode correspond to the switch suitable for the change, the interest in the production can be further enhanced.

  Means 8: In any one of the constitutions of Means 1 to 7, “The operation switch is disposed on the upper surface of the sliding operation portion and is pressed in a direction substantially perpendicular to the sliding direction of the sliding operation portion. "Operated".

  According to the configuration of the means 8, the sliding operation portion slides in a substantially horizontal direction, whereas the operation switch is pressed in a substantially vertical direction, that is, downward, with respect to the sliding direction. However, no force is applied to the side on which the sliding operation portion is displaced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the sliding operation unit held at the predetermined position from moving unexpectedly by operating the operation switch. In other words, it is possible to operate the operation switch while keeping the firing intensity of the launching device constant.

  Means 9: In any one of the means 1 to 8, the operation switch is arranged near the tip of the sliding operation portion on the game area side.

  According to the configuration of the means 9, since the operation switch is arranged on the distal end side of the sliding operation unit, it is possible to press the operation switch with the fingertip while holding the sliding operation unit with the palm. Therefore, one-handed operation is facilitated and the willingness to operate can be increased.

Means 10: In any one of the means 1 to 9, the slide guide surface of the operation base has a fan-like shape in plan view.
It further includes a wiring hole that is formed in the sliding guide surface near the rotating shaft and through which an electric wire connected to the operation switch is inserted. "

  According to the configuration of the means 10, the sliding guide surface of the operation base has a fan shape in a plan view, and the sliding operation portion is within a predetermined rotation range around the rotation axis whose axial direction is a substantially vertical direction. It is slidably supported. For this reason, while making the sliding guide surface relatively small, the tip portion (the portion on the side opposite to the rotating shaft) of the sliding operation portion can be greatly displaced, and the fine adjustment of the firing strength is facilitated. Moreover, since it rotates about a rotating shaft, a sliding operation part can be slid only by bending operation of a wrist, and operativity and a sense of stability can be improved further. Furthermore, since the wiring hole for inserting the electric wire connected to the operation switch is formed in the sliding guide surface in the vicinity of the rotating shaft, the rotating shaft of the sliding operating portion can be moved even if the sliding operating portion is displaced. The side and the wiring hole can always be overlapped, and as a result, the wire can be guided to the space below the sliding guide surface without exposing the electric wire.

Means 11: In any one configuration of Means 1 to 10, “The operation unit further includes a rotary operation body that is rotatably supported in a state in which a part protrudes from the upper surface of the sliding operation portion. Prepared,
The production control means changes the production mode in association with the pressing operation of the operation switch and the rotation operation of the rotary operation body.

  Here, as the “rotary operation body”, an operation disk (so-called “scroll wheel”) rotatably supported by a rotating shaft, or a ball (so-called “track”) that can be rotated in all directions by a fingertip. Ball ").

  According to the configuration of the means 11, when the rotary operation body is rotated with the palm or the fingertip, the rotation direction and the rotation amount are detected, and the effect mode can be changed accordingly. For this reason, it is possible to generate not only a simple ON signal but also an operation signal including a size and a direction, and it is possible to further diversify the change of the production mode and greatly enhance the entertainment interest of the production.

Means 12: “An outer frame attached to the gaming machine island facility;
A box-shaped or frame-shaped main body housing that is disposed in the outer frame and has an open front surface;
A door-shaped front member that is rotatably supported in a side-opening door shape between a closed position that closes the front surface of the main body housing and an open position that opens the front surface of the main body housing;
A game board disposed in the main body housing, having a game area formed on the front surface and having a plurality of winning holes and obstacle nails;
A launcher capable of driving a game ball, which is a game medium, at an arbitrary position above the game area by adjusting the launch intensity;
An operating base having a fan-shaped sliding guide surface on the top surface and installed on the front surface of the door-shaped front member, and the axial direction of the sliding guide surface of the operating base on the sliding guide surface. A sliding operation unit supported so as to be slidable within a predetermined rotation range around a rotation axis that is perpendicular to the rotation axis, and a signal corresponding to the rotation position of the sliding operation unit connected to the rotation shaft. An operation unit having position signal output means for outputting, and an operation switch disposed on the sliding operation portion and capable of being pressed;
Firing control means for controlling the firing intensity of the launching device based on the output of the position signal output means;
A start opening arranged in the game area and capable of winning a game ball;
A winning state detecting means for detecting that a game ball has won the start opening;
A game ball payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game balls based on at least detection of game balls by the winning state detection means;
A storage tray unit that is formed to project from the front surface of the door-shaped front member toward the player side, stores the game balls paid out from the game ball payout device, and causes the game balls to flow down toward the launch device,
Lottery means for performing lottery based on detection of game balls by the winning state detection means;
An open / close winning device that performs a predetermined opening / closing operation and allows a game ball to win by changing from a closed state to an open state;
When the lottery result of the lottery means a big hit, the opening / closing time of the opening / closing prize-winning device is set to a predetermined time that allows a plurality of game balls to win with a margin, and the opening / closing of the opening / closing prize-winning device Advantageous game state generating means for giving a specific profit to the player by performing the operation a plurality of times;
A special symbol display for displaying a special symbol indicating the lottery result of the lottery means;
Stop symbol determining means for determining a stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the lottery means;
Special symbol variation control means for changing the special symbol based on the detection of the game ball by the winning state detecting means, and for stopping the variation of the special symbol at the stop symbol determined by the stop symbol determining means;
An effect display means for displaying an effect associated with the game;
The special symbol variation control means can execute it from the start of the variation of the special symbol to the time when the variation is stopped at the stop symbol, and the lottery result of the lottery means is specified with respect to the possibility of winning the jackpot Effect execution means for causing the effect display means to appear, and
And an effect control means for changing an effect mode that appears during display of the effect in association with an operation of the operation switch provided in the sliding operation unit.

  Here, the “main body housing” may have a box shape in which only the front surface is open, or may have a frame shape (including a cylindrical shape) in which the front surface and the back surface are open. In the door-shaped front member, “laterally open door shape” means that, like a door, a rotation shaft having a substantially vertical axis is provided on one end side in the horizontal direction, and opens and closes around that rotation shaft. It shows the state.

  According to the configuration of the means 12, the front surface of the main body housing is provided with a door-shaped front member that is rotatably supported in a side-opening door shape, and the door-shaped front member is moved from the closed position to the open position. When it is rotated, the opening on the front surface of the housing is opened, and it becomes possible to operate a game board or the like disposed in the main body housing. The door-shaped front member is provided with a storage tray unit as a device for storing the paid-out game balls. The storage tray unit is formed so as to protrude from the front surface of the door-shaped front member toward the player side, stores the game balls that have been paid out, and causes the game balls to flow down toward the launching device.

  An operation unit is disposed on the front surface of the door-shaped front member located below the storage tray unit. The operation unit includes an operation base having a sliding guide surface on the upper surface and a sliding operation unit operable on the sliding guide surface, and the player performs a sliding operation on the sliding operation unit. The firing intensity of the launching device is adjusted according to the operation position of the sliding operation unit. Specifically, a signal corresponding to the operation position of the sliding operation unit is output from the position signal output means, and the firing intensity of the launching device is controlled based on the output.

  Here, the sliding operation portion is slid in a substantially horizontal direction while being placed on the sliding guide surface. For this reason, the player is driven into the firing strength of the launching device, that is, the game area by displacing the sliding operation unit in the horizontal direction with the hand placed on the sliding operation unit or the gripping operation unit being gripped from above. It becomes possible to adjust the momentum of the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to easily adjust the firing intensity of the launching device and to easily grasp the position of the sliding operation unit. In addition, since the sliding operation unit placed on a substantially horizontal plane is gripped from above, the sliding operation unit can be stably held with a light force. In particular, it is possible to generate friction between the sliding guide surface and the sliding operation part using the weight of the hand or arm, greatly reducing the arm force necessary to hold the sliding operation part. can do. In addition, since the entire palm can be positioned on the operation base, there is no unstable feeling that the arm is floating, and there is no twist of the arm, which can greatly reduce the player's fatigue. it can.

  In particular, the sliding guide surface of the operation base has a fan shape in plan view, and the sliding operation portion slides within a predetermined rotation range around a rotation axis whose axial center direction is perpendicular to the sliding guide surface. Because it is supported so that it can move, the tip of the sliding operation part (the part on the opposite side of the rotating shaft) can be displaced greatly while the sliding guide surface is relatively small. Becomes easy. Moreover, since it rotates about a rotating shaft, a sliding operation part can be slid only by bending operation of a wrist, and operativity and a sense of stability can be improved further.

  On the other hand, at least a start opening is provided in the game area, and when it is detected that a game ball has won at the start opening, a lottery by a lottery means is performed. When the lottery result is a big hit, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is generated. Specifically, the opening time per opening / closing prize winning device is set to a predetermined time that allows a plurality of game balls to win with plenty of room, and the opening / closing operation is performed multiple times, thereby Grant certain benefits. In addition, a special symbol display is provided on the gaming machine, and the special symbol is variably displayed based on the winning of the game ball at the start opening, and then the special symbol is changed with the stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result. Stop. Thereby, the player can grasp the lottery result based on the stop symbol. In addition, in order to increase the sharpness during the change of the special symbol, the effect may appear on the effect display means during the change of the special symbol. This effect relates to the possibility that the lottery result will be a big hit, and includes an effect in which the effect mode to appear can be changed based on the operation of the operation switch.

  By the way, since the operation switch used for this specific effect is provided in the sliding operation unit that is slid in a substantially horizontal direction, it can be operated with the fingertip of the hand that holds the sliding operation unit. Become. Therefore, it is possible to operate the operation switch with the finger of the dominant hand without interrupting the game ball. In addition, since the player can press the operation switch with almost no change in posture, the player's burden can be reduced and the player can be operated quietly.

  Means 13: In any one of the constitutions of means 1 to 12, “the gaming machine is a pachinko machine”. A pachinko machine is a gaming machine in which an input medium, which is a medium that a player inputs into the gaming machine, and a game medium, which is a medium used for a substantial game performed by the player, are the same. For example, it is a type of gaming machine in which a game is played using a medium such as a game ball. Specifically, “a launching device that launches a game ball in response to the operation of the operation handle, and appropriate equipment such as a number of obstacle nails, center objects, display means, etc. A game area provided with an appropriate entrance for a game ball such as a mouth, a passage opening, an arrival opening, etc., a rail for guiding the game ball from the launching device to the game area, and a game ball guided to the game area It has a payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls according to the entrance to the entrance and according to the entrance mode of the game balls to a plurality of entrances.

  In addition, there are various types of pachinko machines, and “typical state detection means for detecting the state of entrance to the entrance (typically, game state detection) represented by what is generally called“ digipachi ” Means), a lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery when the entry is detected by the entrance state detecting means, and a special symbol display means for changing the special symbol according to the lottery result of the lottery means and stopping the fluctuation. "In addition, what further includes an effect display means for causing a decorative symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of decorative symbols to change and display characters etc. at a predetermined timing while the special symbols are changing", Generally represented by what is commonly referred to as “Honeymono” “Represented by those having lottery means for performing lottery by distributing game balls in the role”, generally represented by “Alepati” For example, one game is played with a predetermined number of game balls such as 16, and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out in accordance with the manner of entering the game balls into a plurality of entrances in one game. can do.

  According to the structure of the means 13, in the pachinko machine, any one of the effects from the means 1 to the means 12 can be achieved.

  As described above, according to the present invention, it is possible to operate and hold the sliding operation unit with an easy posture, and the burden on the player's body can be greatly reduced. Moreover, since the operation of the operation switch provided in the sliding operation unit is associated with the effect mode, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the operation unit.

It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the main body frame with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine which concerns on embodiment, and opened the door frame with respect to the main body frame. It is the perspective view seen from the front of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a side view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame which comprise a pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame which comprise a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of an outer frame. It is a front view of an outer frame. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is BB sectional drawing (A) of FIG. 11, CC sectional drawing (B) of FIG. 13 (A), DD sectional drawing (C), and EE sectional drawing (D). It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is AA sectional drawing displayed on FIG. It is BB sectional drawing displayed on FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back of a door frame. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between the operation unit and the hit ball | bowl launcher provided in a main body frame. It is an enlarged front view of the lower part of the door frame showing the firing rail and the hitting ball basket. It is the perspective view seen from the front of the operation unit. It is a top view (partial sectional view) of an operation unit and a hit ball launching device. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the operation unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the sliding operation part in an operation unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the internal structure of the operation base in an operation unit from the front. It is DD sectional drawing displayed on FIG. It is sectional drawing which shows the change of the contact state of an operation base and a sliding operation part. It is sectional drawing which shows the state in the operation base in an origin position. It is sectional drawing which shows the state in the operation base in the strongest position. It is a front view of the main body frame main body before attaching components. It is a rear view of the main body frame main body before attaching components. It is a side view of the main body frame main body before attaching components. It is the perspective view seen from the back of the main body frame main body before attaching components. It is the perspective view seen from the front of the main body frame which attached components. It is the perspective view which looked at the state which pivotally supported the main body frame which attached components to the outer frame from the front. It is a rear view of the main body frame which attached components. It is the perspective view seen from the back of the main body frame which attached components. It is a cross-sectional plan view of the pachinko machine cut along a horizontal line in the middle of the pachinko machine (main control board box part). It is the perspective view seen from the front of a game board. It is a front view of a game board. It is a rear view of a game board. It is a top view of a game board. It is an expansion perspective view of the removal prevention mechanism part formed in a game board. It is a fragmentary perspective view of the main body frame which shows the structure by the side of the main body frame with respect to the removal prevention mechanism of a game board. It is a front view of a hit ball launching device. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the hit ball launching device. It is the perspective view which looked at the ball striking device from the back. It is the rear view which removed the rotary solenoid and the metal plate from the ball striking device. FIG. 4 is a perspective view (A), a plan view (B), and a side view (C) of the prize ball tank. It is a top view which shows the pressure state of the ball | bowl in the discharge port part of the conventional prize ball tank (A), (B) and the prize ball tank (C) which concerns on this embodiment. It is the perspective view seen from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 which shows the relationship between a prize ball tank, a tank rail member, a ball path unit, a prize ball unit, and a full tank unit. It is the perspective view seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 which shows the relationship between a prize ball tank, a tank rail member, a ball path unit, a prize ball unit, and a full tank unit. They are sectional drawing (A) and a top view (B) which show the relationship between the downstream part of a tank rail member, and the upstream part of a ball passage unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the relationship between a main body frame, a ball path unit, and a prize ball unit. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between a ball path unit and a prize ball unit. It is the perspective view seen from the back of a ball passage unit. It is a front view of a ball passage unit. It is a side view for demonstrating the connection structure of a ball path unit and a prize ball unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back side of a prize ball unit. It is a rear view for demonstrating the relationship between the payout motor and the sprocket as a payout member. It is a rear view for demonstrating the channel | path and drive relationship of a prize ball unit. FIG. 63 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 62. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between a prize ball unit and a full tank unit. It is a perspective view of a full tank unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of a full tank unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back of a full tank unit. It is a partially broken perspective view which shows the relationship between a full tank unit and a foul mouth. It is the cross-sectional view cut | disconnected by the bottom rocking | fluctuation board part provided in a full tank unit. It is sectional drawing which shows the relationship between a full tank unit and a foul mouth. It is a back perspective view which shows the relationship between a locking device and a main body frame. It is an expanded side sectional view which shows the latching structure to the main body frame of a locking device. It is the partial cross section cut | disconnected in the horizontal direction in the position slightly lower than the center of the vertical direction of a pachinko machine. It is an expanded sectional view which shows the detailed relationship between a locking device and the side wall of a main body frame. It is the side view (A) of a locking device, and the perspective view (B) seen from the front side. The perspective view (A) seen from the back side of the locking device, the perspective view (B) of the sliding rod for the glass door and the sliding rod for the main body frame provided slidably inside the U-shaped base of the locking device, (C). It is a disassembled perspective view of a locking device. It is a front view for demonstrating the effect | action of the sliding rod for glass doors, and the sliding rod for main body frames. It is a front view for demonstrating the effect | action of a fraud prevention member. It is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the back side. It is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the front side. It is a front view of the game board which has a game area. It is the perspective view seen from the front right side of the game board which has a game area | region. It is the perspective view seen from the front left side of the game board which has a game area | region. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board which has a game area | region, and was seen from the front. (A) is the perspective view seen from the front right side of the center character, (b) is the perspective view seen from the front left side of the center character. It is the perspective view seen from the front of the entrance unit. It is a front view of a prize space formation cover body which has a frame-shaped decoration unit. It is the perspective view seen from the front of the prize space formation cover body which has a frame-shaped decoration unit. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between a stage and a distribution effect apparatus. It is the perspective view seen from the front of the stage. It is a top view of a stage. It is AA sectional drawing of FIG. FIG. 93 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB of FIG. 92. It is CC sectional drawing of FIG. It is DD sectional drawing of FIG. It is EE sectional drawing of FIG. It is a top view which shows the relationship between a distribution effect apparatus and a guide passage member. It is the exploded perspective view seen from the front of the distribution production device. It is a part of block diagram which shows a control structure roughly. It is another part of the block diagram which shows a control structure schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by CPU mounted in a main board | substrate, and the process at the time of a power failure generation | occurrence | production. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by CPU mounted in a main board | substrate. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol and special electric accessory control process performed by CPU mounted in a main board | substrate. It is a flowchart which shows the start opening prize process in a special symbol and a special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation start process in a special symbol and a special electrically-powered object control process. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation pattern setting process in a special symbol and a special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the fluctuation | variation in a special symbol and a special electrically-powered object control process. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit game start process in a special symbol and a special electrically-powered object control process. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit game start process in a special symbol and a special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric utility jackpot control process in a special symbol and special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric accessory small hit control process in a special symbol and special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows the sub main process performed by the integrated CPU mounted in a periphery control board. It is a flowchart which shows the 16ms steady process performed by the integrated CPU mounted in a periphery control board. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis process in a 16ms regular process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control process in a 16 ms regular process. It is a flowchart which shows the decoration design change start process in an effect control process. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure regarding the 1st lottery in a main board | substrate. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure regarding the 2nd lottery in a main board | substrate. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure regarding an advantageous game state. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure regarding the normal lottery in a main board | substrate. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure regarding the production | presentation display control and decoration design variation control in an electrical decoration control board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table structure in the random number memory means for special symbols. It is a block diagram which shows the control structure in a distribution effect apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure at the time of using a table in control in a distribution effect apparatus. In the distribution operation variable table, it is a distribution table showing the relationship between each drive pattern and the distribution rate. It is the concrete effect image displayed in the case of a distribution effect. It is the concrete effect image displayed in the case of a distribution effect. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure regarding control of the light emission part in distribution production. It is a top view which shows the example of a change of the light emission mode in a sliding operation part, (a) is before a change, (b) is after a change. It is a top view which shows the modification of the light emission part in a sliding operation part. It is a perspective view which shows the modification of the presentation operation button in a sliding operation part.

[Overall structure of pachinko machine]
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko game according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 8. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame 3 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment, and the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3. FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the pachinko machine 1, FIG. 4 is a side view of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. 5 is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. 6 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, the game board 4, and the door frame 5 constituting the pachinko machine 1, as viewed from the rear. 8 is an exploded perspective view as seen from the front of the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, the game board 4, and the door frame 5 constituting the pachinko machine 1.

  1 to 8, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment can be mounted with an outer frame 2 installed on an island (not shown), and pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable. A main body frame 3, a game window 101 that is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 and is formed on the game board 4 and into which a ball is driven, and a game window 101 that allows a player to visually recognize the game area 101 and a lower part of the game window 101. And a door frame 5 provided with a tray unit 300 as a storage tray for storing balls that are arranged and are paid out according to the result of the game. Here, the door frame 5 corresponds to the door-shaped front member of the present invention, and the tray unit 300 corresponds to the storage tray unit of the present invention.

  A lower front plate 14 whose surface is covered with a decorative cover plate 15 is fixed to the outer frame 2 at the lower front side. Further, as described above, the game board 4 can be detachably attached to the main body frame 3, and a hitting ball launching device 650 (corresponding to the launching device of the present invention) and a door excluding the game board 4 are provided at the bottom of the back surface thereof. A substrate unit 1100 on which various control boards and power supply boards for controlling electrical components provided on the frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are provided together is attached, and a rear surface opening 580 of the main body frame 3 (see FIG. 7). ) Is detachably provided. Furthermore, in addition to the above-described dish unit 300, the door frame 5 is provided with a glass unit 250 and an operation unit 1700 so as to close the gaming window 101. The door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 have substantially the same square size when viewed from the front, and the main body frame 3 cannot be visually recognized from the front. Hereinafter, members constituting the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail.

[Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 9 to 13. 9 is a front perspective view of the outer frame 2, FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view as seen from the front of the outer frame 2, FIG. 11 is a front view of the outer frame 2, and FIG. FIG. 13 is a rear view of the outer frame 2, and FIG. 13 is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 11A, a sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 13A, and a sectional view taken along line DD. , E-E sectional view (D).

  9 and 10, the outer frame 2 according to the present embodiment is a connection for connecting the upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and 11 and the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 at their respective ends. It is assembled in a square shape by connecting with the member 19. Specifically, the connecting member 19 is formed in a podium shape with a step between the center and the left and right, and the protruding center part is an engagement notch formed at the center of both ends of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. The side frame plates 12, 13 are fitted to the side surfaces of the left and right portions which are fitted to the portion 20, and the back surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the upper surface of the lower frame plate 11 are in contact with the planes of the left and right portions lowered one step. The inner surface of the is in contact.

  In that state, the insertion hole 21 and the left and right sides of the connecting member 19 are lowered by one step on both sides of the engagement notch 20 of the upper frame plate 10 and on both sides of the engagement notch 20 of the lower frame plate 11. A plurality of (two in the illustrated case) connecting holes 22 (shown on the connecting member 19 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plate 12 in FIG. Are also fixed by a plurality of (two in the illustrated case) connecting screws 23 from above or below, and further, a plurality ( Two (in the illustrated case) mounting holes 24 and a plurality of (three in the illustrated case) connecting holes 25 formed on the side surfaces of the left and right portions of the connecting member 19 that are lowered by one step are aligned to form a plurality (from the lateral outer side). The upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and 10 are fixed by fastening with three connecting screws 26 and 27 in the case of illustration. A lower frame plate 11 and the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 is firmly coupled and fixed. However, of the three connecting screws 26 and 27, one connecting screw 27 does not connect the side frame plates 12 and 13 and the connecting member 19 but connects the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. The member 19 is directly connected from the side.

  Of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 constituting the outer frame 2, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are made of the same wood as in the prior art, and the side frame plates 12 and 13. Is made of an extruded plate of a lightweight metal, for example, an aluminum alloy. The reason why the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are made of the same wood as before is that when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on an island lined up in a game hall, a predetermined angle is given to the vertical plane of the island. Although it is necessary to perform a fixing operation, such an operation is performed by hitting the nail to the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the island, so that it is easy to hit the nail. On the other hand, the reason why the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of an aluminum alloy extruded plate is that the thickness of the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be reduced while maintaining the strength as compared with the conventional wood. The lateral width when viewed from the front of the side walls 540 to 543 (see FIG. 33) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to the main frame 3 can be increased. This is because the game board 4 having a large lateral dimension can be mounted on the main body frame 3, and as a result, the game area 605 of the game board 4 can be formed larger.

  If the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of an aluminum alloy flat plate, sufficient rigidity cannot be ensured. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 13C, the side frame plate 12 (the side frame plate 13 has the same structure). .) Is formed by drawing so that the thickness h1 of the rear portion is increased by forming a space portion 28 (the space portion 28 of the side frame plate 13 is shown in FIG. 12) opened rearward by a rib. Yes. Of course, the wall thickness h1 is the same as or slightly smaller than the wall thickness of the conventional wood.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 13B and 13D, in the front of the space portion 28 of the side frame plate 12, a groove portion 29 (on the side where one portion of the left and right portions lowered by one step of the connecting member 19 is fitted. 9 is formed in the groove 29 of the frame plate 13. From the groove 29 to the front end of the side frame plate 12, as shown in FIGS. 13B to 13D, a flat plate shape with which the other side of the left and right portions whose inner side surfaces are lowered by one step is brought into contact. However, a shallow concave portion for reducing material is formed in the flat plate portion. Further, on the opposite surface (outer surface) where the groove 29 is formed, as shown in FIGS. 9 and 13B, the recessed portion 30 (side) into which the hanging piece 53 of the upper support metal fitting 45 is inserted. A recess 30 of the frame plate 13 is formed in FIG.

  In addition to the structure for attaching the connecting member 19, the side frame plate 12 on the pivot support side formed as described above has a hanging piece portion 53 of the upper support fitting 45 on the outer side of the side frame plate 12. A mounting hole 31 for fixing with a fixing screw 32 is formed in the lower portion of the mounting hole 31, and a fixing screw 34 is formed at the lower portion thereof so as to coincide with the mounting hole 69 formed in the vertical contact piece 72 of the lower support fitting 66. A mounting hole 33 for fastening is formed. Also, a mounting hole 35 for fixing the side frame plate 12 and the lower front plate 14 with a fixing screw 36 is formed in the lower part of the mounting hole 33 and in the front portion of the side frame plate 12.

  On the other hand, in addition to the configuration for attaching the connecting member 19, the open side frame portion 13 is provided with an attachment hole 37 for attaching a closing projection 38 with an attachment screw 39 in the upper portion thereof, and closing the lower portion thereof. A mounting hole 40 for mounting the projection 41 with the mounting screw 42 is formed, and a mounting hole 43 for fixing the side frame plate 13 and the lower front plate 14 with a fixing screw 44 is further provided at the lowermost position. Is formed.

  The closing protrusions 38 and 41 are hook portions 1054 and 1065 (see FIG. 75) of the locking device 1000 that are attached along the open side of the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. As will be described in detail later, by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 and turning it in one direction, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing projections 38 and 41 are engaged with each other. The main frame 3 can be opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by being uncoupled.

  The lower front plate 14 fixed to the lower front surface of the lower frame plate 11 and the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 has the main body frame 3 placed on the upper surface thereof when closed. The front and side surfaces of the decorative cover plate 15 are covered with a decorative cover plate 15, and a fixing protrusion 16 (see FIG. 12) is formed on the rear surface of the decorative cover plate 15. The attachment protrusion 16 is attached to the lower front plate 14 by being passed through a fastening hole 17 that passes through the lower front plate 14. A guide plate 18 for smoothly guiding the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed is replaceably mounted on the upper surface of the outer cover 2 on the decorative cover plate 15.

  By the way, as a structure for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable, the main frame 3 is attached along one upper surface of the upper support plate 45 and the lower front plate 14 that also serve to connect the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plate 12. A lower support fitting 66 is provided. The upper support fitting 45 is formed with a support hole 47 formed by bending the support protrusion piece 46 protruding forward from the side of the support protrusion piece 46 toward the center of the tip. A shaft support pin 504 (see FIG. 35) of an upper shaft support fitting 503 (described later) of the main body frame 3 is detachably engaged with the flange 47.

  Further, the lower support fitting 66 is also formed to protrude forward, and a support protrusion 68 protrudes upward from the protruding portion, and a frame support plate 506 (described later) of the main body frame 3 is provided on the support protrusion 68. The support hole formed in FIG. 36) is inserted. Accordingly, in order to support the main body frame 3 on the outer frame 2, after the support holes formed in the frame support plate 506 of the main body frame 3 are engaged with the support protrusions 68 of the lower support metal fitting 66, By pivoting the pivot pin 504 of the upper pivot bracket 503 in the support hole 47, it can be pivotally supported so as to be freely opened and closed.

  The upper support bracket 45 is attached to a mounting step portion 49 formed in a concave shape on the upper surface and the front surface of the upper frame plate 10 on the shaft support side. A plurality of (two in the illustrated case) mounting holes 48 and a plurality of (two in the illustrated case) mounting holes 50 formed in the mounting step portion 49 are aligned so that the mounting screws 51 are inserted from above, and the upper frame The upper support fitting 45 is firmly fixed to the upper frame plate 10 by being fastened to the clamping plate 52 pressed from the back surface of the plate 10.

  Further, there is a hanging piece 53 that contacts the outside of the side frame plate 12 on the outer side of the upper support fitting 45, and a mounting hole is also formed in the hanging piece 53, and this mounting hole and the mounting hole are provided. 31 is fixed with fixing screws 32 to fix the upper support bracket 45 and the side frame plate 12 and to connect the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plate 12 via the upper support bracket 45. Yes.

  On the other hand, the lower support fitting 66 is fixed by the fixing screw 34 in a state where the mounting hole 33 of the side frame plate 12 and the mounting hole 69 of the vertical contact piece 72 coincide with each other as described above. By inserting a mounting screw 71 into a mounting hole 70 drilled in the middle of the horizontal surface of the metal fitting 66, it is fixed to the upper surface of the lower front plate 14 via the decorative cover plate 15.

  In the outer frame 2 configured as described above, the connecting member 19 is connected to the side frame by connecting the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13, which are constituent members, with the connecting member 19. Since the connection member 19 is fastened in close contact with the inner surfaces of the plates 12 and 13 and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are engaged with each other, the mounting strength is high and the rectangular shape is strong. It can be a framework. In addition to the engagement state of the connecting member 19 with the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, when the connecting member 19 is attached to the side frame plates 12 and 13, Since one part of the structure is fitted, the attachment of the connecting member 19 to the side frame plates 12 and 13 is strengthened, which can also improve the strength of the rectangular frame and accurately position it. Can be done.

  Further, when the upper support plate 45 is attached at a predetermined position after the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are connected by the connecting member 19, as shown in FIGS. Since there is no member protruding outward from the outer surface (outer peripheral surface) of each of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on a pachinko island base (not shown), an adjacent device (for example, It can be attached in close contact with the adjacent ball lending device. Even when the lower support fitting 66 is attached, the upper surface of the lower front plate 14 and the upper surface of the lower support fitting 66 are substantially flush with each other.

(Door frame)
Next, the door frame 5 provided on the front side of the main body frame 3 so as to be freely opened and closed will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 19. 14 is a front view of the door frame 5, FIG. 15 is a rear view of the door frame 5, FIG. 16 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA shown in FIG. 14, and FIG. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the door frame 5, and FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view seen from the back of the door frame 5.

  As shown in FIGS. 14, 15, 18, and 19, the door frame 5 has a vertically long hexagonal gaming window 101 formed on the upper part of a door frame main body 100 that is formed in a square shape. A door lens unit 120 is attached around the front surface, a plate unit 300 is provided on the door frame main body 100 on the front surface of the plate-like portion below the game window 101, and an operation base of the operation unit 1700 is provided below the plate unit 300. A stand 1702 (details will be described later) is fixed in a projecting manner. Further, a reinforcing sheet metal 210 is fixed around the gaming window 101 on the back surface of the door frame main body 100, and a glass unit 250 is attached so as to close the gaming window 101, and a plate-like portion below the gaming window 101 is attached. A mounting base 280 and a frame decoration relay board 290 are respectively attached to the back surface. A security cover 270 having a security function is also attached to the bottom of the back surface of the glass unit 250. Hereinafter, a more detailed structure of each of the above constituent members constituting the door plate 5 will be described.

<Door frame body>
As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the door frame main body 100 is formed in a frame shape with a synthetic resin, and as described above, the vertically long hexagonal gaming window 101 is formed on the upper portion, and the lower side of the gaming window 101 is It is a plate-like part. A circular speaker opening 102 that penetrates a speaker 163, which will be described later, is formed on the upper left and right of the gaming window 101, and a stopper 254 of a glass unit 250, which will be described later, is locked below the speaker opening 102. A stop lever 108 (see FIG. 15) is rotatably provided. Note that the gaming window 101 according to the present embodiment is attached with the gaming board 4 having larger vertical and horizontal dimensions than conventional gaming windows 101, so the vertical and horizontal dimensions of the gaming window 101 are also increased. Yes. For this reason, the shape of the door frame lens unit 120, which will be described later, is greatly different from that generally known in the art.

  On the other hand, in the plate-like portion below the game window 101, a prize ball passage port 103 through which the prize ball communication rod 451 of the dish unit 300 passes is opened at the upper part on the pivot support side. A lid opening 105 for detaching 406 is opened, and a ball feeding opening 104 for mounting the ball feeding unit 287 is opened at a position adjacent to the opening side of the lid opening 105. Further, a lock hole 106 for allowing the cylinder lock 1010 to pass therethrough is opened closer to the open side.

  In addition, on the plate-like portion below the ball feed opening 104, engagement receiving pieces (not shown) for hooking the latching projection pieces 255 of the glass unit 250 are formed on the lower left and right sides of the game window 101 on the back side. A mounting opening 110 for mounting a mounting elastic piece 273 (to be described later) of the security cover 270 is formed on the side of the engagement receiving piece. In addition, an engagement protrusion 111 is formed in the center of the front surface of the plate-like portion so as to be inserted forward into a guide hole (not shown) of a dish unit 300 described later. Further, the lower side of the door frame main body 100 is a door frame protruding piece 112 protruding rearward, and as will be described later, the door frame protruding piece 112 and engagement grooves 584 and 585 formed in the main body frame 3 Constitutes the outer ridge and the engaging portion at the lower side portion of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3.

<Door lens unit>
Next, the structure of the door lens unit 120 attached to the upper part on the front side of the door frame main body 100 will be described. The door lens unit 120 includes a reflector having a front surface as a reflection surface, a cold cathode tube and an LED substrate attached to the front and inside of the reflector, a light-transmissive lens cover 150 covering the front of the reflector, and the lens cover 150. And a lens base body 121 serving as a base of the lens cover 150.

  In the lens cover 150, the upper lens cover portion 151 and the side lens cover portions 156 and 157 in the lens base body 121 are formed of a transparent resin. And since the opening dimension of the game window 101 formed in the door frame main body 100 is formed larger than before, as described above, the dimension between the outer periphery of the door frame main body 100 and the inner periphery of the game window 101. In other words, since the dimensions for attaching the lens cover 150 (particularly the dimensions of the left and right sides) are narrow, the lens cover 150 in this embodiment includes the upper lens cover 151 and the side lens cover. All of the maximum forward projecting portions of the portions 156 and 157 have a wedge-shaped cross section in which the projecting size projecting forward is larger than the base size (the width size of the portion contacting the door frame body 100). ing. More specifically, the upper lens cover portion 151 and the side lens cover portions 156 and 157 are both formed as a white lens portion with a wedge-shaped front bulging portion formed of a synthetic resin, and the lower end portion of the white lens portion. A red lens portion formed of synthetic resin with different coloring is connected to the inside of the gaming window 101 to be bordered.

  By the way, the upper lens cover portion 151 is formed in a wedge shape in a cross section with a hollow inside and opened at the rear, and is formed in a boomerang shape in a plan view. It is formed so that the distance between the cathode tube and the inner surface of the wedge-shaped tip is reduced. An opaque leading molding member 154 colored in silver is fixed to the outer side of the wedge-shaped front end portion of the upper lens cover portion 151, and the front bulging surface having a wedge-shaped cross section corresponding to almost the entire upper lens cover portion 151 is formed. Illuminated with an upper cold cathode tube. The side lens cover portions 156 and 157 are similar to the upper lens cover portion 151 in that the inside is hollow and the rear is open and formed in a wedge shape in cross section. The distance between the side cold cathode fluorescent tube formed in a straight line and the inner surface of the wedge-shaped tip is smaller than that of the lens cover 151 and is formed in a boomerang shape having a gentle curve as a whole. Is formed to be close.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the reason why the cold cathode tube is used as the illumination means for decorating the periphery of the front surface of the door frame 5 is as follows. When decorating the periphery of the front surface of the door frame 5, there is a restriction that the distance between the light source and the lens cover disposed on the front surface of the light source cannot be made too large. This restriction is because the door frame 5 is always opened and closed, and if the protrusion amount is made too large, there is a possibility that the operation at the time of opening may be hindered. Thus, in a situation where the distance between the light source and the lens cover is not so large, the light decoration visible through the lens cover is continuous when the lamp or LED is scattered as the light source as in the past. The light decoration is not visible, but can only be seen as a spotted pattern with strong and weak parts. On the other hand, when a continuous cold cathode tube is used as a light emitting source as in this embodiment, even if the distance between the cold cathode tube and the lens cover 150 is short, the light decoration visible through the lens cover 150 is A beautiful light decoration in a continuous state is visible. For this reason, since the area surrounding the game board 4 is bordered by a continuous beautiful light decoration, it is possible to achieve a decoration effect not found in conventional pachinko machines. If the distance between the light source and the lens cover can be kept to some extent, light should diffuse and illuminate the entire area of the lens cover with little intensity even if scattered light sources such as LEDs are used. Can do.

  Further, a decorative member attachment region 184 is formed below the side lens cover portions 156 and 157 of the lens cover 150, and the decorative member 185 is attached to the decorative member attachment region 184. The decorative member 185 has a shape similar to the speaker cover 165 described above, and when the lens cover 150 is attached to the surface of the door frame main body 100, the impression that the upper left and right sides and the lower left and right sides of the lens cover 150 are balanced. It is attached to give Note that the speaker cover 165 and the decorative member 185 described above do not simply cover the front of the speaker 163 or decorate the lower part of the lens cover 150 as described above, but the periphery thereof is light-decorated with LEDs. It has a structure.

  As described above in detail, the speaker cover 165 and the decorative member 185 according to the present embodiment have four corners in the region surrounding the game window 101 of the door frame 5 apart from the light decoration by the cold cathode tube and the LED substrate described above. Since it is configured so as to be intensively decorated with light, the entire circumference except for the lower side of the gaming window 101 is not casually decorated with light, but can be made with a light decoration with strength and weakness. In particular, the light decoration on the upper left and right sides of the door frame 5 has a tendency that only the speaker is conventionally arranged, and the light decoration around the speaker is not performed, so the light decoration around the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 has a spotted impression. However, by configuring as in the present embodiment, the entire periphery except the lower side of the gaming window 101 can be effectively decorated with light.

<Reinforcing sheet metal>
The door lens unit 120 described above is attached to the front side of the door frame main body 100, and the dish unit 300 is attached below the door lens unit 120. Here, before describing the structure of the dish unit 300, the reinforcing sheet metal 210, the glass unit 250, the security cover 270, the mounting base 280, the frame decoration relay board 290, and the operation unit 1700 attached to the back side of the door frame body 100 will be described. A description will be made sequentially. First, the reinforcing sheet metal 210 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 18, 19 and 15 to 17.

  As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the reinforcing sheet metal 210 is attached along the upper side reinforcing sheet metal 211 that is attached along the rear side of the upper side of the door frame main body 100 and the rear side of the side of the shaft support side of the door frame main body 100. A pivot-side reinforcing sheet metal 212, an open-side reinforcing sheet metal 213 that is attached along the back of the open side of the door frame body 100, and a lower reinforcing sheet metal that is attached along the back of the lower side of the gaming window 101 of the door frame body 100. 214 are fastened with screws or the like to form a square shape.

  As shown in FIG. 18, an upper shaft support portion 218 having a shaft pin 219 slidably provided on the upper surface of the upper and lower ends of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 212 and a shaft pin 221 ( And a lower shaft support portion 220 having a structure (see FIG. 15). The upper and lower shaft pins 219 and 221 are pivotally supported by an upper shaft bracket 503 and a lower shaft bracket 509 formed on the upper and lower sides of the body frame 3, so that the door frame 5 is attached to the body frame 3. It can be opened and closed freely.

  The lower reinforcing sheet metal 214 has a predetermined width and is formed to have a length substantially the same as the width dimension of the door frame main body 100, and the lower long side edge of the both long side edges is bent rearward. Although it becomes the lower bending protrusion piece 229, and both sides of the upper long side edge are the upper bending protrusion pieces 230 bent backward, The sandwiched portion is a vertical bent protrusion 231 extending in the vertical direction. The amount of protrusion of the lower bent protrusion 229 is not so large, and the lower bent protrusion 229 does not engage with the groove or the recess to form the uneven engagement, but is formed to increase the strength. On the other hand, the amount of protrusion of the upper bent protrusion 230 on both sides is slightly larger than the amount of protrusion of the lower bent protrusion 229, and somewhat prevents intrusion of unauthorized tools from below, but rather the lower reinforcement in the present embodiment. The most characteristic configuration of the sheet metal 214 is a vertical bent protrusion 231.

  The vertical bent protrusion 231 is formed in a concave shape so that its upper edge shape matches the lower end shape of the unit frame 251 of the glass unit 250 described later, and when the glass unit 250 is fixed to the back surface side of the door frame 5 Further, the upper end piece of the vertical bent protruding piece 231 is adapted to engage with an engaging groove 261 formed along the outer periphery of substantially the center in the width direction of the unit frame 251 of the glass unit 250 (see FIG. 17). ). The lower reinforcing sheet metal 214 is formed with a prize ball passage port covering portion 228 that protects the outer periphery excluding the bottom surface of the prize ball passage port 103 formed in the door frame main body 100.

<Glass unit (transparent plate unit)>
Next, the glass unit 250 as a transparent plate unit attached to the back surface of the door frame 5 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the glass unit 250 has an annular vertically long octagonal unit frame 251 molded with a synthetic resin having an opening larger than the game window 101, and outer peripheral front and back surfaces of the opening of the unit frame 251. It is constituted by adhering two glass plates 262 (not a glass plate but a transparent synthetic resin plate) as a transparent plate (with a hot melt adhesive). In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, in the unit frame 251, the desiccant enclosure space part which encloses a desiccant inside is formed.

<Security cover>
Next, with respect to the crime prevention cover 270 that covers the lower back surface of the glass unit 250 and is provided with a crime prevention function that prevents the intrusion of unauthorized tools into the game board 4, mainly FIG. 15, FIG. 17, FIG. Will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in the figure, the security cover 270 is formed in a flat plate shape so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 250 between the left and right reinforcing sheet metals 212 and 213 with a transparent synthetic resin, and the upper side portion thereof is the inner side of the game board 4. It is formed as an arc-shaped contact recess 271 along the lower arc surface of the rail 603, and a post-crime prevention projection piece 274 protrudes rearward along the contact recess 271. Further, a crime prevention rear end protrusion 275 is formed in a slanting manner on the back surface of the pivot support side with the security cover 270 attached. On the other hand, on the front surface of the crime prevention cover 270, a crime prevention pre-projection piece 272 is projected along the lower shape of the unit frame 251 of the glass unit 250 with the crime prevention cover 270 attached, and U-shaped at the lower ends. A mounting elastic piece 273 formed in a protruding manner is formed to project forward.

  The security cover 270 configured as described above is detachably attached to the back side of the door frame 5 by mounting the mounting elastic piece 273 in the mounting opening 110 formed in the door frame main body 100. In the attached state, as shown in FIG. 17, the pre-crime projection piece 272 faces the lower rear side surface of the unit frame 251 of the glass unit 250. Further, the front end of the crime prevention front protrusion 272 is in contact with the vertical bent protrusion 231. In addition, the post-crime projection piece 274 and the post-crime end edge projection piece 275 are in a state of protruding rearward, but when the door frame 5 is closed, the half of the post-crime prevention projection piece 274 on the shaft support side is The bottom side of the inner rail 603 fixed to the game board 4 enters and faces each other, but the half on the open side of the post-crime projecting piece 274 is rail security formed on the inner rail 603 of the front component 601 The state is inserted into the groove 607, and the crime prevention rear end protrusion 275 is superposed along the upper surface of the crime prevention projection 608 formed on the shaft support side of the main body frame 3 (see FIG. 40). ).

  Thus, in the state in which the security cover 270 is attached and the door frame 5 is closed, the security structure by the door frame protrusion 112 and the engagement grooves 584 and 585 described above, and the security protrusion 285 and the security space 586 described later. In addition to the crime prevention structure, the intrusion of unauthorized tools from the lower front direction of the security cover 270 is caused by the polymerization of the pre-crime projection pieces 272 and the unit frame 251 even if an unauthorized device is attempted to enter from the lower side of the glass unit 250. The anti-crime piece 274 and the inner rail 603 constituting the front component member 601 are superposed to prevent unauthorized equipment from entering from the lower side of the rear face of the security cover 270. In particular, against the intrusion of unauthorized tools from the diagonally lower side of the door frame 5 on the shaft support side, the intrusion of unauthorized tools into the outer rail 602 is prevented by the superposed structure of the security projection 608 and the rear end projection 275. In addition, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 605 of the game board 4 by a superposed structure of the inner rail 603 and the post-crime protruding piece 274.

  Similarly, in addition to the crime prevention structure by the double bent protrusions 223 and 225 of the opening-side reinforcing sheet metal 213, the intrusion of unauthorized tools from the obliquely lower side on the opening side of the door frame 5, Due to the uneven engagement between the rail security groove 607 and the post-crime projection piece 274, it is possible to further prevent the unauthorized tool from entering the game area 605 of the game board 4. Note that a vertical surface between the post-crime protrusion 274 and the rear end protrusion 275 on the back side of the security cover 270 is formed by the outer rail 602 and the inner rail 603 with the door frame 5 closed. Since it covers the lower part of the front surface of the guide path of the hit ball, it also has a function of preventing the hit ball hitting or back feeding the guide path part from colliding with the glass plate 262.

<Mounting base>
As shown in FIGS. 15, 18, and 19, the mounting base 280 is attached so as to cover the upper half of the rear surface of the plate portion of the door frame main body 100, and is a transparent synthetic resin similar to the security cover 270. Is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape whose front is opened. This mounting base 280 is formed by the rear surface of the mounting base 280 and the plate portion 511 of the main body frame 3 when the door frame 5 is closed in order to smoothly guide the ball fired from the launch rail 515 to the game board 4. For this reason, a ball flight guide surface 286 is formed on the rear surface of the mounting base 280. By the way, the mounting base 280 according to the present embodiment has a prize ball passing port opening 281 that penetrates the rear protruding portion of the prize ball passing port covering part 228 formed in the lower reinforcing sheet metal 214 at the upper part on the shaft support side. A ball feed unit mounting recess 282 is formed in the lower part of the open side to which the ball feed unit 287 is attached. A region in the oblique direction from the ball feed unit mounting recess 282 is a ball flight guide surface 286.

  The ball feed unit 287 (see FIG. 15) attached to the ball feed unit mounting recess 282 is provided with a ball feed member that swings in response to the reciprocating motion of the ball hitting bar 654 of the ball hitting device 650 described later. The balls at the lower end of the guide path of the tray unit 300 are supplied one by one to the firing position of the firing rail 515 by the swinging motion of the ball feeding member. Further, a lid opening 283 into which a finger can be put when a side opening lid 406 described later is removed is formed in the middle lower part of the mounting base 280. Further, an upright wall 284 is formed to stand vertically on a part of the upper side of the mounting base 280. As shown in FIG. 15, the upright wall 284 is provided to restrict the lower portion of the security cover 270 from moving forward by contacting the front surface of the security cover 270 when the security cover 270 is attached. is there.

  Further, the mounting base 280 according to the present embodiment is characterized in that the security protrusion 285 is obliquely projected from the lower side of the above-described ball flight guide surface 286 to the prize ball passage opening 281 toward the rear. It is. As described above, the security projecting piece 285 is provided between the security space 586 formed in the plate portion 511 of the main body frame 3 and the inner ridges and the inner side ridges at the lower side portions of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. The engaging portion is configured.

<Frame decoration relay board>
As shown in FIGS. 15 and 18, a frame decoration relay board 290 is attached to the lower shaft support side of the mounting base 280, and a relay board cover 291 that covers the rear surface of the frame decoration relay board 290 is attached. ing. This frame decoration relay board 290 is an electric decoration part or electric part provided on the door frame 5 (cold cathode tube, LED board, speaker 163, switch provided in the operation unit 1700, ball rental unit 327, operation button unit 329, etc. Wiring from the frame decoration relay board 290 is integrated and connected, and the prize ball payout control board 1186 via the door relay board 1102 or the like incorporated in the board unit 1100 attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3. And the main control board 1350 (see FIG. 100) of the main control board box 624 attached to the game board 4.

<Dish unit>
Next, the configuration of the dish unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 14, 18 and 19. The dish unit 300 is roughly divided into a unit frame 301 constituting an appearance, a lower speaker unit 340 attached to the inside of the unit frame 301, and an upper part of the lower speaker unit 340 so as to face the upper surface of the unit frame 301. , A second ball extraction link unit (not shown) for performing the ball extraction operation of the second ball extraction valve provided on the plate body 380, and a plate lid plate for closing the rear surface of the unit frame 301 450.

  The unit frame 301 is provided with a ball rental unit 327. The ball lending unit 327 is provided with a switch for deriving a lending command, a remaining lending indicator, and the like when a ball lending machine is provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. Further, the unit frame 301 is provided with an operation button unit 329 at the front center on the upper surface. The operation button unit 329 includes a plurality of (three in the illustrated example) push button devices 330a, 330b, and 330c. The plurality of push button devices 330 are provided on the game board 4. It is operated when the player participates in the game content performed by the liquid crystal display device 640 or the like. Although not shown, each push button device 330 is operated by pressing an operation button having an operation button formed on the upper surface, a base member that supports the operation button so as to be displaceable in the pressing operation direction, and an operation button pressing operation. And a pressing operation detecting means for detecting that the button has been displaced to the detection position. As the pressing operation detecting means, a contact type detecting means that switches a contact point by pressing an operating part, such as a limit switch, may be used. A photo sensor in which a light emitting element and a light receiving element are opposed to each other, A contactless detection means such as a proximity sensor for detecting a change may be used.

  Further, the dish unit 300 is provided with a first ball extraction button 316 on the right side of the upper surface of the unit frame 301, and a second part of the second ball extraction link unit is formed at the lower center of the unit frame 301. A two-ball removal button 421 is arranged. In this embodiment, the two ball removal buttons 316 and 421, which are the first ball removal button 316 and the second ball removal button 421, are provided by storing the dish body 380 by operating the first ball removal button 316. Although all the spheres stored in the portion 381 and the guide passage portion can be removed, the operation of removing the spheres takes some time to remove the spheres arranged in a line in the guide passage portion 382. On the other hand, by operating the second ball removal button 421, the ball on the upstream side from the storage portion 381 of the dish body 380 can be quickly removed from the second ball extraction opening having a large diameter. Can be shortened. For this reason, it is possible to select the length of time for the player to take the ball.

  In addition, when a big hit is made during the game, a large amount of balls are paid out to the dish unit 300, and if the game is continued with the ball left unattended, the full tank switch 916 provided on the upstream side of the dish unit 300 (see FIG. 65) may function to stop the payout operation or stop the bullet operation, so that the game may not be able to continue. In such a case, the second ball release button 421 By performing the operation, the ball that is being stored in the dish unit 300 is removed, and at the same time, the supply of the ball to the launch position is maintained, and the game during the big hit can be continued.

<Operation unit>
Next, the operation unit 1700 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 21 is an enlarged front view of the lower part of the door frame, FIG. 22 is a perspective view seen from the front of the operation unit, FIG. 23 is a plan view of the operation unit and the ball hitting device, and FIG. FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the operation unit, FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the sliding operation section in the operation unit, and FIG. 26 is a front view of the internal structure of the operation base in the operation unit. 27 is an exploded perspective view seen from FIG. 27, FIG. 27 is a sectional view taken along the line DD shown in FIG. 23, and FIG. 28 is a sectional view showing changes in the contact state between the operation base and the sliding operation unit. 29 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in the operation base at the origin position, and FIG. 30 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in the operation base at the maximum strength position.

  As shown in FIG. 21, the operation unit 1700 is disposed at the lower front portion of the door frame 5, particularly at the lower right of the dish unit 300, and is a game ball to be driven by the ball hitting ball 654 of the ball hitting device 650 (see FIG. 46). The launch intensity can be adjusted. As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, the operation unit 1700 includes an operation base 1702 installed on the front surface of the door frame 5 via a mounting coupler 1704 (see FIG. 24), and a sliding guide for the operation base 1702. The sliding operation unit 1703 is slidably supported on the surface 1720, and the sliding operation unit 1703 has an origin position (a position indicated by a solid line in FIG. 23) with the fixed point P as the center. To the most intense position (position where the launching intensity of the game ball is maximized: the position indicated by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 23) can be arbitrarily displaced.

  First, the configuration of the operation base 1702 will be specifically described. As shown in FIG. 24, the operation base 1702 has a box shape from a top plate 1710, a frame member 1712 attached to cover the peripheral surface of the top plate 1710, and a bottom member 1711 attached to the lower part thereof. In the interior, an origin position detection means 1713 for detecting that the sliding operation unit 1703 is the origin position (initial position) and a sliding position (operation position) of the sliding operation unit 1703 are detected. The sliding position detecting means 1714, the returning means 1715 for biasing the sliding operation section 1703 to return to the origin position, and the vibration of the player's hand operating the sliding operation section 1703 in a specific gaming state Vibration generating means 1716 for providing a touch of the above.

  More specifically, the top plate 1710 is made of synthetic resin, and is composed of an upper surface portion 1721 having a fan-shaped sliding guide surface 1720 and a peripheral wall portion 1722 that is suspended from the periphery thereof, and a lid whose lower surface is opened. It has a shape of a shape. As the synthetic resin, a thermosetting synthetic resin (for example, a phenol resin or a melamine resin) is used. This synthetic resin is heat-resistant and will not be deformed or ignited to the extent that it is pressed against a cigarette. For example, it is also used in ashtrays of gaming machines. The top plate 1710 is disposed so that the upper surface portion 1721 is substantially horizontal, and the sliding operation portion 1703 can be rotated in a substantially horizontal direction on the sliding guide surface 1720. Further, on the sliding guide surface 1720, ridges 1720a (see FIG. 27) having a mountain-shaped cross section are formed at predetermined intervals in the radial direction on concentric circles centering on a fixed point P (see FIG. 23) on the player side. As a whole, it has a surface shape like a wave extending from the fixed point P in the centrifugal direction. Note that a through hole 1723 is formed in the fixed point P, and a rotation shaft connecting portion 1820 (see FIG. 25) of a sliding operation portion 1703 described later can be inserted therethrough. Further, in the vicinity of the through hole 1723, a wiring hole 1724 for drawing an electric wire (not shown) drawn from the sliding operation unit 1703 into the operation base 1702 is formed. Further, a groove portion 1725 is formed in the upper surface portion 1721 on the outer peripheral side of the sliding guide surface 1720 along an arc centered on the fixed point P, and a switch pressing member 1817 (see FIG. 25) of the sliding operation portion 1703 described later. Reference) is inserted. Note that the rotation range of the sliding operation portion 1703 is restricted by both ends of the groove portion 1725. The left end surface of the switch pressing member 1817 abuts the left side surface of the groove portion 1725 at the origin position, while the switch pressing portion is at the maximum strength position. The right end surface of the member 1817 abuts against the right side surface of the groove portion 1725.

  The bottom surface member 1711 is made of a synthetic resin and includes a substantially plate-shaped bottom plate portion 1727 and a side surface portion 1728 erected from the peripheral edge portion (excluding the rear edge portion). The outer edge shape of the portion 1728 matches the outer edge shape of the frame member 1712. That is, as shown in FIG. 22, the side surface portion 1728 and the frame member 1712 form a smoothly continuous surface on the outer peripheral surface and are assembled together. Further, as shown in FIG. 24, a plurality of screw insertion portions 1731 through which attachment screws (not shown) can be inserted are formed along the side surface portion 1728 in the bottom surface member 1711, and the bottom surface member 1711 is connected to the top plate 1710. And it can be attached to the frame member 1712. Further, at a position slightly closer to the player side than the central portion of the bottom plate portion 1727, an accommodation hole 1730 for projecting downward and accommodating a volume 1751 (described later) is provided therein.

  The frame member 1712 is attached so as to cover the periphery of the top plate 1710 from the player side, and the upper surface decoration portion 1733 that continues to the upper surface portion 1721 of the top plate 1710 and the peripheral surface decoration that continues to the side surface portion 1728 of the bottom surface member 1711. It comprises a part 1734 and a plurality of mounting hanging parts 1736 that are suspended from the upper surface decoration part 1733 and have screw holes (not shown) formed therein. Note that the lower end of each mounting hanging portion 1736 is in contact with the upper end of a screw insertion portion 1731 formed on the bottom surface member 1711, and the mounting hanging portion 1736 is passed through the screw insertion portion 1731 from below the bottom surface member 1711. The frame member 1712 is assembled in a fixed state on the bottom surface member 1711 by fastening a mounting screw (not shown) to the screw hole. In addition, an arc-shaped opening 1735 is formed at the front end portion of the upper surface decoration portion 1733 on the player side, and a contact portion 1791 of a vibrator holder 1790 (see FIG. 26) described later is passed through the opening 1735 to form a frame member. 1712 is projected upward.

  As shown in FIGS. 26 and 29, the origin position detection means 1713 includes an origin switch 1743 (limit) for detecting that the synthetic resin slide cover 1746 and the sliding operation unit 1703 (see FIG. 23) are at the origin position. Switch) and a switch crank 1745 for transmitting the operation of the switch pressing member 1817 provided in the sliding operation unit 1703 to the origin switch 1743. More specifically, the slide cover 1746 has a rail-shaped sliding guide portion 1740 that is formed in an arc shape in a plan view and guides the sliding direction of the switch pressing member 1817, and an origin switch 1743 that is formed on the left rear side thereof. The switch housing portion 1741 has a plurality of screw mounting portions 1742 formed around the switch housing portion 1741 at predetermined intervals, and is assembled in a fixed state with respect to the top plate 1710 (see FIG. 24). The switch crank 1745 has an L-shape and is rotatably supported by a rotating shaft 1744 whose axial direction is the vertical direction. The switch pressing member 1817 is in contact with one end of the switch crank 1745 so as to sandwich the rotating shaft 1744. The end on the side comes into contact with the operating portion of the origin switch 1743. Therefore, when the sliding operation portion 1703 is at the origin position, as shown in FIG. 29, the switch pressing member 1817 is positioned on the left end side of the sliding guide portion 1740 and urges the switch crank 1745 in the clockwise direction. As a result, the operating portion of the origin switch 1743 can be pressed. On the other hand, when the sliding operation unit 1703 is not at the origin position, the urging force of the switch crank 1745 disappears due to the switch pressing member 1817 being separated from the switch crank 1745 as shown in FIG. The part is not pressed. That is, only when the sliding operation portion 1703 is at the origin position, the operating portion of the origin switch 1743 can be pressed to close the contact (not shown).

  As shown in FIG. 26, the sliding position detecting means 1714 includes a volume 1751 mounted on the volume holder 1750, a volume gear 1752 connected to the shaft 1761 of the volume 1751 and transmitting a rotational force, and a sliding operation unit 1703. The main gear 1753 is configured to follow the sliding operation and transmit the rotational force to the volume gear 1752. More specifically, the volume holder 1750 has a substantially rectangular outer edge in plan view, a through hole 1755 through which the shaft 1761 of the volume 1751 is inserted is formed in the center portion, and mounting screws are provided at the four corner portions. A mounting portion 1756 for mounting on the bottom surface of the top plate 1710 is formed through (not shown). A housing portion 1757 having a concave upper surface is provided around the through hole 1755 so that a connecting portion 1766 of a volume gear 1752 described later is housed. Further, a damper accommodating portion 1758 for accommodating a damper 1781 (described later) of the origin returning means 1715 is formed on the upper surface of the slide cover 1746 rather than the accommodating portion 1757.

  The volume 1751 includes a case 1760 having a cylindrical peripheral surface, a first variable resistor 1762 (see FIG. 100) and a second variable resistor 1762 (see FIG. 101) disposed in the case 1760, and a rotation center. And a shaft 1761 that simultaneously changes the resistance values of the first variable resistor 1762 and the second variable resistor 1762 by rotation. Although details will be described later, the first variable resistor 1762 is connected to the main control board 1350, and by causing the main control board 1350 to input a resistance value corresponding to the operation position of the sliding operation unit 1703, It is possible to change the launch intensity of the game ball in the hit ball launching device 650 according to the operation position of the sliding operation unit 1703. On the other hand, the second variable resistor 1863 is connected to the peripheral control board 2830, and a resistance value corresponding to the operation position of the slide operation part 1703 is input to the peripheral control board 2830, so that the sliding operation part It is possible to change the state of light emitted from the light source 1703 (that is, the light emission state of the light emitting unit 1809 (described later)) according to the operation position of the sliding operation unit 1703. Here, the first variable resistor 1762 corresponds to the position signal output means of the present invention.

  As shown in FIG. 26, the volume gear 1752 includes a fan-shaped rotating plate 1765 and a substantially cylindrical connecting portion 1766 that protrudes downward from the rotating plate 1765 and is connected to the shaft 1761 of the volume 1751. Further, on the outer peripheral side of the rotating plate 1765, an arcuate guide piece 1767 that is one step lower than the rotating plate 1765 and protrudes in the centrifugal direction, and an outer side that protrudes outward so as to be positioned on the upper surface of the guide piece 1767. Teeth 1768 are formed. Further, an inner tooth portion 1769 that protrudes toward the center direction (the connecting portion 1766 side) is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the guide piece 1767.

  On the other hand, the main gear 1753 includes a disk-shaped central portion 1770 having an engagement hole 1771 with which a rotation shaft connecting portion 1820 (see FIG. 25) described later of the sliding operation portion 1703 engages, and a central portion 1770. And a swinging portion 1772 formed in a fan shape so as to be wider in the radial direction. Note that a wiring opening 1775 that is long in the radial direction is provided in a portion from the central portion 1770 of the swinging portion 1772. Further, an arcuate guide piece 1773 that is one step lower than the swinging portion 1772 and protrudes in the centrifugal direction is formed on the outer peripheral side of the swinging portion 1772, and is sandwiched between the upper roller 1776 and the lower roller 1777. It is slidably supported in the state. Accordingly, the swinging portion 1772 is supported in a substantially horizontal state and can be rotated around the central portion 1770. Further, a tooth portion 1774 (see FIG. 29) protruding toward the central direction (center portion 1770 side) is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the guide piece 1773, and meshed with the outer tooth portion 1768 of the volume gear 1752. Yes. That is, when the main gear 1753 rotates, the volume gear 1752 is driven by the meshing of the tooth portion 1774 and the outer tooth portion 1768. Here, the radius of the volume gear 1752 is smaller than the radius of the main gear 1753 (about ½), and the rotation angle of the volume gear 1752 is larger than the rotation angle of the main gear 1753. In other words, by interposing the volume gear 1752 having a smaller diameter than the main gear 1753 between the main gear 1753 and the volume 1751, the rotational operation of the main gear 1753 can be amplified and transmitted to the shaft 1761 of the volume 1751. It is possible. Therefore, even if the displacement amount of the sliding operation unit 1703 is very small, the resistance value in the first variable resistor 1762 can be reliably changed, and thus the firing intensity can be finely adjusted.

  On the other hand, the origin returning means 1715 includes a spring 1780 and a damper 1781. The spring 1780 is a torsion spring, a fixing extension portion 1783 formed on one end side is fixed to the volume holder 1750, and a locking portion 1784 formed on the other end side is locked to the volume gear 1752, and the volume holder The volume gear 1752 is biased toward the origin position (counterclockwise as viewed from above) with respect to 1750. The damper 1781 includes a small gear 1785 meshed with the inner tooth portion 1769 of the volume gear 1752 and a damper main body 1786 that rotatably supports the small gear 1785 in a state in which a frictional resistance is generated. Therefore, the sliding operation unit 1703 can be slowly returned from the predetermined operation position toward the origin position and can be held at the origin position.

  The vibration generating means 1716 is mounted on a vibrator holder 1790 having an arc shape in plan view, a holder back plate 1793 for supporting the vibrator holder 1790 via a pair of springs 1792, and a mounting base 1795 provided inside the vibrator holder 1790. And a vibration generator 1794. Note that the vibration generator 1794 is a well-known one used in mobile phones, game machines, and the like, so that a weight is attached to the shaft of a small motor with a center of gravity biased, and the weight is generated by rotating the weight. It has become. Further, a contact portion 1791 exposed through the opening 1735 of the frame member 1712 (see FIG. 24) is formed on the upper surface of the vibrator holder 1790. By operating the vibration generator 1794, the contact portion 1791 is formed. Is designed to vibrate. In particular, the abutting portion 1791 is disposed at a position where the wrist of the player holding the sliding operation portion 1703 can come into contact, and it is possible to generate a tactile sensation of vibration near the wrist of the player. .

  Next, the sliding operation unit 1703 will be described. As shown in FIG. 24, the sliding operation unit 1703 is slidably supported on a sliding guide surface 1720 of the top plate 1710, and a player's hand is placed thereon. A hand cover 1801 and a touch plate 1802 attached to the upper surface of the hand cover 1801 are provided. The hand cover 1801 has an effect operation button 1803 that can be operated with respect to a specific effect, and a stop button 1804 that can interrupt a game ball firing operation by the hitting ball launching device 650 by pressing. And are assembled. In addition, an effect switch 1805 (see FIG. 25) for detecting the pressing operation of the effect operation button 1803 and a stop switch 1806 for detecting the pressing operation of the stop button 1804 are held between the sliding body 1800 and the hand-mounted cover 1801. Switch holder 1807, a sliding resistance adjusting member 1808 for changing the sliding resistance (friction) of the sliding body 1800 with respect to the sliding guide surface 1720, and light is emitted in a predetermined light emitting manner to the outside of the hand cover 1801. And a light emitting unit 1809 that performs the above operation. Here, the effect operation button 1803 corresponds to the operation switch of the present invention.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 25, the sliding main body 1800 includes a sliding contact surface 1815 that is in sliding contact with the sliding guide surface 1720 (see FIG. 24) of the operation base 1702, and a peripheral edge of the sliding contact surface 1815. A peripheral wall portion 1816 that is erected, a switch pressing member 1817 that is suspended from the end opposite to the player and presses the above-described origin switch 1743 (see FIG. 26), and a player formed at the end on the player side It has an extending portion 1819 extending in a substantially horizontal direction toward the side, and a rotary shaft connecting portion 1820 that extends vertically downward from the tip portion thereof, and has a ship-like shape as a whole. Presents. Further, an attachment portion 1818 for fixing the hand-mounted cover 1801 to the sliding body 1800 with an attachment screw (not shown) is formed on the upper surface of the sliding contact surface 1815.

  Here, the slidable contact surface 1815 is provided with ridges having a cross-sectional chevron shape formed concentrically around the rotation shaft coupling portion 1820 at predetermined intervals in the radial direction. It has a bottom shape like a wave spreading from the connecting portion 1820 in the centrifugal direction. In particular, as shown in FIG. 27, the rotary shaft connecting portion 1820 is rotatably supported in a state where it is inserted into the through hole 1723, and the sliding contact surface 1815 and the sliding guide surface 1720 are formed between peaks and valleys. They are stacked so that they match each other. Therefore, regardless of the sliding position of the sliding operation unit 1703, the entire sliding contact surface 1815 can be brought into contact with the sliding guide surface 1720 and can be smoothly slid. In addition, since the boundary portion between the sliding contact surface 1815 and the sliding guide surface 1720 is wavy, for example, “a coin or the like is sandwiched between the sliding contact surface 1815 and the sliding guide surface 1720 and the sliding operation unit 1703 is arbitrarily set. It is possible to prevent an illegal act of “fixing at the position of”.

  As shown in FIG. 27, the rotary shaft connecting portion 1820 is fitted into an engagement hole 1771 formed in the central portion 1770 (see FIG. 26) of the main gear 1753 through the through hole 1723 of the top plate 1710. And is connected to the main gear 1753 via a mounting screw 1820a. Further, the cross-sectional shapes of the rotating shaft connecting portion 1820 and the engaging hole 1771 are both polygonal or non-circular, and the sliding body 1800 is configured not to rotate with respect to the main gear 1753.

  In addition, a wiring opening 1821 for drawing out the wiring in the sliding operation unit 1703 from the bottom surface is formed in the vicinity of the rotary shaft connecting portion 1820 in the sliding main body 1800. The wiring opening 1821 is formed so as to communicate with the wiring hole 1724 of the top plate 1710 described above. In particular, the size of the wiring hole 1724 is larger than that of the wiring opening 1821 so that the wiring opening 1821 and the wiring hole 1724 can always communicate with each other regardless of the operation position of the sliding operation portion 1703. It has become. Since the position of the wiring opening 1821 is in the vicinity of the rotation center, the length of the wiring hole 1724 can be kept relatively small. Even if the sliding operation portion 1703 slides, the wiring hole 1724 Can be prevented from being exposed.

  The hand-mounted cover 1801 is slightly smaller than the hand so that the player can lightly hold it with the palm on, and has an appearance similar to a “mouse” used as one of computer pointing devices. Yes. A mounting recess 1825 for mounting the touch plate 1802 is formed on the top side of the hand-mounted cover 1801. Further, in the mounting recess 1825, the production operation button 1803 is supported so as to be displaceable in the vertical direction. An opening 1826 that penetrates in the vertical direction and a button support 1827 that supports the fulcrum of the effect operation button 1803 are formed. Further, a wiring guide portion 1830 that is inserted into the wiring opening 1821 of the sliding body 1800 is formed to project from the end portion on the player side of the hand-mounted cover 1801. Furthermore, an opening 1829 for allowing the light projected from the light emitting unit 1809 to pass through is formed on the top surface of the hand cover 1801 on the player side.

  The touch plate 1802 is made of a metal or surface plated member, and is electrically connected to the touch detection circuit 1802a (see FIG. 100) via wiring. Based on the touch signal output from the touch plate 1802, the touch detection circuit recognizes that the player's hand has touched the touch plate 1802, and allows the ball hitting device 650 to launch the game ball. Yes. In addition, three support portions 1835 each having a screw hole formed therein are suspended from the lower surface of the touch plate 1802, and contact the mounting portion 1818 of the sliding body 1800 through the through hole 1828 of the hand cover 1801. It comes to touch. That is, by attaching a mounting screw (not shown) to the screw hole of the support portion 1835 from below the sliding body 1800 through the mounting portion 1818, the touch plate 1802 is held in the state where the hand-mounted cover 1801 is sandwiched. 1800 is assembled. Further, a button hole 1836 for projecting the effect operation button 1803 is formed on the top surface of the touch plate 1802 opposite to the player.

  Further, the touch plate 1802 is provided with an opening 1837 at a position facing the opening 1829 of the hand-mounted cover 1801, and a display window is formed by the translucent resin member 1838. That is, the light projected from the light emitting unit 1809 is radiated to the outside of the touch plate 1802 through the translucent resin member 1838. In particular, in this example, a pattern appears on the surface of the translucent resin member 1838 according to the color of light emitted from the light emitting unit 1809. Specifically, red light is emitted from the light emitting unit 1809. The character M (see FIG. 130 (a)) appears as “strong”, and “smile picture E” (see FIG. 130 (b)) appears when the light emitting unit 1809 emits green light. Yes. As a specific configuration, the first color filter 1839a having white light transmissivity is provided in the overlapped portion while the letter M “strong” and the “smile pattern E” are arranged to overlap. A second color filter 1839b having red light transmittance is provided in a portion where “strong letter M” does not overlap, and a third color having green light transmittance in a portion where “smile pattern E” does not overlap. A filter 1839c is provided, and a black fourth color filter 1839d that does not transmit light is provided in other portions. According to this, when red light is emitted from the light emitting unit 1809, the first color filter 1839a and the second color filter 1839b transmit light, and the third color filter 1839c and the fourth color filter 1839d do not transmit light. , The letter M “strong” appears. On the other hand, when green light is emitted from the light emitting unit 1809, the first color filter 1839a and the third color filter 1839c transmit light, and the second color filter 1839b and the fourth color filter 1839d do not transmit light. The pattern “E” will appear.

  As shown in FIG. 25, the production operation button 1803 is formed so as to protrude through a plate-like support portion 1841 that is elastically deformable in the longitudinal direction and a button hole 1836 of the touch plate 1802 that is formed on the top surface of the support portion 1841. The presser portion 1842 is supported by the button support portion 1827 of the hand cover 1801 so that the presser portion 1842 is pressed downward. It is possible to make it. That is, when the pressing portion 1842 is pressed, it can be displaced downward against the elastic force of the support portion 1841. On the other hand, when the pressing operation is released, the original position is restored by the elastic force of the support portion 1841. It has become. In this way, the presser portion 1842 of the effect operation button 1803 is arranged on the upper surface of the hand-mounted cover 1801 so that it is pressed in the vertical direction with respect to the sliding direction (that is, substantially horizontal direction) of the sliding operation portion 1703. Therefore, even if the pressing portion 1842 is pressed, no force is applied to the sliding side of the sliding operation portion 1703. As a result, the sliding operation portion 1703 held at a predetermined position is pressed. It can suppress that it moves unexpectedly by operation of 1842. In other words, the effect operation button 1803 can be operated while keeping the firing strength of the hit ball launching device 650 constant. In addition, since the press part 1842 of the effect operation button 1803 is arranged on the tip side of the slide operation part 1703, it is possible to press the press part 1842 with the fingertip while holding the slide operation part 1703 with the palm. According to this, one-handed operation is facilitated, and it becomes possible to increase the game motivation for changing the production mode.

  The stop button 1804 is disposed opposite to the left and right sides of the hand cover 1801, and each stop button 1804 is supported so as to be displaceable inward of the hand cover 1801, and a spring ( (Not shown). That is, it is configured to perform a pressing operation against the elastic force of the spring. Note that only one stop button 1804 may be provided, but by arranging a pair of stop buttons 1804 to face each other as in this example, it is possible to perform a pressing operation simultaneously and in the opposite direction. According to this, although the stop button 1804 is pressed from the lateral direction, the force for pressing the two stop buttons 1804 is balanced, and the sliding operation unit 1703 can be prevented from being shaken.

  The switch holder 1807 holds an effect switch 1805 for detecting the pressing operation of the effect operation button 1803 and two stop switches 1806 for detecting the pressing operation of the stop button 1804 inside the hand-mounted cover 1801. A base portion 1845 for fixing the switch 1805 and the stop switch 1806, a pair of side wall portions 1846 erected from the left and right sides of the base portion 1845, and an extending portion 1847 extending from the player side end portion of the base portion 1845. It is comprised. Also. A through hole 1848 is formed in the extending portion 1847, and a mounting screw (not shown) is formed on a female screw portion (not shown) formed on the inner surface of the hand cover 1801 from below the extending portion 1847 through the through hole 1848. ) Are screwed together so that the switch holder 1807 is assembled to the hand-mounted cover 1801. Since the switch holder 1807 is fixed only to the extension 1847 and the base 1845 is in a floating state, the base 1845 can be slightly displaced in the vertical direction with the extension 1847 as a fulcrum.

  The sliding resistance adjusting member 1808 is disposed between the switch holder 1807 and the sliding contact surface 1815 of the sliding body 1800, and a pair of positioning members projecting downward from the center in the width direction of the plate-like portion 1850 and the bottom surface thereof. A claw portion 1851 (see FIG. 27) and a pair of contact portions 1852 that protrude downward from the left and right sides of the positioning claw portion 1851 are configured. Then, the upper surface of the plate-like portion 1850 comes into contact with the bottom surface of the switch holder 1807, the positioning claw portion 1851 is inserted into the positioning hole 1822 formed in the sliding contact surface 1815, and the contacting portion 1852 contacts the sliding contact surface 1815. It is attached in a state of being inserted into the drilled through hole 1823. When the hand is not placed on the sliding operation unit 1703, that is, when the weight of the hand is not applied to the hand cover 1801 of the sliding operation unit 1703, as shown in FIG. The lower end of 1852 protrudes below the lower surface of the sliding body 1800, and a gap is formed between the sliding guide surface 1720 and the sliding body 1800. Since the plate-like portion 1850 of the sliding resistance adjusting member 1808 is in contact with the bottom surface of the switch holder 1807, the contact portion 1852 is supported with the lower end protruding. In this state, the sliding body 1800 is in a floating state, and no frictional resistance is generated between the sliding body 1800 and the sliding guide surface 1720. For this reason, for example, if the hand is removed from the sliding operation unit 1703 at a predetermined position, it is possible to smoothly return to the origin position with a relatively small force. In other words, the elastic force of the spring 1780 of the origin returning means 1715 can be made relatively weak, and thus the operating force against the elastic force of the spring 1780 required for the sliding operation is reduced. Can be further reduced. On the other hand, when a hand is placed on the sliding operation portion 1703, that is, when a hand weight is applied to the hand cover 1801, pressure is applied to the lower end of the contact portion 1852 as shown in FIG. The dynamic resistance adjusting member 1808 is displaced upward while elastically deforming the switch holder 1807. According to this, when the entire surface of the sliding body 1800 comes into contact with the sliding guide surface 1720 and the sliding operation portion 1703 is to be operated to slide, a frictional force is generated between the sliding body 1800 and the sliding guide surface 1720. Will occur. Therefore, the sliding operation unit 1703 can be stably held at an arbitrary position, and the sliding operation unit 1703 can be prevented from moving unexpectedly (sliding).

  As shown in FIG. 25, the light emitting unit 1809 includes a plurality of light emitting elements 1856 mounted on a substrate 1855. These light emitting elements 1856 include at least a light emitting element that emits red light and a light emitting element that emits green light, and can be individually controlled by light emission control means 1862 (see FIG. 129) described later. It is possible. That is, at least red light and green light can be selected and irradiated on the translucent resin member 1838.

  By the way, in the case where the sliding operation unit 1703 is slid on the sliding guide surface 1720, the player operates in a substantially horizontal direction with the hand placed on the hand cover 1801. According to this, the light emitted from the sliding operation unit 1703 may be blocked by the player's hand. In other words, even if the light emitting unit 1809 is turned on according to the gaming state, it may not be noticed. In addition, even when the light emitted from the sliding operation unit 1703 is not blocked by the hand, the pattern or characters displayed on the translucent resin member 1838 when the user is watching the rolling state of the game ball There is a risk that you will not notice.

  On the other hand, in this example, a light source that generates relatively high Joule heat is used as the light emitting element 1856. For this reason, when light is emitted from the light emitting portion 1809, the translucent resin member 1838 is warmed by the generated Joule heat, and it becomes possible to cause a warm sensation in the player's hand. Therefore, even if the user does not directly notice that the picture or character is displayed, the sliding operation unit 1703 can be paid attention to by a unique sensation that is not usually felt, such as a sense of temperature. In particular, when the hand-mounted cover 1801 is covered with a hand, the design or characters can be visually recognized by looking into the gap between the hand-mounted cover 1801 and the hand or removing the hand from the hand-mounted cover 1801. Therefore, it is possible to arouse a feeling of excitement as if opening a ball box and to further enhance the fun of the game.

[Body frame]
Next, the game board 4 can be detachably mounted from the front side, and a hitting ball launching device 650, a prize ball tank 720 for paying out a prize ball, a tank rail member 740, a ball path unit 770, a prize ball unit 800 ( Equivalent to the game ball payout device of the present invention), the full unit 900, the locking device 1000 for locking the main body frame 3 to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 to the main body frame 3, the door frame 5 excluding the game board 4, Various components such as a substrate unit 1100 in which various control boards and power supply boards for controlling electrical components provided in the main body frame 3 are collectively provided, and a cover body 1250 that covers the rear opening 580 are included in the main body. The main body frame 3 configured by being attached to the frame main body 500 will be described with reference to the drawings. Here, the main body frame 3 corresponds to the main body casing of the present invention.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 31 to 39, the main body frame main body 500 on which the above-described various components are mounted and the main body frame 3 on which the various components are mounted will be described. FIG. 31 is a front view of the main body frame main body 500 before attaching the parts, FIG. 32 is a rear view of the main body frame main body 500 before attaching the parts, and FIG. 33 is a main body frame main body before attaching the parts. FIG. 34 is a perspective view seen from the back of the main body frame main body 500 before attaching the parts, and FIG. 35 is a perspective view seen from the front of the main body frame 3 to which the parts are attached. 36 is a perspective view of the state in which the main body frame 3 to which the parts are attached is pivotally supported on the outer frame 2 as viewed from the front, and FIG. 37 is a rear view of the main body frame 3 to which the parts are attached. FIG. 39 is a perspective view seen from the back of the main body frame 3 to which components are attached, and FIG. .

  In FIG. 31, an upper shaft bracket 503 and a lower shaft bracket 509 (both see FIG. 35) for attaching and closing the body frame 3 to the outer frame 2 are attached to the upper and lower sides of the body frame main body 500. In the state where the shaft bracket mounting step portions 501 and 502 are formed and the upper shaft bracket 503 and the lower shaft bracket 509 are mounted on the shaft bracket mounting step portions 501 and 502, the upper side and the side side of the main body frame main body 500 are formed. Is substantially flush with the upper and side sides of the upper shaft support 503, and the lower and side sides of the main body frame main body 500 are substantially flush with the lower and side sides of the lower shaft support 509 (FIG. 37). reference). Here, the upper shaft bracket 503 and the lower shaft bracket 509 will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 and 37. FIG. The upper shaft support fitting 503 has a mounting portion on the back surface of the main body frame main body 500, and its upper end protrudes forward. A shaft support pin 504 is erected and fixed on the upper surface protruding forward, and the shaft support pin 504 A door shaft support hole 505 is formed on the side.

  On the other hand, the lower shaft support 509 has a mounting portion on the back surface of the main body frame main body 500, and two support plates 506 and 507 are integrally projected on the lower end side and slightly on the upper side. The lower support plate 506 constitutes a frame support plate 506 for supporting the main body frame 3 on the lower support fitting 66 of the outer frame 2. A door support plate 507 for supporting the lower shaft support portion 220 on the main body frame 3 is configured. For this reason, a shaft support hole (not shown) for inserting the support protrusion 68 of the lower support fitting 66 of the outer frame 2 is formed in the frame support plate 506, and the door support plate 507 is provided with the lower shaft support portion 220 of the door frame 5. A shaft support hole 508 for inserting the projecting shaft pin 221 is formed.

  By the way, the main body frame main body 500 is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and about 3/4 of the upper part thereof is a game board installation recess 510 (see FIG. 35) for installing the game board 4. A slightly recessed area below the game board installation recess 510 is a plate portion 511. In addition, the front upper side portion and the front open side portion on the front side surrounding the game board installation recess 510 are formed with a predetermined width so as to face the rear surface of the door frame 5, An upper crime prevention double groove 581 is formed by a protrusion protruding in parallel with the lateral direction, and a side crime prevention groove 582 is formed on the outer side and on the inner side of the front opening side edge on the right side when viewed from the front. A security recess 583 is formed which is formed by an inner wall having an inclined surface that is connected to the first side wall 540 at the rear end. Unlike the side part, it is not formed so as to have a predetermined width that faces the back surface of the door frame 5, but the front shaft support side part of the main body frame main body 500 is more forward than the front upper side part or the front open side part. The shaft support side portion 587 has a large protrusion amount.

  More specifically, the upper crime prevention double groove 581 formed on the upper side of the front surface is bent toward the rear with both long side ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 211 attached and fixed to the rear side of the upper side of the door frame 5. The bent projecting pieces 215 and 216 are inserted respectively. Further, the side security grooves 582 and the security recesses 583 formed on the front open side edges are folded back at the long side ends of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 213 attached and fixed to the open back of the door frame 5. The open-side outer bent protrusion 223 and the open-side inner bent protrusion 225 to be bent are respectively inserted. Further, on the shaft support side portion 587 of the front shaft support side portion, the tip end of the shaft support side L-shaped bent protruding piece 217 of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 212 attached and fixed to the shaft support side rear surface of the door frame 5 is provided. The parts come into contact.

  Further, the above-described structure can prevent an illegal act of inserting a fraudulent tool such as a piano wire through the gap between the contact surfaces of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, and in particular, the open side where the fraudulent act is most likely to be performed. It has a structure that can prevent fraud at the side and then at the upper side where fraud is likely to be performed. Of course, the prevention of fraud by the contact between the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 212 on the support side and the support-side L-shaped bent protrusion 217 also functions sufficiently, but in many cases the support side is sturdy. Since the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are connected to each other by the support brackets 45 and 66 and the shaft support brackets 503 and 509, the space between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is larger than that of the upper side and the open side. It is difficult to make a gap. For this reason, in this embodiment, not a double crime prevention structure but a single crime prevention structure. These points will be described in detail later.

  In addition to the configuration described above, the front upper side, front open side, and front pivot side on the front side surrounding the game board installation recess 510 are arranged on the upper, middle, and lower sides of the front open side. A door hook hole 549 is formed for passing through a door hook portion 1041 (see FIG. 75) provided on a lock device 1000, which will be described later, attached to the back side of the main body frame 3 and projecting forward. A board positioning projection 576 for engaging with a positioning recess 611 formed in the game board 4 is provided on the inner side surface of the front shaft support side. Further, the pivot side L-shaped bent projecting piece 217 of the pivot side reinforcing sheet metal 212 with the door frame 5 closed on the inner front surface of the board positioning projection 576 on the side side of the front pivot side is slightly lower. Two upper and lower restricting projections 577 into which the distal ends are inserted project. The operation of the restricting protrusion 577 is as described above. In addition, as shown in FIG. 31, a board stopper insertion hole in which an end of a game board stopper 614 provided on the game board 4 is engaged above and below the boundary between the open-side plane portion and the game board installation recess 510. 578 is formed.

  Next, the configuration of the plate portion 511 will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 36. The upper surface of the plate part 511 is a game board placement part 512 for placing the game board 4, and the game board 4 is placed on the placement part 512 in the approximate center of the game board placement part 512. A passage support protrusion 513 is provided to support the lower surface of the out port 606 (see FIG. 40) formed in the game board 4 when placed. Further, as shown in FIG. 31, a rail mounting boss 514 protrudes from the central portion of the front surface of the plate portion 511 toward the end on the open side at a predetermined interval, and the launch rail 515 ( 35) is fixed with screws. Further, a rail connection member 516 protrudes from the front surface of the plate portion 511 corresponding to the tip position of the launch rail 515, and when the game board 4 is installed in the game board installation recess 510, the inner rail of the game board 4 is provided. The connecting passage portion 609 (see FIG. 40), which is the downstream end of 603, is adjacent.

  Further, at the side position of the rail connection member 516 (position opposite to the firing rail 515), the upper end of an elliptical game board fixture 519 (see FIG. 35) for fixing the lower part of the game board 4 is provided. A fixing tool mounting boss 517 for mounting is projected, and a stopper 518 is projected diagonally below. That is, the game board fixing tool 519 is provided to be rotatable about the fixing tool mounting boss 517, and is rotated in the clockwise direction in a state where the game board 4 is placed on the game board mounting portion 512 to play the game. The board fixture 519 is pressed against the front surface of the game board 4 to fix the game board 4. Further, when removing the game board, it can be easily performed by turning the game board fixture 519 counterclockwise and removing it. In this case, the game board fixture 519 is prevented from being rotated counterclockwise by the stopper 518.

  In addition, the lower part of the open side of the plate part 511 is formed with a rectangular parallelepiped launching device mounting portion 520 that projects in a bulging shape toward the front side (which is concave when viewed from the back side). A hitting ball launcher 650 is fixed to the mounting portion 520 from the back surface of the main body frame main body 500. This will be described in detail later. Further, the upper wall portion of the launcher mounting portion 520 is formed with a notch hole opening 521 through which the hitting ball basket 654 of the hit ball launcher 650 protrudes upward, and a plate portion 511 obliquely above the saddle penetration opening 521. Is provided with a cylinder lock through hole 526 through which the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 passes.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 32, on the back surface of the plate portion 511, a ball discharge passage 524 that extends from the upper portion on the shaft support side toward the central portion of the plate portion 511 and then goes downward is formed. . The ball discharge passage 524 is for discharging a ball discharged from a ball connection passage 880 (see FIG. 35), which will be described later, from below the pachinko machine 1 to the inside of the island. In addition, a cylindrical guide protrusion 525 protrudes rearward from the above-described launching device mounting portion 520, and a guide hole 1212 (see FIG. 81) of the substrate unit 1100 described later is inserted into the guide protrusion 525. This facilitates the mounting of the substrate unit 1100. Further, mounting holes 527 for mounting the board unit 1100 with screws are formed on the left and right and upper and lower sides of the plate part 511, and the mounting pieces 1122 of the board unit 1100 are associated with the mounting holes 527 and fastened with screws. In addition, a launching device mounting boss 529 for mounting the hitting ball launching device 650 is projected rearwardly inside the concave shape of the launching device mounting portion 520, and the lowermost end portion on the open side is shown in FIG. As shown in the figure, when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, a guide protrusion with a tapered tip and a vertically long shape is provided to guide the closing operation of the main body frame 3 while contacting the upper surface of the decorative cover plate 15. 528 protrudes rearward.

  In addition to the configuration described above, the plate portion 511 is provided with a ball removal connection opening 530 that is an opening at the upstream end of the ball removal discharge passage 524 on the upper surface of the end portion on the shaft support side, as shown in FIG. Yes. A downstream end of the ball removal connection passage 880 is connected to the ball removal connection opening 530. Further, the portion adjacent to the ball-opening connection opening 530 is horizontal so that a full unit mounting portion 531 for mounting a full unit 900 (see FIG. 35), which will be described in detail later, is orthogonal to the plate portion 511. A unit engagement groove 532 that engages with the engagement piece 924 (see FIG. 65) of the full unit 900 is formed in the front portion of the full unit mounting portion 531. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 35, an outlet for blocking a prize ball discharged from the outlet 921 of the full tank unit 900 when the door frame 5 is opened is provided on the front surface of the plate part 511 in front of the full unit mounting part 531. An opening / closing device 579 is provided.

  Although the outlet opening / closing device 579 is not described in detail, when the door frame 5 is closed, the opening / closing plate is lowered by a lever that contacts the back surface of the door frame 5, but the door plate 5 is opened. Then, the contact with the lever disappears, so that the opening / closing plate rises and closes the outlet 921. For this reason, even when the door frame 5 is opened, the prize balls stored in the full tank unit 900 do not fall down from the outlet 921. Further, as shown in FIG. 35, a fastening hole penetrating vertically in a position corresponding to the upper part of the launching portion of the firing rail 515 in the game board mounting portion 512 formed along the upper end side of the plate portion 511. 533 is formed, and a fastening link 534 for holding the fastening band 619 is passed to the front portion of the fastening hole 533. The fastening linkage 534 is a mechanism for preventing the game board 4 from being detached from the main body frame 3.

  Next, the structure of the game board installation recessed part 510 is demonstrated. The game board installation recess 510 is provided around a first side wall 540 that is provided rearward from the inner side surface on the shaft support side and the upper side portion and the open side surface portion described above, and is provided rearward from the first side wall 540. A second side wall 541, a third side wall 542 circumferentially provided rearward from the second side wall 541, and a fourth side wall 543 circumferentially provided rearward from the third side wall 542, The body frame 3 is formed in a concave shape in which the left and right sides and the rear part of the upper side are surrounded.

  The first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543 are formed such that the upper side and the right side (sides on the shaft support side) are straightly extended rearward with a step when viewed from the back, whereas the left side ( An open side) is formed in a stepped shape (see FIG. 39) that inwardly slopes from the first side wall 540 toward the fourth side wall 543. This is because the rear end of the fourth side wall 543 is opened when the main body frame 3 is opened when the first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543 on the left side (side on the open side) are straightly formed rearward. May be in contact with the inner surface of the side frame plate 13 of the outer frame 2 so that it cannot be opened smoothly. Therefore, the first side wall surface 540 to the fourth side wall 543 on the open side can be smoothly opened by inclining inside. It is something that can be done.

  At the same time, the lock device 1000 is attached along the first side wall 540 on the open side, and the attachment is made using a lock attachment hole 547 (see FIG. 71) provided in the rear end side of the first side wall 540. In order to form the lock mounting hole 547, the fourth side wall 543 is formed in an inclined step shape from the first side wall 540 on the open side. Furthermore, as for the step size of the first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543, the step between the first side wall 540 and the second side wall 541 needs to be in contact with the periphery of the back surface of the game board 4 described later. For this reason, it is formed with a somewhat large step, but the other steps are extremely small steps. Of course, the second side wall 541 to the fourth side wall 543 may be formed continuously without forming a step.

  As shown in FIG. 33, the side walls 540 to 543 are formed to have depth width dimensions d1, d2, d3, and d4, respectively. In this embodiment, d1 + d2 + d3 + d4 = about 135 mm. . In particular, the width dimension d1 of the first side wall 540 corresponds to the thickness of the game board 4, and the game board is formed in the space formed by the remaining second side wall 541, third side wall 542, and fourth side wall 543. The rear projecting portions of various gaming devices provided in 4 are accommodated.

  In other words, the first side wall 540 constitutes a front side wall having a depth dimension substantially the same as the thickness of the game board 4, and the second side wall 541 to the fourth side wall 543 are in contact with the back of the peripheral part of the game board 4. A rear side wall that has a stepped portion that contacts the rear side wall of the gaming device 4 that extends from the first side wall 540 toward the rear substantially in parallel with the first side wall 540 and is provided on the game board 4. It constitutes. In particular, in the case of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5, the rearward protruding amounts of all the parts of the second side wall 541 to the fourth side wall 543 are fixed to the upper part on the back side of the main body frame 3. It is formed so as to be at substantially the same position as the rear wall 722 of the reservoir 728 for storing the balls of the prize ball tank 720.

  Thereby, since the size of the space formed by the second side wall 541, the third side wall 542, and the fourth side wall 543 is secured up to a position corresponding to the peripheral portion of the game board 4, for example, a game Even in the case where a gaming device is installed in which the liquid crystal display screen occupies almost the entire area of the board 4, the rearward protruding portion of such a gaming device can be easily stored.

  As shown in FIGS. 32 and 34, from the rear end side of the fourth side wall 543 to the left side (open side), the upper side and the right side (shaft support side) when viewed from the back side, the open side rear wall 544, An upper rear wall 545 and a pivot support side rear wall 546 as a rear wall are provided so as to project inward so as to be parallel to the front surface of the pachinko machine. The shaft support side rear wall 546 has a flat front surface (see FIG. 31), and a ball path unit 770 (to be described later) and a prize ball unit 800 constituting a ball payout mechanism are detachably attached to the rear surface. It is like that. Accordingly, it is sufficient for the projecting width dimension to the inside of the pivot support side rear wall 546 to have a width for attaching the ball path unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800.

  The upper rear wall 545 has a flat front surface (see FIG. 31), and a tank rail member 740, which will be described later, is attached to the rear surface of the upper rear wall 545, so that the lower end side is formed in an inclined shape. Therefore, it is sufficient for the width of the protrusion to the inside of the upper rear wall 545 to be the height width dimension of the tank rail member 740 attached in an inclined manner. Furthermore, the front surface of the open-side rear wall 544 has a flat plate shape (see FIG. 31), and a cover body support cylinder portion 575 that pivotally supports a cover body 1250 described later is formed on the rear surface. Accordingly, it is sufficient that the width of the projecting width toward the inside of the open-side rear wall 544 is a width that forms the cover body support cylinder 575.

  As described above, the front surfaces of the open-side rear wall 544, the upper rear wall 545, and the pivot-side rear wall 546 that project inward from the rear end side of the fourth side wall 543 are formed in a flat plate shape. Since the flat plate portion corresponds to the peripheral portion of the game board 4, as described above, the second side wall 541, the third side wall 542, and the fourth side wall to the position corresponding to the peripheral portion of the game board 4. Since the size of the space formed by 543 is ensured, for example, even in the case where a gaming device in which the liquid crystal display screen occupies almost the entire area of the gaming board 4 is attached, The rear projecting portion can be easily stored. Note that the insides of the open-side rear wall 544, the upper rear wall 545, and the pivot support-side rear wall 546 form a rear opening 580 so that the rear opening 580 can be opened and closed by a cover body 1250 described later. It has become.

  Next, a more detailed configuration of the game board mounting recess 510 will be described. As described above, the door hook hole 549 through which the door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 passes is formed on the open side plane portion. The middle and lower three places are opened, and the upper and lower door hook holes 549 are further above, below, and below the lock locking holes 548 with which the locking protrusions 1004 described later of the locking device 1000 are engaged (see FIG. 32). Is formed. Further, the lock device 1000 is attached along the first side wall 540 on the open side, and a lock attachment hole 547 (see FIG. 32) for performing the attachment with a screw is an upper part of the rear end portion of the first side wall 540. It is formed in the middle. Note that the locking device 1000 is attached not only at the upper and middle positions, but also at a screw mounting portion 1003 formed on a lock mounting piece 1008 described later and a lock mounting hole formed near the cylinder lock through hole 526. The lower part of the lock device 1000 can also be attached by fixing 547 to 547 with screws.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 34, when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 on the left and right in front of the upper side of the first side wall 540, the inner peripheral surface of the upper frame plate 10 of the outer frame 2 A guide arc protrusion 552 that abuts is provided, and a relief recess 551 that communicates with a notch 729 of a prize ball tank 720, which will be described later, is formed at the center of the rear end side of the first side wall 540. A tank mounting groove 550 is formed on a vertical surface connected to the side wall 541. Then, when the attachment flange 733 of the prize ball tank 720 is attached to the tank attachment groove 550, the notch 729 of the prize ball tank 720 communicates with the escape recess 551 as shown in FIG. When the ball pressure of the sphere stored in the tank increases, the pressure is released to prevent clogging. When the prize ball tank 720 is attached to the main body frame 3, the rear side wall 722 on the back side and the rear end side of the fourth side wall 543 are substantially coincident when viewed from the front side of the prize ball tank 720 in plan view (FIG. 5). See). The guide arc projection 552 described above lifts the main body frame 3 by bringing the upper side of the main body frame 3 into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the upper frame plate 10 of the outer frame 2 and the decorative cover plate. 15 is formed to prevent a fraudulent act such as forming a gap with 15 and inserting a fraudulent instrument through the gap.

  Further, the above-described upper rear wall 545 is formed with a rail locking groove 553 for attaching the tank rail member 740 along the opening edge of the rear opening 580, and the fourth side wall 543 and the upper rear wall. A rail locking groove 554 is formed in the bent portion of 545. The tank rail member 740 can be attached to the main body frame 3 by locking the locking protrusions 749 and 750 (see FIG. 53) of the tank rail member 740 in the rail locking grooves 553 and 554. Further, a rail latching elastic piece 555 is formed on the upper portion of the upper rear wall 545 corresponding to the downstream side when the tank rail member 740 is attached, and the tank rail member 740 is locked in the rail locking grooves 553 and 554. When the projecting pieces 749 and 750 are locked and the tank rail member 740 is attached to the main body frame 3, the rail latching elastic piece 555 is provided at the upper end on the downstream side of the tank rail member 740 so that the locked state is not released. It comes in contact with the top.

  When the tank rail member 740 is removed, the rail rail elastic member 555 is pressed backward, and then the tank rail is released to release the locking state between the rail locking grooves 553 and 554 and the locking protrusions 749 and 750. The member 740 may be lifted upward. Further, a relief hole 556 is formed on the side of the rail hooking elastic piece 555, and a ground wire connector 557 is formed below the rail hooking elastic piece 555. The escape hole 556 is formed to escape the end of the shaft pin 748 of the alignment gear 747 provided in the tank rail member 740, and the ground connector 207 is attached to the inside of the tank rail member 740. In addition to being in contact with a metal conductive plate (not shown) to be attached, a wiring connected to a ground connector provided on the power supply board is connected.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 32 and FIG. 34, vertical standing walls 560 are erected on the left and right ends of the pivot support side rear wall 546 on the pivot support side rear wall 546, and a spherical passage unit is provided between the standing walls 560. 770 and a prize ball unit 800 are attached. In addition, a prize ball guide projection 561 is provided in a bent shape from the most upstream part between the left and right standing walls 560 to slightly above the middle stream part. The prize ball guiding projection 561 is projected rearward on the pivot support side rear wall 546 so that its projecting height gradually decreases toward the downstream side, and a ball passage unit 770 described later is attached. This corresponds to the ball drop passage 772 (see FIG. 58) of the ball passage unit 770 and guides the winning balls in a line. Further, a path unit mounting boss 562 for fixing the ball path unit 770 with screws and a positioning pin 574 for positioning are provided on the left and right sides of the prize ball guide projection 561, and a ball break switch described later. A switch-corresponding protrusion 563 is provided so as to face 778 (see FIG. 58). The passage unit mounting boss 562 and the positioning pin 574 will be described in detail later.

  Furthermore, an engagement protrusion 565 as a locking portion that engages with a hook-shaped engagement portion 824 (see FIG. 60) as an engagement portion of the prize ball unit 800 from the midstream portion to the downstream portion of the left and right standing walls 560, A lock elastic claw 564 that engages with the button insertion engagement hole 821 (see FIG. 60) of the prize ball unit 800 is formed, and the rotation shaft 808 (see FIG. 60) of the sprocket 807 of the prize ball unit 800 is formed. A relief hole 566 is formed to receive the end. A payout motor escape opening 572 is formed below the pivot support side rear wall 546 so that the payout motor 815 as a drive motor of the prize ball unit 800 faces the payout motor escape opening 572. (See FIG. 35). The prize ball unit 800 is engaged with the lower end of the engaging groove 573 formed at the lowermost lower end of the rear surface of the shaft supporting side rear wall 546 and is supported by the engaging protrusion 565 and the locking elastic claw 564. The rear wall 546 is detachably attached. This detachable configuration will be described in detail later.

  In addition, a cover body contact groove 567 into which an open side end of the cover body 1250 enters is formed at the open end of the pivot support side rear wall 546. A locking wall 569 protrudes downward. The cover body abutment groove 567 is formed with stop holes 568 corresponding to the stop holes 1253 (see FIG. 38) of the cover body 1250, and these stop holes 1253 and 568 are aligned with each other and fixed with screws (not shown). By doing so, the rear opening 580 of the main body frame 3 can be closed and fixed by the cover body 1250. The locking wall 569 is provided with a U-shaped locking protruding hook piece 570 in a plan view, and the locking protruding hook piece 570 is attached to the cover body 1250 with the cover body 1250 closed with respect to the main body frame 3. By passing through the formed through-hole 1254 (see FIG. 38) and, for example, locking a padlock or the like to the locking protrusion 570, only the person having the key of the padlock can open the cover body 1250. You can make it impossible.

  As mentioned above, although the structure of the main body frame main body 500 which consists of the game board installation recessed part 510 and the board part 511 was demonstrated, when the door frame 5 was closed to the lowest end side part of the board part 511 other than having demonstrated above. In addition, engagement grooves 584 and 585 (see FIG. 31) into which the door frame protrusions 112 and 113 (see FIG. 19) bent downward with the lower side of the door frame main body 100 bent backward are formed. The engagement groove 584 is a groove formed below the above-described firing device mounting portion 520, and the engagement groove 585 is a groove formed from one end of the engagement groove 584 toward the shaft support side. Note that the door frame protrusion 112 corresponding to the engagement groove 585 protrudes rearward so as to be larger than the protrusion amount of the door frame protrusion 113 corresponding to the engagement groove 584. However, a door frame protrusion 112 with a large amount of protrusion is slightly formed at the lower end of the open end. The door frame protrusions 112 and 113 and the engagement grooves 584 and 585 constitute the outer protrusions and engagement portions on the lower side portions of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3.

  As described above, the plate portion 511 is provided with the launch rail 515 and the outlet opening / closing device 579, and the rail connection member 516 and the launch device attachment portion 520 are formed to project, but the launch device attachment portion 520 and the launch rail 515 are provided. The position of the plate portion 511 is biased toward the open side, and they are formed so as to protrude from the surface of the plate portion 511. For this reason, in the state where the door frame 5 is closed, the region from the substantially central portion of the plate portion 511 on which the launching device mounting portion 520 and the firing rail 515 are arranged to the open side is the rear surface of the door frame 5 and the launching device mounting portion. 520 and the front surface of the launch rail 515 are in close contact with each other, so that an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire that has passed through the gap between the door frame protrusion 112 and the engagement groove 585 can be removed from the back surface of the door frame 5. It is extremely difficult to make the gap between the launcher mounting portion 520 and the front surface of the launch rail 515 even better and reach the front side of the game board 4 or the back side of the game board 4.

  On the other hand, since the region from the substantially central portion of the plate portion 511 where the launcher mounting portion 520 and the firing rail 515 are not arranged to the shaft support side does not have a portion protruding on the surface of the plate portion 511, the door frame 5 is closed. In this case, a space 586 is generated between the back surface of the door frame 5 and the front surface of the plate portion 511. For this reason, an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire that has passed through the gap between the door frame protrusion 112 and the engagement groove 584 can easily open the space 586 between the back surface of the door frame 5 and the front surface of the plate portion 511. In order to prevent unauthorized tools from slipping through the space 586 upward, the mounting base 280 attached to the lower part of the back surface of the door frame 5 has the door frame 5 in a closed state. A security protrusion 285 that enters 586 is formed. The security protrusion 285 is formed on the mounting base 280 so as to extend from approximately the middle of the plate portion 511 to the end portion on the shaft support side. Therefore, the space below the launch rail 515 and the outer rail 602 attached to the game board 4 constitutes a crime prevention space 586 that receives the crime prevention projection piece 285 protruding from the mounting base 280. The security projection piece 285 and the security space 586 constitute an inner ridge and engagement portion in the lower side portion of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3.

  As described above, the main body frame 3 includes the game board 4, the hit ball launching device 650, the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail member 740, the ball passage unit 770, the prize ball unit 800, the full tank unit 900, the lock device 1000, and the board unit. 1100 and the cover body 1250 are attached, and these will be sequentially described below.

<Schematic configuration of game board>
A schematic configuration of the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 to 45. 40 is a perspective view seen from the front of the game board 4, FIG. 41 is a front view of the game board 4, FIG. 42 is a rear view of the game board 4, and FIG. 44 is an enlarged perspective view of a removal prevention mechanism portion formed on the game board 4, and FIG. 45 is a main body frame 3 showing the structure of the main body frame side with respect to the removal prevention mechanism of the game board 4. FIG.

  In FIG. 40, the game board 4 includes a substantially square panel holder 600 holding a transparent plate-like game panel 599, and a front component member 601 attached to the front surface of the panel holder 600 so as to surround the game area 605. It is configured. On the surface of the game panel 599, various game devices and a number of obstacle nails (all not shown) are planted in the game area 605. Then, after those gaming devices and obstacle nails are provided, the front component 601 is attached to the front surface of the panel holder 600, and the front component 601 has a circular hollow inside so as to surround the game panel 599. And the outer shape is formed in the shape of the outer shape of the panel holder 600, and an arc surface extending from the middle of the lower side to the diagonally upper side past the center of the upper side is formed as the outer rail 602. An inner rail 603 is formed from the lower position of the stopper 620 provided at the end of 602 to the position where the symmetrical backflow prevention member 604 of the upper stopper 620 is provided. The outer rail 602 has a connecting passage portion 609 that is connected to a rail connecting member 516 provided in an extension shape of the firing rail 515 at a starting end portion thereof, and is formed adjacent to the connecting passage portion 609 with a foul. A mouth 610 is formed. A metal rail is attached in close contact with the outer rail 602 from the upstream end of the foul port 610 to the stopper 620.

  The stopper 620 is provided with an elastic body of rubber or synthetic resin so that when a hit ball that has slid on the outer rail 602 collides with force, the hit ball hits the inside of the game area 605. The backflow prevention member 604 prevents the hit ball, which is fired at one end and taken inside the game area 605, from flowing back to the outer rail 602 again. Further, a security protrusion 608 is provided on one side of the lower portion of the outer rail 602 so as to extend along a part of the metal rail. As described above, the security projection 608 overlaps with the rear end projection 275 of the security cover 270 protruding from the security cover 270 in the state in which the door frame 5 is closed. It prevents intrusion of unauthorized tools such as a piano wire inserted from slightly below the middle of the support side gap.

  Further, an out port 606 is provided at the center of the lower portion of the inner rail 603, and the hit ball hits the game area 605 between the inner rail 603 and the outer rail 602 from the out port 606 to the backflow prevention member 604. Although it constitutes a guided passage to be guided, the hit ball that has flowed back through the outer rail 602 without reaching the game area 605 is taken into the foul port 610 and guided to the foul ball inlet 923 of the full tank unit 900 described later. Then, it is discharged again to the dish unit 300. The game area 605 is an area substantially surrounded by the inner rail 603. In addition, a rail security groove 607 is formed in the front component member 601 on the way from the out port 606 of the inner rail 603 to the stop 620. The rail security groove 607 is formed in a groove shape so that a part of the post-crime projection piece 274 protruding from the security cover 270 enters as described above with the door frame 5 closed. Due to the concavo-convex engagement between the rail security groove 607 and the post-crime protrusion piece 274, the piano wire or the like that is inserted from the middle of the gap on the open side of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is overlapped in the vertical direction. This will ultimately prevent the tool from entering.

  By the way, a positioning recess 611 is formed on one side of the game board 4 to fit in the board positioning projection 576 formed on the main body frame 3, and is formed on the main body frame 3 on the other side of the game board 4. A game board stopper 614 to be inserted into the board stopper insertion hole 578 is provided. The end of the game board stopper 614 is inserted into the board stopper insertion hole 578 when the game board stopper 614 is pressed and fixed. Thus, in order to fix the game board 4 to the main body frame 3, the game board 4 is entirely inserted after the positioning recess 611 is inserted from the front side of the main body frame 3 in an oblique direction so as to be fitted to the board positioning protrusion 576. Is pushed into the first side wall 540 of the main body frame 3, and the game board stopper 614 which is in a free state in that state is pushed in and fixed, and the end thereof is inserted into the board stopper insertion hole 578 and fixed. Thereafter, the game board fixing tool 519 is rotated to fix the lower front surface of the game board 4. As a result, the game board 4 can be easily attached to the main body frame 3. In order to remove the game board 4, the game board 4 may be removed in the reverse order of the above procedure.

  In addition, the game board 4 in the present embodiment has a configuration that prevents unauthorized removal of the game board 4 from the main body frame 3 very easily. That is, as shown in FIG. 40 and FIG. 44, a mounting notch 616 that penetrates in the front and rear of the game board 4 is formed at the lower end opposite to the passage notch 613 below the game board 4 (exactly). Is formed with a mounting notch 616 in the front component 601.), and a fastening bar 617 is stretched and fixed in the horizontal direction below the mounting notch 616. The fastening bar 617 is formed with a belt groove-like fastening portion 618 for latching the fastening band 619 at the approximate center thereof. On the other hand, as the removal preventing mechanism provided in the main body frame 3, as described above, it is the game board mounting portion 512 formed along the upper end side of the plate portion 511 below the main body frame 3, and the firing rail 515 is fired. A fastening hole 533 penetrating in the vertical direction is formed at a position corresponding to the upper part of the portion, and a fastening link 534 for holding the fastening band 619 is passed to the front portion of the fastening hole 533 (see FIG. 45). ).

  When the game board 4 configured as described above is housed and arranged in the game board installation recess 510 of the main body frame 3, the fastening bar 617 is placed in contact with the game board placement part 512 as shown in FIG. At the same time, the fastening portion 618 and the fastening linkage 534 are in a matched state. In this state, the tip of a fastening band 619 that is generally marketed from above the fastening bar 617 is inserted into the mounting notch 616 with respect to the portion where the fastening portion 618 and the fastening linkage 534 coincide. Then, it is inserted downward into the fastening hole 533 and guided forward, and its tip is engaged with the fastener portion of the fastening band 619. And the unnecessary front-end | tip part which protruded ahead from the fastener of the fastening band 619 is cut | disconnected. In this way, unless the fastening band 619 is cut, the game board 4 cannot be removed from the main body frame 3 even if the game board stopper 614 and the game board fixture 519 are released. Although the game board 4 can be removed from the main body frame 3 by cutting the fastening band 619, for example, if different fastening bands are fastened by using a fastening band 619 unique to a pachinko parlor, It can be easily understood that the board 4 has been removed and some sort of fraud has been performed. Thus, illegal removal from the main body frame 3 of the game board 4 can be prevented by an extremely simple removal prevention mechanism.

  Further, the outer shape of the game board 4 has speaker cutouts 612 formed on the upper left and right sides of the game board 4 so as to receive the rear protruding portions of the speakers 163 provided on the back surface of the door frame 5, and the side of the foul mouth 610. A notch portion 613 for passage into which a part of the front guide passage 920 portion of the full tank unit 900 described later is inserted is formed obliquely below. In addition, on the lower left and right sides of the front component member 601, a certificate sticking unit 615 for attaching a certificate check certificate is provided.

  On the other hand, on the back side of the game board 4, the balls won in various gaming devices provided in the game area 605 (for example, an accessory having a V entrance or a prize opening such as a general prize opening) are aligned downstream. A back box 621 that can be guided is attached, and controls the display of a liquid crystal display device 640 (see FIG. 85, etc.) as a display device disposed on the back surface of the back box 621 at substantially the center of the game area 605. A liquid crystal display control board box 622 is attached as a display control board box in which the display device control board is stored.

  Further, a board substrate holder 623 is fixed to the back of the game board 4 below the back box 621. This board substrate holder 623 has a space part (this space part has a width in the front-rear direction larger than the width of the back box 621 so as to collect the winning balls aligned and guided by the back box 621 in front of it. And a drop port 629 (see FIG. 39) is formed on the bottom surface of the space. The drop port 629 joins at the rear surface portion of the out port 606 and communicates with an out ball passage 1119 (see FIG. 81) formed in the substrate unit 1100 described later.

  Further, the board substrate holder 623 is connected to the main control board box 624 for storing the main control board 1350 for controlling the game operation on the back surface thereof, and a payout control board 1186 and a power supply board provided in the board unit 1100 described later. And a relay terminal plate 625 for mounting. The relay terminal plate 625 is provided with drawer connectors 626 and 627 that are automatically connected to the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 provided on the board unit 1100 simply by mounting the game board 4 on the main body frame 3.

  Furthermore, the board substrate holder 623 is formed with a joint guide protrusion 628 that protrudes backward from between the drawer connectors 626 and 627 so as to penetrate the relay terminal plate 625. The joint guide protrusions 628 are provided on the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 provided on the board unit 1100 side and on the game board 4 side when an operation of mounting the game board 4 on the main body frame 3 is performed as will be described in detail later. The drawer connectors 626 and 627 are inserted into the joining guide holes 1213 formed in the frame substrate holder 1101 of the substrate unit 1100 so as to be naturally connected (see FIG. 81). The connection of these drawer connectors will be described in detail later.

<Hitball launcher>
The ball striking device 650 will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 49. FIG. 46 is a front view of the ball hitting device 650, FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the ball hitting device 650, and FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the ball hitting device 650 seen from the back. 49 is a rear view in which the rotary solenoid and the metal plate are removed from the ball striking device 650. FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, the ball striking device 650 is attached to the metal plate 652, the launch base 651 having a substantially rectangular front view, the thin metal plate 652 disposed behind the launch base 651, and the metal plate 652. The rotary solenoid 653, the hitting ball 654 which reciprocates by the operation of the rotary solenoid 653 and plays the game ball along the launch rail 515, the operating piece 655 which is attached to the hitting ball 654 and rotates together with the hitting ball 654, and the hit ball And a first abutting member 657 and a second abutting member 658 for restricting the rotational position of the ball striking ball 654. .

  More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 47 and 49, the launch base 651 has a plate-like portion 661 molded into a horizontally-long rectangular shape with a synthetic resin, and protrudes backward from the vicinity of the upper end of the substantially center to the inside. Two spacers 664 that support the metal plate 652 with a predetermined interval between the abutting member accommodating portion 662 that accommodates the second abutting member 658 and the firing base 651, and front and rear protruding from the upper surface of the plate-like portion 661 And a pair of support portions 665 having holes penetrating in the direction, and the plate-like portion 661 has a plurality of mounting holes 666 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The abutting member accommodating portion 662 has a substantially cylindrical shape, but is formed by cutting out a substantially half of the cylindrical shape so as to expose the peripheral surface of the second abutting member 658, particularly the portion where the hitting ball 654 abuts. Yes. Further, an attachment piece 663 that is bent to the left is formed at the tip of the abutting member accommodating portion 662, and the end faces of the attachment piece 663 and the pair of spacers 664 are in contact with the front surface of the metal plate 652. . The metal plate 652 has a through hole 668 through which the shaft 673 of the ball striking ball 654 is inserted, a plurality of mounting holes 669 that are formed around the through hole 668 to fix the rotary solenoid 653, and the rotary solenoid 653. A wiring hole 670 for drawing out a connected signal output line (not shown) to the front of the metal plate 652 is formed.

  The rotary solenoid 653 is well known, and although not particularly shown, a stator in which a plurality of magnetic pole generators are arranged at predetermined intervals along the circumference, and a suction part that is aligned with each of the magnetic pole generators are provided on the output shaft. And a rotor that is arranged around the rotor, and the rotor supports the output shaft without contacting the stator. According to this, a magnetic field is generated from the coil of the magnetic pole generating part by energizing the magnetic pole generating part, and it becomes possible to apply an attractive force to each of the attracting parts. Note that the rotary solenoid 653 is pulse-controlled, and for each pulse energization excitation, the hitting ball 654 is rotated from the start end to the end, and the game ball supplied to the launch position of the launch rail 515 is ejected. Is possible. In addition, the excitation force of the rotary solenoid 653 can be adjusted by pulse control, and as a result, the impact force (that is, the firing strength) by the hitting ball 654 can be changed.

  The hitting ball rod 654 is composed of a “<”-shaped rod body 672 connected at one end to a rotary solenoid 653 via a shaft 673, and a tip rubber 674 provided at the tip of the rod body 672. The tip of the tip rubber 674 collides with the hit ball supplied to the launch position of the launch rail 515 by rotating to the end by following the motion of 653. Further, the operating piece 655 attached to the basket body 672 rotates the ball feeding arm 656 according to the operation of the hitting ball basket 654, and an attachment portion 676 fixed by a nut 678 and a part of the ball feeding arm 656. And an L-shaped pressing portion 677 that rotates by pressing.

  The ball feed arm 656 has a “te” shape, and is swingably supported by a pair of support portions 665 formed on the upper surface of the firing base 651 via a stop pin 680. The ball feeding arm 656 is disposed so as to contact a supply swinging piece 289 (see FIG. 15) provided facing a hitting ball supply port 288 (see FIG. 15) on the downstream side of the dish unit 300. The upper side rocks the supply swing piece 289 in conjunction with the reciprocating motion of the hit ball 654, and the hitting balls flowing out from the hit ball supply port 288 by the swing operation of the supply swing piece 289 one by one on the launch rail 515. It is designed to be supplied to the launch position.

  The first abutting member 657 restricts the firing start position (starting end) of the hitting ball basket 654 and receives impact, and includes a cylindrical rubber forming portion 685, a holder 686 for supporting the rubber forming portion 685, The holder 686 includes a holder lock 687 that fixes the holder 686 to the metal plate 652. The second abutting member 658 restricts the firing end point position (terminal end) and receives an impact, and is made of a cylindrical rubber member.

<Prize ball tank>
Next, the prize ball tank 720 attached to the upper part of the back surface of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a perspective view (A), a plan view (B), and a side view (C) of the prize ball tank 720. As described above, the prize ball tank 720 is detachably attached to the tank attachment groove 550 (see FIG. 34) formed in the upper part of the back surface of the main body frame 3. Thus, the prize ball tank 720 is formed in a rectangular box shape, and when viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, a notch 729 is formed in the front wall 721, and the bottom surface is formed from the upstream side wall 724 to the downstream side wall 723. A storage portion 728 is formed by a first inclined bottom surface 726 inclined toward the bottom and a second inclined bottom surface 727 inclined from the front wall 721 toward the discharge port 730 described below.

  In addition, a discharge port 730 is formed at the inclined lower end of the second inclined bottom surface 727, and this discharge port 730 protrudes outward from the rear wall 722 of the prize ball tank 720 when viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 1. In this manner, the downstream side wall 723 and the rear wall 722 are formed so as to be surrounded by a discharge port projecting wall 725 that connects the U-shape. Further, on both outer sides of the front wall 721 of the prize ball tank 720, attachment flanges 733 that engage with the tank attachment groove 550 are formed, and on the back side of the bottom surface of the prize ball tank 720, the main body frame 3 is provided. Placement contact pieces 731 and 732 for placement and contact with the fourth side wall 543 project, and a ball leveling member 744, which will be described later, is attached to the lower part of the rear surface wall 722 on the upstream side of the prize ball tank 720. The ball leveling attachment shaft 735 is projected. Further, an overflow preventing member 734 for preventing the ball from jumping is detachably attached to the rear wall 722 and the upstream side wall 724 of the prize ball tank 720 excluding the discharge port 730.

  In the prize ball tank 720 configured as described above, the mounting flange 733 is attached to the tank mounting groove 550 of the main body frame 3 so as to be inserted from above, and the mounting contact pieces 731 and 732 are attached to the main body frame 3. It abuts on the fourth side wall 543. As a result, the prize ball tank 720 is placed on and attached to the upper part on the back surface side of the main body frame 3. In this attached state, as shown in FIG. 38, the prize ball tank 720 is stored via the notch 729 of the front wall 721. The portion 728 communicates with the relief recess 551 formed on the back surface of the main body frame 3, and as shown in FIG. 5, the discharge port 730 faces the upstream end of the tank rail member 740 described below. ing. Accordingly, in the prize ball tank 720, the width in the front-rear direction of the storage portion 728 for storing the sphere (the storage space portion corresponding to the first inclined bottom surface 726 and the second inclined bottom surface 727) is the second side wall 541 of the main body frame 3. It forms so that it may become substantially the same as the width | variety of the front-back direction to the 4th side wall 543, and it is mounted in the upper part to those side walls 541-543.

  Further, as described above, the first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543 of the main body frame 3 are deeply formed so as to cover the rear projecting space of the peripheral part of the game board 4, so that the side walls 541 to 541 are formed. Although the depth of the storage portion of the prize ball tank 720 placed on the upper portion of the 543 is shallower than that of the conventional storage tank, the prize ball tank 720 is stored even if the prize ball is stored and increases in weight. Is supported by the side walls 542 to 543 of the main body frame 3, the stored sphere can be smoothly guided to the discharge port 730 without the inclined bottom surfaces 726 and 727 being deformed. Further, since the discharge port 730 is provided at a position outside the rear wall 722 of the prize ball tank 720, the flow of the sphere stored in the storage portion 728 flows outward from the second inclined bottom surface 727. It is configured. For this reason, as compared with the prize ball tank in which a part of the inclined bottom surface is provided with an opening as a discharge port as in the prior art, a spherical break-up protrusion for eliminating the clogging is formed in the storage portion near the discharge port. In addition, it is possible to obtain a structure in which ball clogging hardly occurs.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the award ball tank 720 is placed on the outside of the upper portion of the rear side walls 541 to 543 that accommodates the rearward projecting portions of the gaming apparatus, and the award is given. Since the discharge port 730 of the ball tank 720 protrudes outward from the rear wall 722 of the storage unit, the tank rail member 740 is disposed outside the storage unit of the prize ball tank 720 (as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1). Since the tank rail member 740 and the storage portion 728 of the prize ball tank 720 do not overlap in the vertical direction, the rear protrusion of the gaming device provided on the back surface of the gaming board 4 is stored. The upper sides of the rear side walls 541 to 543 can be projected rearward at a position close to the upper side of the main body frame 3, so that even if the rearward protruding portion of the gaming device protrudes at the upper side portion of the game board 4. It can be comfortably accommodated in the interior of the side walls 541 to 543.

  Further, regardless of whether or not the storage part 728 of the prize ball tank 720 is placed on the upper outer side of the rear side walls 541 to 543 that house the rearward projecting part of the gaming apparatus, the discharge port 730 is provided in the prize ball tank 720. Only the configuration of being provided at a position outside the rear wall 722 provides a unique effect that is not found in the conventional prize ball tank. This will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a plan view showing the pressure state of a sphere at the discharge port portion between the conventional prize ball tanks (A) and (B) and the prize ball tank (C) according to the present embodiment. In the figure, normally, the balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 are stored and retained in the storage part of the prize ball tank 720. In this case, when the discharge port 730A is formed by opening a part of the inclined bottom surface of the storage portion as in a conventional prize ball tank, for example, as shown in FIG. In the case of a prize-ball tank in which a discharge port 730A is formed on the opposite side of FIG. 5B or a discharge port 730B that is formed adjacent to the spherical breakout projection 736B as shown in FIG. , 730B, the ball pressure is always applied to the discharge ports 730A, 730B from four directions by the pressure of the stored sphere and the reaction from the side wall of the prize ball tank based on the pressure.

  For this reason, the pressure between the spheres happens to be balanced due to the degree of sphere overlap, and even when the sphere on the downstream side flows out, a sphere-engaged state may occur at the outlets 730A and 730B, and the sphere may be clogged. In contrast, in the prize ball tank 720 according to the present embodiment, the discharge port 730 is provided at a position outside the rear wall 722 of the prize ball tank 720, so as shown in FIG. The pressure of the stored sphere in the discharge port 730 is a pressure from only two directions, that is, an action force directed from the storage portion toward the discharge port 730 and a reaction thereof, and does not receive pressure from four directions as in the prior art. For this reason, even if the sphere on the downstream side flows out, it is difficult to generate a sphere-engaged state at the discharge port 730 portion, and an excellent effect that sphere clogging does not occur can be achieved.

<Tank rail member>
The tank rail member 740 disposed below the prize ball tank 720 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 52 to 54. 52 is a perspective view of the relationship between the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail member 740, the ball path unit 770, the prize ball unit 800, and the full tank unit 900 as seen from the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. FIG. 54 is a perspective view of the relationship between the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail member 740, the ball passage unit 770, the prize ball unit 800, and the full tank unit 900, as viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. They are sectional drawing (A) and a top view (B) which show the relationship between the downstream part of the member 740, and the upstream part of the ball passage unit 770.

  As described above, the tank rail member 740 is detachably attached to the rail locking grooves 553 and 554 (see FIG. 34) of the upper rear wall 545 of the main body frame 3. Therefore, the tank rail member 740 is provided with a plurality of locking protrusions 749 that are inserted from above into the rail locking groove 553 on the left and right sides and the lower side of the rear side surface, and the upper side of the rear side surface. At the center, a hook-shaped locking protrusion 750 is provided so as to be hooked on the rail locking groove 554 from above. Thus, the tank rail member 740 is formed in an inclined bowl shape with an open upper surface, the upper surface of the upstream end faces the discharge port 730 of the prize ball tank 720, and the lower surface of the downstream end of the tank rail member 740 forms a ball passage unit 770 described in detail later. I'm here. Further, the inside of the tank rail member 740 serves as a passage 742 through which the spheres flow down in two rows by the partition wall 741 as shown in FIG.

  The bottom surface of the passage 742 is notched with a narrow groove, and foreign substances that roll along the passage 742 together with the ball fall downward from the narrow groove. In addition, a metal plate (not shown) for removing static electricity is attached to the side wall of the passage 742, and the downstream end of the metal plate is connected to the ground wire connector 557 (see FIG. 32). Yes. For this reason, the static electricity charged in the sphere flowing down the tank rail member 740 is grounded from the metal plate to the outside via the ground wire connector 557 via the ground connector.

  In addition, an egg-shaped ball leveling member 744 having a weight on the slightly downstream side of the midstream region of the tank rail member 740 is swingably provided. The ball leveling member 744 is pivotally supported by the ball leveling mounting shaft 735 of the award ball tank 720 described above, and moves toward the passages 742 in the two rows of the tank rail members 740. The spheres that are suspended and flow down the respective passages 742 flow down in a plurality of stages in the vertical direction so as to be rectified so as to become one stage. Further, the upper surface of the tank rail member 740 on the downstream side from the installation position of the ball leveling member 744 is covered with a ball pressing plate 745. The ball holding plate 745 is formed in an inclined arc shape so that the ball that has not been made one step by the ball leveling member 744 is forced to one step.

  Further, a pair of alignment gears 747 are rotatably supported by shaft pins 748 at the downstream end of the tank rail member 740 so as to face the respective passages 742. The alignment gear 747 has a plurality of teeth formed on its outer periphery, and is fixed to the shaft pin 748 so that the pitch of the teeth of the pair of alignment gears 747 is shifted by a half pitch. For this reason, when the upper part of the sphere that has flowed down each passage 742 of the tank rail member 740 flows downstream while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 747, the spheres in the two rows of passages 742 are alternately sent one by one. become. In this case, as shown in FIG. 54, the spheres flowing through the respective passages 742 are guided in the central direction along the inclined surfaces 743 formed in the lower portions of the two rows of passages 742 while meshing with the alignment gears 747. During the guidance, the spheres from the two rows of passages 742 fall in a row alternately to the upper end inlet 773 of the ball drop passage 772 of the ball passage unit 770 described below. The alignment gear 747 is covered with an arcuate gear cover 746 on its upper surface.

<Ball passage unit>
The ball passage unit 770 for guiding the balls dropped from the tank rail member 740 in a line to the prize ball unit 800 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 55 to 59. FIG. 55 is an exploded perspective view showing the relationship between the main body frame 3, the ball passage unit 770, and the prize ball unit 800, and FIG. 56 is a rear view showing the relationship between the ball passage unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800. 57 is a perspective view of the ball passage unit 770 as viewed from the back, FIG. 58 is a front view of the ball passage unit 770, and FIG. 59 is a connection structure of the ball passage unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800. It is a side view for demonstrating. In FIGS. 56 and 57, the prize ball unit 800 portion is drawn with the gear cover 866, the aluminum heat radiating plate 841, and the unit sub plate 825 removed, and the ball passage portion formed in the unit base body 801 is drawn in an easy-to-understand manner. is there. However, the gears and the like are indicated by alternate long and short dash lines in order to facilitate understanding of the relationship with the ball passage.

  In the spherical passage unit 770, a spherical drop passage 772 is formed by a pair of bent passage walls 771 bent to the back surface of a substantially rectangular plate (the surface seen from the back surface is referred to as the front surface). As shown in FIG. 54A, the ball drop passage 772 communicates with the front / rear bent passage portion 772a whose upstream is bent in the front / rear direction (depth direction when viewed from the back), and the front / rear bent passage portion 772a. It consists of a left and right bent passage portion 772b bent in the left and right direction (left and right direction when viewed from the back) and a vertical passage portion 772c communicating with the left and right bent passage portion 772b and having a substantially vertical shape.

  As shown in FIG. 54 (A), the front / rear bent passage 772a is located at the center of the two rows of passages 742 as described above, because the position of the upper end inlet 773 dropping from the tank rail member 740 described above is the main body. The winning ball guide projecting from the front / rear bent passage 772a and the pivot-side rear wall 546 is located on the rear side from the surface of the upper rear wall 545 and the pivot-side rear wall 546 of the frame 3. The projection 561 bends the ball drop passage 772 in the front-rear direction so that the ball drop passage 772 is positioned close to the surface of the shaft support side rear wall 546. Further, as shown in FIG. 58, the right and left bent passage portion 772b is formed in a U shape so as to be almost full in the width of the ball passage unit 770 in order to weaken the momentum of the sphere that has dropped from the tank rail member 740 to the front and rear bent passage portion 772a. It is formed by bending.

  Further, although the vertical passage portion 772c is formed in a substantially vertical shape, it is slightly curved and formed, and a notch portion 775 is formed in one bent passage wall 771 constituting the vertical passage portion 772c. A ball breakage detecting piece 776 whose upper end is supported by a support shaft 777 is attached to 775 so as to be swingable. A ball break switch 778 is attached to the side of the ball break detection piece 776, and an actuator 779 of the ball break switch 778 is in contact with the ball break detection piece 776. The ball break detection piece 776 and the ball break switch 778 constitute a ball break detection mechanism for detecting a ball break in the vertical passage portion 772c.

  Thus, when a ball is present in the vertical passage portion 772c, the ball piece detection piece 776 is pressed by the ball present in the vertical passage portion 772c and the actuator 779 is pushed to turn on the ball piece switch 778. When no ball is present in the portion 772c due to clogging or ball deficiency, the ball piece detecting piece 776 swings into the vertical passage portion 772c, and the actuator 779 turns off the ball piece switch 778. When the ball break switch 778 is turned off, the rotation of the payout motor 815 of the prize ball unit 800, which will be described later, stops and the payout of the prize ball is stopped.

  A stopper protrusion 780 is formed at the lower end of the notch 775 to prevent excessive swinging of the ball breakage detection piece 776 to the opposite side of the passage, and the ball passage unit 770 has a ball. A ball clogging insertion groove 781 is formed in the vertical passage portion 772 c corresponding to the cut detection piece 776. The ball clogging insertion groove 781 inserts a pin from the rear surface side of the ball passage unit 770 to prevent clogging of the ball breakage detection piece 776 when it is difficult to swing the ball breakage detection piece 776 due to ball clogging or the like. This is provided to eliminate the problem. Further, the other bent passage wall 771 facing the ball piece detecting piece 776 is formed in a bulging shape slightly toward the ball piece detecting piece 776 side. This is because when a ball is present in the vertical passage portion 772c, the ball break detection piece 776 is surely pressed to turn on the ball break switch 778.

  Further, a stop hole 782 and a positioning boss 783 are formed in the ball path unit 770 at a position avoiding the above-described ball drop path 772. The positioning boss 783 is engaged with a positioning pin 574 formed in the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, and the stop hole 782 is also formed in the passage unit mounting boss formed in the shaft support side rear wall 546. 562. Thus, to attach the ball passage unit 770 to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 55, the passage unit attachment boss 562 and the stop hole 782 are made to coincide with each other while the positioning boss 783 is engaged with the positioning pin 574. In this state, the screw 784 can be screwed from the stop hole 782. Further, the ball passage unit 770 is formed with a cover body engaging groove 785 that engages with an engaging piece of the cover body 1250 in the middle of one side, and is connected to the prize ball unit 800 at the lower part. A connecting lid member 786 is rotatably provided.

  As shown in FIG. 57, the connecting lid member 786 is configured by projecting a pair of passage walls 790 projecting in an arc shape on the back surface of a rectangular plate member, and the lower surface of the ball passage unit 770 The projecting shaft 789 as the rotating shaft projecting from the tip of the support piece 788 extending from the both ends of the connecting lid member 786 is fitted into the supporting projecting piece 787 serving as the shaft support projecting from the left and right ends of the connecting lid 786. Thus, it is pivotally supported. Further, the connecting lid member 786 is extended below the spherical passage unit 770 by being closed, and the passage formed by the passage wall 790 and the downstream end of the spherical drop passage 772 communicate with each other (see FIG. 59B). The state shown in FIG. 59 and the state where the passage formed by the passage wall 790 and the downstream end of the ball drop passage 772 do not communicate with each other (the state shown in FIG. 59A) can be rotated. A guide projection 791 that guides the support piece 788 of the connecting lid member 786 when projecting from the opened state to the closed state projects from the lower end of the rear surface of the ball path unit 770.

  Thus, in a state where the ball passage unit 770 is fixed to the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, and the prize ball unit 800 is also mounted on the shaft support side rear wall 546 as described later (FIG. 59). In the state shown in (A)), the connecting lid member 786 is closed and the rear surface thereof is locked by the locking elastic claw 820 provided in the prize ball unit 800, so that the ball drop path 772 of the ball path unit 770 and the prize ball The bent passage 803 of the unit 800 is communicated with the passage wall 790 so that a ball falling on the ball dropping passage 772 of the ball passage unit 770 can be guided to the bent passage 803 of the prize ball unit 800. The reason why the rotatable connecting lid member 786 is provided in the ball passage unit 770 is that the award ball unit 800 can be easily attached to and detached from the main body frame 3 as will be described later, and the attachment and detachment thereof is possible. This is to prevent the space formed between the ball path unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800 from being hindered from falling smoothly.

  Further, between the pair of bent passage walls 771 projecting from the ball passage unit 770, the projecting height is provided on the pivot side rear surface wall 546 of the main body frame 3 so as to gradually decrease toward the downstream side. By inserting the award ball guide projection 561, the upstream portion of the ball drop passage 772 is placed on the rear side so that the upper end inlet 773 of the ball drop passage 772 is located substantially at the lower center of the two rows of passages 742 of the tank rail member 740. It is formed as a front / rear bent passage portion 772a that bends in the front / rear direction when viewed from the side. Accordingly, in the configuration in which the balls flowing down in two rows by the pair of alignment gears 747 are alternately sent one by one to the prize ball unit 800 side, the balls are smoothly sent one by one to the prize ball unit 800 through the ball drop passage 772. Can do. Further, according to this configuration, since it is not necessary to form the ball drop passage 772 from an assembly of a plurality of members, the number of parts constituting the ball drop passage 772 can be reduced, and the ball drop passage 772 can be assembled. Workability can be improved.

  In addition, the sphere that has fallen from the tank rail member 740 in the front / rear bent passage portion 772a weakens its momentum by passing through the left / right bent passage portion 772b, and then is sent to the winning ball unit 800 through the vertical passage portion 772c. . In addition, the vertical passage portion 772c into which the ball is fed in a state where the momentum is weakened is provided with a ball break detection mechanism (a ball break detection piece 776 and a ball break switch 778) for detecting the ball break. Accordingly, it is possible to reliably detect a break in the ball drop passage 772, in other words, a break in the ball supplied to the winning ball unit 800 (a ball break).

<Prize ball unit>
Next, the prize ball unit 800 disposed on the downstream side of the above-described ball path unit 770 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 60 is an exploded perspective view as seen from the back side of the prize ball unit 800. FIG. 61 is a rear view for explaining the relationship between the payout motor 815 and the sprocket 807 as a payout member. FIG. 63 is a rear view for explaining the path and driving relationship of the prize ball unit 800, and FIG. 63 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA of FIG.

  In FIG. 60, a prize ball unit 800 includes a unit base body 801 in which a bent path 803, a prize ball path 810, and a ball extraction path 811 forming a ball path by a pair of bent path walls 802, and the unit base body. A unit sub-plate 825 covering the rear surface of 801, a relay board 830 attached to the upper surface (rear surface side) of the unit sub-plate 825, and a gear provided in a substantially central surface region (rear surface region) of the unit sub-plate 825; It comprises a group 843, 844, 847 and a gear cover 866 that covers the detection disk 850 (rotation transmission member). Hereinafter, these configurations will be sequentially described.

  The unit base body 801 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape (this plate portion may be referred to as a “bottom surface”), and a pair of bent passages projecting toward the plate-like unit sub plate 825 side. A bent passage 803 is formed by the wall 802. The bent passage wall 802 protrudes from the center of the upper part of the unit base body 801 to the middle of the downstream side at a distance slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere. It also serves as side walls on both ends of the unit base body 801 from the downstream end to the downstream end. In addition, the middle bent passage wall 802 is largely divided into left and right portions to form a distribution space 805 in which a sprocket 807 serving as a ball feed rotating body is arranged, and a unit base body 801 from the lower portion of the distribution space 805. A passage partition wall 809 is formed in a projecting manner so as to form a pair of the bent passage walls 802 divided to the left and right until the downstream end.

  That is, the right and left bent passage walls 802 and the passage partition wall 809 on the downstream side from the middle form two passages on the left and right from the distribution space 805, and one passage constitutes the prize ball passage 810, The other passage forms a ball passage 811. The passage partition wall 809 is also largely divided into left and right, and a motor storage space 814 for storing the payout motor 815 is formed inside the divided passage partition wall 809. That is, the payout motor 815 is housed and fixed in a motor housing space 814 that is located at a position avoiding the ball passage (bending passage 803, prize ball passage 810, ball removal passage 811) and within the depth width dimension of the ball passage. Is done. The bent passage 803 is formed in a meandering shape so as to weaken the pressure applied to the sprocket 807 of the spheres staying in the passage 803 and reaches the distribution space 805, but the upstream side of the distribution space 805 An elliptical opening 804 is formed on the bottom surface of the. The opening 804 stores small dust or the like that has entered the bent passage 803, and can collect dust or the like that is collected when the prize ball unit 800 is removed from the main body frame 3.

  In the distribution space 805, a sprocket 807 serving as a payout member having a plurality of (three in the illustrated example) recesses in which a sphere fits on the outer periphery is rotatably disposed. A bearing cylinder 806 that pivotally supports the other end of the rotary shaft 808 to which the 807 is fixed is formed on the bottom surface of the distribution space 805. Further, the upper end portion of the passage partition wall 809 constituting the bottom portion of the distribution space 805 is formed in a concave arc shape along the rotation arc of the sprocket 807, and in the upstream portion of the prize ball passage 810 formed on one side thereof A payout ball detection sensor 812 is detachably mounted.

  The payout ball detection sensor 812 is a rectangular parallelepiped magnetic sensor in which a circular passage hole through which a ball passes is formed at the front end, and a switch fitting recess 865 that matches the shape of the rear end is provided with a bent passage wall 802. By being formed with, it can be easily attached and detached. A wiring (not shown) from the payout ball detection sensor 812 is connected to a relay board 830 described later. Further, on the downstream side of the bent passage wall 802 constituting the prize ball passage 810, a locking claw that engages with a locking portion 860 formed on a passage lid plate portion 859 formed integrally with the unit sub plate 825. A plurality of 813 are formed. However, among the plurality of locking claws 813, the locking claw 813 that engages with one locking portion 860 at the lower end of the passage lid plate portion 859 is formed on the passage partition wall 809 side.

  In addition, a circular motor storage space 814 for storing the payout motor 815 is formed below the unit base body 801 and between the prize ball passage 810 and the ball removal passage 811. This motor storage space 814 The cylindrical main body of the payout motor 815 is accommodated in the inside. However, the payout motor 815 is fixed to the back side of the aluminum heat radiating plate 841 attached below the unit sub plate 825 with a pair of mounting pieces 816 formed on the front surface thereof with screws 817. Then, in a state where the payout motor 815 is attached to the aluminum heat radiating plate 841 of the unit sub-plate 825, the motor shaft 818 of the payout motor 815 passes through the shaft insertion hole 842 drilled in the aluminum heat radiating plate 841. The gear 843 is fixed.

  In addition, a space in the depth width direction in which the bent passage 803, the prize ball passage 810, and the ball removal passage 811 described above are formed by covering the rear side of the unit base body 801 with the unit sub plate 825 and the aluminum heat sink 841. The cylindrical main body portion of the dispensing motor 815 is also accommodated in the inside. Since the motor storage space 814 for storing the payout motor 815 and the distribution space 805 in which the sprocket 807 described above is arranged are formed in an extremely close positional relationship in the vertical direction, the unit base body 801 in the vertical direction The length can be shortened, and as a result, the prize ball unit 800 can be made compact.

  Further, the unit base body 801 is provided with a guide protrusion 819 that guides the ball extracted from the lowermost end of the above-described ball extraction passage 811 to the back side of the prize ball unit 800, and the guide protrusion 819 includes a guide protrusion 819. The guided ball is guided to a ball disconnection passage 880 to be described later, and finally discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (a collection basket provided below the island platform). A locking elastic claw 820 that locks the connecting lid member 786 of the above-described ball passage unit 770 protrudes from the upper portion of the unit base body 801, and the prize ball unit 800 is mounted on the shaft support side of the main body frame 3. A mounting boss 823 for connecting the button insertion engagement hole 821 and the hook-shaped engagement portion 824 for removably attaching to the rear wall 546 and the gear cover 866 with the unit base body 801 and the unit sub plate 825 sandwiched therebetween. Is provided.

  The button insertion engagement hole 821 is provided on one side of the upper portion of the unit base body 801 and is attached with a rod-like detachable button 822 slidably in the depth width direction. Corresponds to the locking elastic claw 564 formed on the pivot side rear surface wall 546 of the main body frame 3. Further, as shown in FIG. 55, the rear end surface of the button insertion engagement hole 821 has a concave shape so that the distal end portion of the lock elastic claw 564 enters. The hook-shaped engaging portion 824 engages with an engaging protrusion 565 formed on the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, and presses the prize ball unit 800 against the shaft support side rear wall 546. By pushing down downward, the hook-like engagement portion 824 and the engagement protrusion 565 are engaged. In the engaged state, the lock elastic claw 564 and the button insertion engagement hole 821 are engaged with each other, so that the upward movement of the prize ball unit 800 cannot be performed.

  Note that the hook-shaped engagement portions 824 are formed on the upper left and right of the unit base body 801. A mounting boss 823 for connecting the unit base body 801 and the gear cover 866 with the unit sub-plate 825 sandwiched therebetween is long and protrudes toward the rear surface, and is a through hole formed in the unit sub-plate 825. After passing through 858, the unit base body 801 and the gear cover 866 are coupled with the unit sub-plate 825 sandwiched by fitting the screw 868 from the surface of the gear cover 866 to correspond to the mounting hole 867 of the gear cover 866. doing.

  The configuration of the unit sub-plate 825 that covers the unit base body 801 will be described. The unit sub-plate 825 is a composite that covers the bent passage 803 portion, the distribution space 805 portion, and the prize ball passage 810 portion of the unit base body 801. A payout motor 815 is attached to a resin plate, and an aluminum heat radiating plate 841 that covers the downstream portion of the ball extraction passage 811 is attached. A relay board region 826 for attaching the relay board 830 is formed on the top side (rear side) of the synthetic resin plate portion of the unit sub-plate 825, and a plurality of gears 843, 844, 847 and detection are formed below the relay board area 826. A gear region 840 to which the disk 850 is attached is formed.

  The relay substrate region 826 is formed in a substantially square shape, and mounting ribs 827 for mounting the relay substrate 830 are provided along the square shape, and a substrate cover 835 (described later) is formed above and below the one side vertical side. An engagement groove portion 828 that engages with the engagement protrusion 836 is formed, and a locking claw portion 829 that engages with the locking projection portion 837 of the substrate cover 835 is formed at the center of the other side vertical side. Further, the relay board region 826 is formed with a button insertion hole 834 through which the attach / detach button 822 is inserted and an attachment boss part 832 for fixing the relay board 830 with screws (not shown).

  The relay board 830 attached to the above-described relay board area 826 includes wiring from the above-described payout ball detection sensor 812, payout motor 815, and sensor 855 described later provided in the prize ball unit 800, and a payout control board 1186 (described below). For this purpose, a plurality of connectors are provided, and a button insertion hole 833 through which the detachable button 822 is inserted and a mounting hole 831 corresponding to the mounting boss portion 832 are formed. It is installed. Thus, the relay board 830 is mounted on the mounting rib 827 in the relay board area 826, and the mounting hole 831 and the mounting boss portion 832 are aligned with each other and fixed with screws (not shown). It can be fixed to the surface (rear surface) of the plate 825.

  Further, the relay board 830 attached as described above is covered with a board cover 835. The substrate cover 835 is formed in a box shape with a substantially square front side open, and an engagement projection 836 is formed on the upper and lower bases of one vertical side, and a locking projection 837 is formed on the substantially central side of the other vertical side. ing. Further, a button opening 838 and a connection opening 839 are formed on the square vertical surface of the substrate cover 835. Thus, after the engagement protrusion 836 of the substrate cover 835 is inserted into the engagement groove portion 828 of the relay substrate region 826 and engaged, the engagement protrusion 837 and the engagement claw portion 829 are engaged with each other. The relay substrate 830 can be covered with the substrate cover 835. On the other hand, when removing, the latching claw portion 829 is elastically deformed to release the engagement with the latching projection 837 and the substrate cover 835 is pulled diagonally forward to engage the engagement projection 836 and the engagement groove 828. The engagement with can be released. In the state where the substrate cover 835 is covered, the head of the detachable button 822 engaged with the button insertion engagement hole 821 passes through the button insertion holes 833 and 834 and slightly faces the outside from the button opening 838. Yes. Further, the wiring connected to the relay substrate 830 is drawn out from the connection opening 839.

  Next, the gears 843, 844, 847 and the detection disk 850 provided in the gear region 840 formed in the unit sub plate 825 will be described. As described above, the tip of the motor shaft 818 of the payout motor 815 projects through the shaft insertion hole 842 formed in the aluminum heat radiating plate 841 of the unit sub plate 825 and protrudes to the surface (rear side) of the unit sub plate 825. The first gear 843 (drive gear) is fixed to the protruding portion. Above the first gear 843, a second gear 844 (rotation transmission gear) that meshes with the first gear 843 is press-fitted into the back surface (front side) of the gear cover 866 and is formed in the aluminum heat radiating plate 841. A shaft 845, the other end of which is supported in the shaft hole 846, is rotatably provided. Above the second gear 844, a third gear 847 (rotation transmission gear) that meshes with the second gear 844 is a unit sub-plate. A shaft 848 press-fitted in a shaft hole 849 formed in 825 is rotatably provided. Further, above the third gear 847, a detection disk 850 having a gear portion 852 (driven gear) that meshes with the third gear 847 is rotatably provided on a rotary shaft 808 that supports the sprocket 807. .

  Note that, as shown in FIG. 63, the front end portion of the motor shaft 818 is loosely fitted in a receiving hole formed in the gear cover 866. The rotating shaft 808 is supported by being pressed into a bearing cylinder 806 formed on the unit base body 801 and supported at the other end by a bearing hole formed on the gear cover 866. The sprocket 807 is rotatably supported in the distribution space 805 through a shaft through hole 864 formed slightly below the center of the 840, and the detection disk 850 is formed in the space formed by the unit sub plate 825 and the gear cover 866. Is pivotally supported. However, as shown in FIG. 63, since the rear end portion of the sprocket 807 is engaged with the center front surface portion of the detection disk 850, the sprocket 807 and the detection disk 850 are integrated around the rotation shaft 808. It is designed to rotate. Accordingly, when the dispensing motor 815 is driven to rotate, the rotation is transmitted to rotate the sprocket 807 via the first gear 843, the second gear 844, the third gear 847, and the gear portion 852 of the detection disk 850.

  The outer periphery of the detection disk 850 is formed to be slightly larger than the circle of the gear portion 852, and the outer peripheral portion protruding outward from the gear portion 852 has the same number as the recesses of the sprocket 807 (in the illustrated case). 3) detection notches 851 are formed. The detection notch 851 is detected by a light emitting / receiving sensor 855 (rotational position detecting means) provided on a sensor substrate 854 sandwiched and supported by a substrate mounting portion 857 formed on the surface of the unit sub-plate 825. . The sensor 855 monitors whether or not the sprocket 807 is rotating normally by detecting the number of detection notches 851 within a predetermined interval during the payout operation. If abnormal rotation is detected by the sensor 855 (in many cases, the ball is engaged with the sprocket 807), the sprocket 807 is rotated forward and backward a predetermined number of times to eliminate the abnormal state (for example, the ball engagement state). It is. Note that the number of balls actually paid out is detected by the payout ball detection sensor 812 provided in the prize ball passage 810 and used for counting. As shown in FIG. 63, the other end side of the sensor substrate 854 is also sandwiched between substrate mounting portions formed on the gear cover 866.

  As described above, of the plurality of gears provided in the gear region 840, only the second gear 844 is rotatably provided on the rotary shaft 845 that is press-fitted to the gear cover 866 side. As a result, the gear cover 866 covering the gear region 840 is provided. A mounting hole 867 is formed at a position corresponding to the tip of the mounting boss 823 that protrudes from the unit base body 801 and passes through the through hole 858 of the unit sub-plate 825. The mounting hole 867 and the mounting boss 823 are aligned with each other while meshing the teeth of the second gear 844 provided on the gear cover 866 side with the teeth of the first gear 843 and the third gear 847 provided on the unit sub-plate 825 side. In this state, the base unit body 451 and the gear cover 866 are integrally fixed in a state where the unit sub plate 825 is sandwiched by screwing with the screw 868 from the rear surface of the gear cover 866. Further, on one side surface of the gear cover 866, there is a wiring processing piece 869 that hangs and collects wiring connected to the relay board 830 (for example, wiring connecting the relay board 830 and a payout control board 1186 described later). Projected.

  The configuration of the prize ball unit 800 has been described above. In the state where the unit base body 801, the unit sub-plate 825, the relay board 830, the board cover 835, and the gear cover 866 are assembled, as shown in FIG. The cylindrical main body portion of the payout motor 815 is positioned below the bent passage 803 through which the ball to be taken out is guided. Further, the unit base body 801 includes a sprocket 807 arranged in a ball passage (bending passage 803, prize ball passage 810, ball removal passage 811) and a depth width dimension of the ball passage at a position avoiding the ball passage. A payout motor 815 housed in a motor housing space 814 formed therein, and the rotation of the motor shaft 818 of the payout motor 815 along the non-blocking surface side of the unit sub-plate 825 is rotated by the sprocket 807. A rotation transmission member (first gear 843, second and third gears 844, 847, and a gear portion 852 of the detection disk 850) for transmitting to the shaft 808 is provided, and in the distribution space 805 of the dispensing motor 815 and the bending passage 803. A plurality of gears 843, 844, 84 provided in the gear region 840 on the rear surface of the unit sub-plate 825 with the sprocket 807 serving as a payout member disposed. It has become a consolidated structure to be driven to rotate by 850 (852). That is, the sprocket 807 and the payout motor 815 are accommodated within the depth width of the ball passage (bending passage 803, prize ball passage 810, ball removal passage 811) formed between the unit base body 801 and the unit sub plate 825. In addition, the rotation transmission members (the first gear 843, the second and third gears 844 and 847, and the gear portion 852 of the detection disk 850) that connect the sprocket 807 and the payout motor 815 are connected to the non-blocking surface side of the unit sub-plate 825. Therefore, the prize ball unit 800 can be made thinner than the one in which a payout motor and a part of the sprocket are arranged outside the ball passage.

  In addition, such a prize ball unit 800 has a ball passage (bending passage 803, prize ball passage 810, ball removal passage 811) in the prize ball unit 800 formed in a single passage shape, so Thinning is achieved. That is, unlike the conventional case in which the payout motor 815 is protruded to the front side, the rear side or the side of the prize ball unit, when attached to the rear side of the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, Any part of the prize ball unit 800 can be structured not to protrude further rearward. 63, the front end portion of the payout motor 815 is configured to slightly protrude from the rear surface of the unit base body 801. This protruding portion is formed on the shaft support side rear wall 546 as shown in FIG. Since it faces the front portion of the main body frame 3 from the lower discharge motor escape opening 572, as a result, it protrudes by a dimension obtained by subtracting the thickness of the shaft support side rear wall 546 from the protruding dimension. Thus, the amount of protrusion toward the front side relative to the shaft support side rear wall 546 is small. Further, by adopting such a configuration, in the present embodiment, the game board 4 is provided between the pivotal support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3 to which the prize ball unit 800 is attached and the back surface of the game board 4. A storage space for storing the rearward protruding portion of the gaming apparatus can be increased in the depth width direction.

  Further, in order to attach the prize ball unit 800 configured as described above to the pivotal support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 55, the hook-shaped engagement portion 824, the engagement protrusion 565, After the alignment, the lower end of the prize ball unit 800 is hooked in the locking groove 573, and the prize ball unit 800 is pivotally supported to engage the hook-like engagement portion 824 and the engagement protrusion 565. The lower side wall 546 is pressed down while being in close contact with the side rear wall 546. At this time, since the lower end portion of the prize ball unit 800 and the locking groove 573 are engaged, and the hook-shaped engaging portion 824 and the engaging protrusion 565 are engaged, the mounting itself is completed. When the prize ball unit 800 is moved upward, the respective engagement states are easily released. To prevent this, the lock elastic claw 564 is engaged with the button insertion engagement hole 821. It is supposed to be.

  That is, the lock elastic claw 564 and the button insertion engagement hole 821 are engaged to prevent the prize ball unit 800 from moving upward in the attached state. In this way, after the prize ball unit 800 is attached, the connecting lid member 786 of the ball path unit 770 is rotated as described above and locked by the locking elastic claw 820, so that the ball path of the ball path unit 770 drops. The downstream end of the passage 772 and the upstream end of the bent passage 803 of the prize ball unit 800 can be communicated with each other through a passage constituted by a pair of passage walls 790. When the prize ball unit 800 is attached, the downstream end of the prize ball passage 810 is connected to the prize ball inlet 927 of the full tank unit 900 described in detail later, and the downstream end of the ball removal path 811 is connected to the ball removal connection path. Connected to the upstream end of 880.

  On the other hand, when the prize ball unit 800 is removed, the engagement by the latching elastic claws 820 is released and the connecting lid member 786 is rotated forward, and then the detachable button 822 is pressed to release the locking elastic claws 564. It is moved to the front side to release the engagement between the lock elastic claw 564 and the button insertion engagement hole 821, and then the prize ball unit 800 is pulled upward with the detachable button 822 pressed, and the prize ball unit 800. By releasing the engagement between the lower end portion of the lens and the locking groove 573 and the engagement between the hook-shaped engagement portion 824 and the engagement protrusion 565 and pulling out the prize ball unit 800 to the front side, Easy to remove.

<Full tank unit>
The full tank unit 900 arranged on the downstream side of the above-described prize ball unit 800 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 is a perspective view showing the relationship between the prize ball unit 800 and the full tank unit 900, FIG. 65 is a perspective view of the full tank unit 900, and FIG. 66 is a front view of the full tank unit 900. 67 is an exploded perspective view, FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view seen from the back of the full tank unit 900, and FIG. 68 is a partially broken perspective view showing the relationship between the full tank unit 900 and the foul port 610, 69 is a cross-sectional view taken along the bottom rocking plate 907 provided in the full tank unit 900, and FIG. 70 is a cross-sectional view showing the relationship between the full tank unit 900 and the foul port 610.

  As described above, the full tank unit 900 is placed and fixed on the full tank unit mounting portion 531 of the main body frame 3, and as shown in FIG. 901 and a lid body 926 that covers the upper surface of the box main body 901. The box main body 901 is configured such that the sphere that has flowed in from the downstream end of the prize ball passage 810 is guided in a zigzag shape inside and discharged from the outlet 921. Therefore, a side guide passage 902 that guides a sphere that has flowed in from a prize ball inlet 927 formed in the lid 926 to the side from one end to the other end is formed in the upstream portion. A side guide receiving portion 903 formed in a concave arc shape so as to guide the sphere toward the side is provided at one end portion of the side guide passage 902 directly below the prize ball entrance 927, and the side guide passage is provided. A buffer member 904 is provided on the inner surface of the other end of 902 to receive the impact of the sphere flowing through the side guide passage 902 and guide the sphere downstream.

  Further, the ball that collides with the buffer member 904 provided on the inner surface of the other end of the side guide passage 902 is guided to flow in the opposite direction to the flow of the sphere in the side guide passage 902 after changing the direction to the downstream side. A reverse side guide passage 905 is formed. The sphere that has flowed through the reverse side guide passage 905 is then guided to the front guide passage 920 formed forward, and the outlet 921 formed at the lower end of the front guide passage 920 forms the above-described dish unit 300. Guided to prize ball contact 451.

  By the way, a bottom surface opening 906 is formed on the bottom surface on the upstream side of the reverse side guide passage 905 so as to open over the entire bottom surface, and the bottom surface swing plate 907 is closed so that the bottom surface swinging plate 907 can swing. ing. The bottom surface opening 906 is formed in a substantially square concave shape having an open top surface, and a pair of shaft projections 911 project from the side walls in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front inside. A circular spring mounting recess 912 for positioning the lower end of the spring 913 is formed on the concave bottom surface of the bottom surface opening 906. On the other hand, the bottom rocking plate 907 that closes the bottom surface opening 906 is formed in a substantially square shape, and is semi-circularly supported by being fitted to the shaft support protrusion 911 when viewed from the front on the downstream side of the back surface. A bearing portion 908 is formed to project.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 69, a spring locking projection 910 that locks the upper end of the spring 913 protrudes downward from the center of the back surface of the bottom rocking plate 907. Therefore, the bottom rocking plate 907 is biased in the direction in which the upstream side is always rocked upward by the biasing force of the spring 913. The spring 913 does not swing the bottom rocking plate 907 downward even when the number of normal prize balls paid out (for example, 15) is placed on the bottom rocking plate 907 at a time. A predetermined number of balls equal to or greater than the payout number is formed by a spring member having a spring coefficient that swings downward when placed on the bottom swing plate 907. Further, a detection protrusion 909 protrudes forward on the upstream side of the bottom rocking plate 907. The detection protrusion 909 passes through the communication hole 929 and is positioned in a switch storage space 914 described below when the bearing portion 908 of the bottom rocking plate 907 is fitted and supported on the shaft support protrusion 911. It has become.

  In addition, a switch storage space 914 for storing the full tank switch 916 is integrally formed on the outer side of the upstream end side wall of the reverse side guide passage 905. In order to mount the full switch 916 in the switch storage space 914, a switch mounting portion 918 is formed on the outer surface of the side wall of the upstream end portion of the reverse side guide passage 905 above the switch storage space 914. A mounting piece 917 of the switch holder 915 that holds the full switch 916 is fixed to the portion 918 by a screw 919. The full tank switch 916 is configured as a switch composed of a projector and a light receiver, and detects ON / OFF when the detection protrusion 909 swings up and down between the light receiver and the light projector.

  Further, a foul ball passage 922 is formed on one side downstream of the reverse side guide passage 905. As shown in FIG. 68, the foul ball passage 922 is bent and formed so that the foul ball inlet 923 communicates with the foul port 610 described above and the downstream side communicates with the upstream side of the front guide passage 920. Has been. For this reason, the foul ball taken into the foul port 610 is guided from the foul ball inlet 923 through the bent foul ball passage 922 to the front guide passage 920, and further through the outlet 921 and the prize ball connecting rod 451 to the dish unit. Returned to 300.

  The box main body 901 includes engaging pieces that are engaged with unit engaging grooves 532 formed in the full unit mounting portion 531 on both sides of the outlet 921 and one side of the foul ball inlet 923. A latching projection 925 that engages with a latching piece 928 formed on the lid 926 is formed along with a projection 924. The latching protrusion 925 is appropriately formed on the upper left and right side walls of the box main body 901.

  On the other hand, the lid 926 is formed in a plate shape so as to cover the upper surfaces of the side guide passage 902, the reverse side guide passage 905, the front guide passage 920, and the foul ball passage 922 of the box main body 901. A square prize ball entrance 927 is opened in the passage 902 at a position corresponding to the upstream end. Further, around the lid 926, a latching piece 928 for engaging with the latching projection 925 of the box main body 901 projects downward.

  In the full unit 900 configured as described above, as shown in FIG. 64, the balls paid out from the prize ball path 810 of the prize ball unit 800 are moved upstream from the prize ball entrance 927 to the upstream side of the side guidance path 902. It enters and is guided toward the side by the side guide receiving portion 903 and collides with the buffer member 904. The sphere that collides with the buffer member 904 is guided in the reverse side guide passage 905 toward the downstream side in the direction opposite to the guide direction of the side guide passage 902 and guided to the front guide passage 920, and the front guide passage 920. From the exit 921 through the prize ball communication rod 451 to the dish unit 300. Further, the foul sphere entered from the foul ball entrance 923 is also weakened by the bent foul ball passage 922 and joined to the front guide passage 920, and passes through the prize ball contact hole 451 from the outlet 921 of the front guide passage 920. Guided to the dish unit 300.

  In normal times, when the sphere naturally flows in the full tank unit 900, when the sphere moves from the side guide passage 902 to the reverse side guide passage 905, it falls to the bottom rocking plate 907. Since the elastic force of the spring 913 is strong when the number of normal prize balls is paid out, the bottom rocking plate 907 does not rock, and the detection protrusion 909 is a light projecting / receiving method as shown by the solid line in FIG. The full tank switch 916 is placed between the projector and the light receiver, and the switch is not conductive (OFF). On the other hand, when the prize balls are stored in the dish unit 300 and the full tank unit 900 is also filled with balls, the bottom fluctuations formed in the entire upstream area of the front guide path 920 and the reverse side guide path 905 are formed. The bottom rocking plate 907 rocks downward against the urging force of the spring 913 due to the pressure of the sphere stored on the moving plate 907, and the detection projecting piece 909 is projected as shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. The light receiving full tank switch 916 is disconnected from the light projector and the light receiver, and the switch becomes conductive (ON). When the full tank switch 916 is turned on, the rotational driving of the payout motor 815 of the prize ball unit 800 is stopped (if the ON signal is derived while the predetermined number of prize balls are being paid out, the predetermined number of prize balls). Will be stopped after it has been paid out).

  As described above, in the full tank unit 900, the full tank switch is operated by the bottom rocking plate 907 having a width substantially the same as the width of the bottom of the path of the path through which the ball flows (in the illustrated case, the reverse side guide path 905). 916 is actuated and biased by a biasing member (spring 913) so that the bottom rocking plate 907 swings when a certain amount of balls are placed without swinging due to the normal flow of the balls. Therefore, compared to the conventional case where a ball is placed on the bottom surface of some passages or the like to detect a clogged ball, the placement of the balls in that portion of the passage is not detected due to the clogging. It can be surely prevented. This can reliably detect a full tank.

  Moreover, in the full unit 900 according to the present embodiment, the full unit is formed on the main body frame as in the prior art because it is detachably attached to the full unit mounting portion 531 of the main body frame 3. It is not necessary to form a passage for the full tank structure in the main body frame as compared with the one assembled in the dispensing passage. Further, by making the inside of the full tank unit 900 a zigzag passage, it is possible to guide to the dish unit 300 while weakening the momentum of the balls paid out from the prize ball passage 810 of the prize ball unit 800. The awarded ball does not jump out of the dish unit 300. Further, in the full tank unit 900 according to the present embodiment, the foul ball passage 922 that guides the foul ball joins the ball in the middle of the front guide passage 920 that pays out the award ball. The foul sphere can be merged without hindering the flow of the sphere.

<Lock device>
Next, the lock device 1000 that is attached in the vertical direction along the back side edge of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 71 to 79. 71 is a rear perspective view showing the relationship between the locking device 1000 and the main body frame 3, and FIG. 72 is an enlarged side sectional view showing a latching structure of the locking device 1000 to the main body frame 3. FIG. FIG. 74 is a partial cross-sectional view taken in the horizontal direction at a position slightly below the center in the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. 74 shows a detailed relationship between the lock device 1000 and the side walls 540 and 541 of the main body frame 3. 75 is an enlarged cross-sectional view, FIG. 75 is a side view (A) of the lock device 1000, a perspective view (B) seen from the front side, and FIG. 76 is a perspective view (A) seen from the back side of the lock device 1000. ), Perspective views (B) and (C) of a door frame sliding rod 1040 and a body frame sliding rod 1050 slidably provided inside the U-shaped base 1001 of the locking device 1000, FIG. FIG. 78 is an exploded perspective view of the lock device 1000, and FIG. Is a front view for explaining the operation of the body frame for sliding rod 1050, FIG. 79 is a front view for explaining the action of the anti-fraud members 1023,1032.

  The lock device 1000 is attached from the substantially upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3 along the first side wall 540 on the open side of the main body frame 3, and as shown in FIG. A plurality of (three in the illustrated example) lock locking holes 548 formed in the middle and middle of the upper and lower ends between the rising portions of the first side wall 540 and the upper part of the vertical surface of the first side wall 540 The U-shaped base 1001 of the locking device 1000 described below is supported by the lock mounting hole 547 formed by being cut out in the middle and the lock mounting hole 547 formed near the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 526. It is fixed. Therefore, the structure of the lock device 1000 will be described in detail below.

  As shown in FIGS. 75 to 77, the locking device 1000 includes a U-shaped base 1001 as a lock base formed in a U-shaped cross section, and a door frame that is slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001. The sliding frame 1040 for the main body, the sliding frame 1050 for the main body frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001, and the sliding frame 1050 for the main body frame cannot be illegally slid. The tamper-proof members 1023 and 1032 are attached to the lower part of the U-shaped base 1001.

  The U-shaped base body 1001 is formed by bending a metal so as to have a U-shaped cross section, and slidably providing a door frame sliding rod 1040 and a body frame sliding rod 1050 therein. The width dimension is extremely thin as compared with a conventional locking device that is concentrated on a base body having an L-shaped cross section. As described above, since the size of the game board 4 in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction is extremely increased and the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the main body frame 3 is increased, the side walls 540 and the main body frame 3 are The mounting structure that allows the locking device 1000 to be attached to the back side of the main body frame 3 by reducing the width dimension of the locking device 1000 according to the present embodiment because the size between the outer periphery and the outer periphery is extremely small. It is because it improved as. And since the open side of the U-shaped cross section of the U-shaped base 1001 is attached so as to face the back surface of the main body frame 3, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3, the door frame is provided inside. The sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 have a tamper-proof structure in which the U-shaped base 1001 is completely covered except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065.

  First, a rectangular hook penetration opening 1002 through which the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 pass is opened on the closed side opposite to the open side of the U-shaped base 1001 and on the closed side. In addition, a screw fixing portion 1003 protrudes horizontally in the middle of the upper portion and the middle of the side surface 1001b (see FIG. 77) that is in close contact with the first side wall 540, and further, the side surface 1001a that is not in close contact with the first side wall 540 on the open side. A locking projection 1004 is formed in a protruding manner at the upper end and middle portion of FIG.

  The screw stoppers 1003 and the locking protrusions 1004 are for attaching the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame 3. The locking protrusions 1004 are inserted into the lock locking holes 548 of the main body frame 3 and moved upward. (See FIG. 72) Since the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547 coincide with each other in this state, the locking device 1000 is firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 by screwing a screw (not shown) into the coincident hole. can do. Note that the locking device 1000 is attached not only to the upper and middle screw fixing portions 1003 but also in the vicinity of the screw fixing portion 1003 formed on the lock mounting piece 1008 described later and the cylinder lock through hole 526. The lower part of the lock device 1000 can also be attached by fixing the lock attachment hole 547 with a screw (not shown).

  In addition, when mounting, the locking projections 1004 formed at the upper, middle, and lower three positions on the open side (front part) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the locking holes 548 for positioning and locking, and the U-shaped Screw fixing portions 1003 formed at two positions on the closed side (rear portion) of the base body 1001 and screw fixing portions 1003 formed on the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base body 1001 are formed in the lock mounting holes 547. Since the structure is fixed with screws, the front portion of the locking device 1000 is locked by the locking protrusion 1004 and the locking locking hole 548, and the rear portion of the locking device 1000 is fixed by the screw locking portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547. In addition, since the lower portion of the locking device 1000 is fixed by the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547, the locking device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 with an extremely simple structure.

  In other words, even when the locking device 1000 is configured by concentrating on the U-shaped base body 1001 having a very small width, the locking device 1000 is fixed to the main body frame 3 by locking and fixing the front portion and the rear portion of the locking device 1000. It can be firmly fixed to. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking protrusion 1004 constituting the locking structure (or a fixed structure) at the front portion protrudes from the side surface 1001 a that does not adhere to the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped base body 1001. On the other hand, the screw fixing portion 1003 and the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the fixing structure of the rear portion are formed so as to protrude in the horizontal direction from the side surface 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped base body 1001. Therefore, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so that the locking structure of the front part is not loosened as compared with the case where the locking structure of the front part is formed on the side surface 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540. is there.

  Further, insertion holes 1005 are formed in the upper, middle, and lower sides of both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are slidably attached to the inside of the U-shaped base 1001 by inserting and crimping the rivet 1006 into the insertion hole 1005 in the stored state. it can. That is, one rivet slot 1042 is formed in each of the upper, middle, and lower portions of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 are respectively formed in the main frame sliding rod 1050. By passing the rivet 1006 through the rivet long holes 1055 and 1061, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can move upward, and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can move downward. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 76 (B), the rivet 1006 penetrates the lower end of the rivet slot 1055, 1061 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050, and as shown in FIG. A rivet 1006 passes through the upper end of the rivet slot 1042 of the sliding rod 1040.

  Further, a tamper-proof notch 1007 is formed on the closed side of the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001, and at the front end of the side 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540 of the body frame 3 on the open side. A lock attaching piece 1008 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010 protrudes laterally, and an insertion vertical opening 1020, a spring locking piece 1021, and a clearance lateral hole 1022 are provided on the side face 1001 b in close contact with the first side wall 540. Each is formed. The fraud prevention notch 1007 is configured such that a stopper piece 1027 of a first fraud prevention member 1023 described later advances and retreats. This will be described in detail later. Further, the front end of the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 is arranged so that the lock attachment piece 1008 is positioned below the lower end side of the game board installation recess 510 in a state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3. The lock mounting piece 1008 is formed with a lock insertion hole 1009 through which the cylinder lock 1010 penetrates and a mounting hole formed in the lock mounting substrate 1011 of the cylinder lock 1010. Mounting holes 1014 for mounting 1013 with screws 1012 are drilled in two places at the top and bottom, and screw stoppers 1003 for mounting the lower part of the locking device 1000 on the back surface of the main body frame 3 are drilled.

  The insertion vertical opening 1020 is an opening through which the first engagement protrusion 1017 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 fixed to the cylinder lock 1010 enter when the cylinder lock 1010 rotates. The spring locking piece 1021 is for locking the spring 1035 provided on the tamper-proof members 1023 and 1032, and the clearance lateral hole 1022 constitutes a clearance hole so as not to obstruct the movement of the connecting pin 1034. It is. This point will be described in detail later.

  The cylinder lock 1010 attached to the above-described lock attachment piece 1008 will be described. The cylinder lock 1010 has a cylindrical cylinder lock body fixed to the front of the lock attachment substrate 1011, and the lock shaft 1015 of the cylinder lock body is the lock attachment substrate. The engagement cam 1016 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 1015 with a screw 1019. The engagement cam 1016 is formed in a boomerang shape, and one end side thereof is a first engagement projection piece 1017 that engages with the lowering engagement hole 1062 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 when rotating. The side is a second engagement protrusion 1018 that engages with the ascending engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 when rotating. The cylinder lock 1010 configured as described above has an attachment hole 1013 and a lock attachment piece 1008 formed at two positions on the lock attachment substrate 1011 by inserting a cylindrical cylinder lock body portion into the lock insertion hole 1009. The cylinder lock 1010 can be fixed to the U-shaped base body 1001 by making the mounting holes 1014 coincide with each other and screwed with screws 1012.

  Next, fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 attached to the U-shaped base 1001 will be described with reference to FIG. The fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 are for preventing the body frame sliding rod 1050 from being illegally lowered by, for example, a piano wire or a wire without rotating the cylinder lock 1010 with an official key. . Therefore, each of the anti-tamper members 1023 and 1032 has a structure in which the first anti-tamper member 1023 and the second anti-tamper member 1032 are connected by the connecting pin 1034. The first fraud prevention member 1023 is formed in a vertically long plate shape that is swingable around the swing shaft hole 1025 at the upper end, and the swing shaft hole 1025 is formed inside the U-shaped base body 1001 described above. Of the insertion holes 1005 and rivets 1006 for slidably attaching the door frame sliding rods 1040 and the body frame sliding rods 1050, the lowermost insertion holes 1005 and rivets 1006 are attached.

  Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is provided with a vertically long protruding piece insertion hole 1026 that overlaps the insertion vertical opening 1020 on the plate-like surface, and the second engaging protruding piece 1018 is formed in the protruding piece insertion hole 1026. It can be inserted. That is, when the second engagement protrusion 1018 passes through the protrusion insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020, the upward engagement hole 1045 of the sliding frame 1040 for the door frame provided inside the U-shaped base body 1001. The second engagement protrusion 1018 is engaged. In addition, a slanting portion 1024 is an outline line obliquely above the opening position of the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 of the first fraud prevention member 1023. The inclined portion 1024 contacts the rear surface side of the first engaging protrusion 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 rotates, and the first engaging protrusion 1017 and the inclined portion 1024 are rotated when the engaging cam 1016 rotates. , The first fraud prevention member 1023 swings about the swing shaft hole 1025 (clockwise rotation in FIG. 79B).

  Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is provided with a stopper piece 1027 protruding on the outline line obliquely below the protruding piece insertion hole 1026, and a restricting protruding piece 1031 protruding below the stopper piece 1027. A pin hole 1029 and a connecting hole 1030 are formed vertically on the front portion of the restricting protrusion 1031. The stopper piece 1027 enters and engages with the tamper-proof notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 when the body frame sliding rod 1050 is locked. This is to prevent unauthorized sliding. Further, in the restricting protruding piece 1031, the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 are connected by a spring 1035, and the second tamper-proof member 1032 is biased when connected by the spring 1035. The movement to is restricted. The pin hole 1029 is for fixing the guide pin 1028. With the guide pin 1028 fixed to the pin hole 1029 from the back side of the first fraud prevention member 1023, the guide pin 1028 is inserted into the insertion vertical opening 1020. The first fraud prevention member 1023 is guided along the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base body 1001 by engaging with a horizontally long opening formed at the lowermost end of the U-shaped body. Further, the connection hole 1030 is for connecting the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 with a connection pin 1034.

  The second tamper-proof member 1032 connected to the first tamper-proof member 1023 is formed of a reverse “te” -shaped plate material, a connection hole 1033 is formed at an upper end, and a spring engagement is formed at the other upper end. A stop hole 1036 is formed, and a contact portion 1037 is provided at the lower end. The connection hole 1033 is for connecting with the connection pin 1034 so as to coincide with the connection hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023, and one end of the spring locking hole 1036 is a spring locking piece of the U-shaped base body 1001. The other end of the spring 1035 locked to 1021 is locked. Further, the abutting portion 1037 abuts on a closing projection 41 fixed to the inner lower portion of the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 3 is closed. The operation of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 will be described in detail later.

  Next, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 which are slidably provided inside the U-shaped base body 1001 will be described. First, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed of a vertically long metal plate-like member, and the door frame hook portions 1041 are integrally formed forward and downward at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of the one side. Projected. The door frame hook portion 1041 protrudes forward from the open side when housed in the U-shaped base body 1001, and when the lock device 1000 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame 3, 3 protrudes forward from a door hook hole 549 (see FIGS. 31 and 32) formed on the door 3 and engages with a hook cover 227 (see FIG. 15) formed on the back surface of the door frame 5. Since the door frame hook portion 1041 has a downward engaging claw shape, the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover 227 are locked with each other by raising the door frame sliding rod 1040. It can be canceled.

  In addition, a vertically long rivet hole 1042 through which the rivet 1006 is inserted is formed at the center of the upper, middle, and lower side surfaces of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and the uppermost rivet for the rivet long hole 1042 is formed. A guide projection 1043 is provided below the elongated hole 1042 and at the lowermost end of the door frame sliding rod 1040. The rivet long hole 1042 is a hole through which the rivet 1006 inserted into the insertion hole 1005 of the U-shaped base body 1001 passes, and the rivet 1006 does not interfere with the ascending operation of the door frame sliding rod 1040. It is formed vertically. In the normal state, the rivet 1006 is in contact with the upper end portion of the rivet slot 1042. The guide projection 1043 is inserted into the protruding piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted. And the sliding motion 1050 for the main body frame are guided.

  Further, a spring hook portion 1046 is formed at the upper end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040, one end of the spring 1048 is locked to the spring hook portion 1046, and the other end of the spring 1048 is the main body frame sliding rod 1050. The upper hook member 1051 is engaged with a spring hook portion 1057. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is biased downward, and the body frame sliding rod 1050 is biased upward. In the middle of the door frame sliding rod 1040, a contact elastic piece 1047 is formed in a convex shape. This abutting elastic piece 1047 is formed by pressing from one side surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 with a press, and is in contact with the inner side surface of the U-shaped base body 1001 so as to be internally used for the door frame. This prevents the sliding rod 1040 from rattling.

  Further, a vertically long play hole 1044 and a rising engagement hole 1045 are formed in the side surface of the lower portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the play hole 1044 moves the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 so as not to obstruct the rotation operation. It constitutes a space. Further, when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the rising engagement hole 1045 is engaged so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 is raised by the rotation operation. Is to do. A clearance notch 1049 that is a larger notch in the vertical direction than the fraud prevention notch 1007 is formed at the rear of the lower part of the vertical side of the door frame sliding rod 1040. The escape notch 1049 is formed so as not to interfere with the stopper piece 1027 of the first tamper-proof member 1023 so as to be surely engaged with the tamper-proof notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066.

  On the other hand, the body frame sliding rod 1050 includes an upper hook member 1051 made of a metal plate, a lower hook member 1052 made of a metal plate, a connecting wire rod 1052 connecting the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, It is composed of That is, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is not composed of a single vertically long metal plate as in the prior art, but the upper hook member 1051 having the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the lower hook member 1052 are made of metal. A plate member made of metal is formed by pressing, and the metal upper hook member 1051 and lower hook member 1052 are connected by a thin metal connecting wire rod 1053. Therefore, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be efficiently stored in the narrow space of the U-shaped base 1001.

  By the way, the upper hook member 1051 is provided with a hook portion 1054 projecting rearward from the upper end portion thereof, and a rivet long hole 1055 and a projecting piece moving hole 1056 are formed on the plate surface portion. A spring hook portion 1057 and a connecting hole 1058 are formed at the lower end of the vertical side, and contact portions 1059 are formed at the upper and lower sides thereof. The hook portion 1054 penetrates the hook penetration opening 1002 above the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with a closing projection 38 provided on the inner side on the open side of the outer frame 2. Is formed.

  The rivet slot 1055 corresponds to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the upper part of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and in a normal state in which the rivet 1006 is penetrated through the rivet slot 1055. The rivet 1006 penetrates the lowermost end portion of the rivet slot 1055. Thereby, the upper hook member 1051 can move downward. As described above, the guide piece 1043 above the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the protruding piece moving hole 1056 so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 move relative to each other. Is to guide you. The spring hook portion 1057 is for locking the other end of the spring 1048 as described above. The connecting hole 1058 is inserted by bending the upper end of the connecting wire rod 1053. Further, when the abutting portion 1059 is housed in the U-shaped base 1001, the abutting portion 1059 comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001, and the upper hook member 1051 is smoothly moved without rattling. It is for doing so.

  On the other hand, the lower hook member 1052 is provided with a hook portion 1065 protruding rearward at the lower end portion thereof, and protrudes from the upper portion to the lower portion of the plate surface portion with the elongated rivet hole 1061, the lower engagement hole 1062, and the play hole 1063. One moving hole 1064 is sequentially formed, a connecting hole 1060 is formed at the upper end of the front vertical side, an engagement notch 1066 is formed at the lower part of the rear vertical side, and the upper and lower sides are contacted. A contact portion 1067 is formed. The hook portion 1065 penetrates the hook penetration opening 1002 below the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with a closing protrusion 41 provided on the lower part on the open side of the outer frame 2. Is formed. The rivet slot 1061 corresponds to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the lower portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. In a normal state where the rivet 1006 is penetrated through the rivet slot 1061, The rivet 1006 is in a state of penetrating the lowermost end portion of the rivet long hole 1061.

  As a result, the lower hook member 1052 can move downward. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the lowering engagement hole 1062 is engaged so that the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered by the rotation operation. belongs to. Further, the play hole 1063 has a tip portion of the second engagement protrusion 1018 that does not interfere with the rotation operation when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. It constitutes a space that can move. As described above, the guide piece 1043 below the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the projecting piece moving hole 1064 so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 move relative to each other. Is to guide you. Further, the connecting hole 1060 is inserted by bending the lower end of the connecting wire rod 1053. Further, when the abutting portion 1067 is housed in the U-shaped base 1001, the abutting portion 1067 comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 so that the sliding operation of the lower hook member 1052 can be smoothly performed without rattling. It is for making.

  The members constituting the locking device 1000 have been described above. To attach the locking device 1000, the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are connected by the connecting wire rod 1053. In this state, the guide protrusion 1043 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the protrusion moving holes 1056 and 1064 of the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and the rivet long hole 1042 and the rivet length The holes 1055 and 1061 are aligned and overlapped, and in the overlapped state, the hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 and the hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 are passed through the hook penetration opening 1002 of the U-shaped base body 1001. However, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are placed in the U-shaped space of the U-shaped base body 1001. You type. Thereafter, the rivet 1006 is inserted from the insertion hole 1005.

  At this time, the rivet 1006 is inserted so as to pass through the rivet slots 1055, 1061, 1042. However, when the lowermost rivet 1006 is inserted, it is necessary to insert the rivet 1006 also into the swing shaft hole 1025 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and attach the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base body 1001 at the same time. Before attaching the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by the connection pin 1034 and the guide pin 1028 is illustrated in the pin hole 1029. The guide pin 1028 needs to be inserted into the lowermost opening of the insertion vertical opening 1020.

  Furthermore, with the rivet 1006, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are housed and fixed in the U-shaped base 1001, and the spring 1048 is spanned between the spring hook portions 1046 and 1057, The frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are biased in opposite directions, and further, the spring 1035 is stretched over the spring locking pieces (holes) 1021 and 1036, and the second fraud prevention member 1032. Is in contact with the restricting protrusion 1031. Thereafter, the cylindrical main body portion of the cylinder lock 1010 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 of the lock attachment piece 1008, and the cylinder lock 1010 is fixed to the attachment hole 1014 with the screw 1012. At this time, the tip end portion of the first engagement projection piece 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is slightly inserted outside the inclined portion 1024 and into the insertion vertical opening 1020, and the second engagement projection piece 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted. The cylinder lock 1010 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 so that the tip portion is slightly inserted into the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the first fraud prevention member 1023.

  In order to attach the lock device 1000 assembled as described above to the back surface of the main body frame 3, as described above, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed on the main body frame 3. While being inserted into the hook hole 549, the locking projection 1004 protruding in a hook shape is inserted into the locking locking hole 548 of the main body frame 3 and moved upward, and in this state the screw fixing portion 1003 and screw fixing protruding horizontally By aligning the portion 1003 with the lock mounting hole 547 and screwing a screw (not shown) into the matched hole, the locking device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame 3 as shown in FIG. . In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking projection 1004 constituting the locking structure of the front portion is formed to protrude from the side surface 1001a that does not adhere to the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped base body 1001, while the rear portion Since the screw fixing part 1003 and the screw fixing part 1003 constituting the fixing structure of the U-shaped base 1001 are formed so as to protrude in the horizontal direction from the side surface 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped base body 1001, Compared to the case where the locking structure is formed on the side surface 1001b that is in close contact with the first side wall 540, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so that the backlash does not occur.

  By the way, the operation of the lock device 1000 attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 and 79. First, the opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3 and the opening / closing operation of the door frame 5 will be described with reference to FIG. In a state where the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. The hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are locked, and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the hook cover 227 of the door frame 5 are locked. Yes. In this state, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated in a direction to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. 78 (B). The tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 engages with the lower engagement hole 1062 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 to push the lower hook member 1052 downward against the urging force of the spring 1048. The connecting wire rod 1053 and the upper hook member 1051 which are connected are also pushed down and lowered. For this reason, since the locking projections 38 and 41 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are released, the main body frame 3 is pulled by pulling the main body frame 3 to the front side. 3 can be opened to the outer frame 2.

  When the main body frame 3 is closed, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 are lifted by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lifted position as in the state shown in FIG. 78A). , 1065 is inclined downward toward the outer side, so that the upper side inclined portion of the hook portions 1054, 1065 is forced into the closing projections 38, 41 by forcibly pressing the main body frame 3 against the outer frame 2. Since the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered downward, the upward claw portions of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing projections 38 and 41 are locked again. The body frame sliding rod 1050 rises and returns to the locked state.

  On the other hand, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated in a direction to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The front end of the two engaging protrusions 1018 engages with the ascending engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and pushes the door frame sliding rod 1040 upwardly against the urging force of the spring 1048. For this reason, the hooked state of the hook cover 227 of the door frame 5 and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is released, so that the door frame 5 is pulled by pulling the door frame 5 to the front side. The main frame 3 can be opened.

  When the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame hook portion 1041 is lowered by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lowered position as the state shown in FIG. 78A). Since the lower side of the hook portion 1041 for the slope is inclined upward toward the outside, the lower side slope portion of the door frame hook portion 1041 is hooked to the hook cover 227 by forcibly pressing the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3. The door frame sliding rod 1040 rises upward, and finally the downward claw portion of the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover 227 are locked again. The sliding rod 1040 moves down and returns to the locked state. The door frame sliding rod 1040 according to the present embodiment is formed to have substantially the same length as the entire length of the U-shaped base 1001, and the U-shaped base 1001 is substantially the side surface in the vertical direction of the main body frame 3. The door frame hook portion 1041 that is attached over the entire length and that is a locking portion with the door frame 5 is formed at three locations of the upper end portion, the center portion, and the lower end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. For this reason, the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are securely locked in the entire length in the vertical direction, and an illegal act of forcibly opening the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 and inserting a fraudulent tool such as a piano wire from there is performed. There is also the advantage that it cannot be done.

  As described above, the lock device 1000 according to this embodiment releases the lock of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 in one direction, and rotates in the other direction. By doing so, locking of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 can be cancelled | released. In this case, an illegal act of hooking a piano wire or the like on the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 without inserting the key into the cylinder lock 1010 and lowering it may be performed. Are not allowed to perform such cheating. The first structure for preventing such fraud is a lock mechanism composed of a first fraud prevention member 1023 and a second fraud prevention member 1032, and the second fraud prevention structure is a U-shaped base 1001. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are accommodated in the closed space.

  First, the operation of the lock mechanism, which is the first fraud prevention structure, will be described with reference to FIG. First, in the state where the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. It is in a contact state. In this state, the first tamper-proof member 1023 is rotated counterclockwise by the biasing force of the spring 1035 so that the stopper piece 1027 enters the tamper-proof notch 1007 and the stopper piece 1027 is tamper-proof notch. The main body frame sliding rod 1050 at a position corresponding to 1007 is engaged with an engagement notch 1066 formed on the lower hook member 1052. Therefore, even if the piano wire or the like is hooked onto the main body frame sliding rod 1050 and pulled down, the stopper piece portion 1027 and the engagement notch portion 1066 are engaged. Unauthorized pulling down (unlocking) becomes impossible, and an illegal act of opening the main body frame 3 cannot be performed.

  On the other hand, when the main body frame 3 is normally unlocked by inserting the key into the cylinder lock 1010, the first engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated by rotating the key as shown in FIG. The piece 1017 is rotated so as to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 is rotated, the inclined portion 1024 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the side surface of the first engagement protrusion 1017 come into contact with each other. The stopper piece 1027 starts to rotate around the angle 1025 in the clockwise direction shown in the figure, and the stopper piece 1027 also moves away from the tamper-proof cutout 1007. For this reason, the engagement between the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement notch 1066 is released. At this time, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in a position where the spring 1035 is extended and the contact portion 1037 is retracted. When the engagement cam 1016 is further rotated in this state and the first engagement protrusion 1017 is also rotated, the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 is engaged with the lower engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052. Since the entire body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered, the locking state between the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing projections 38 and 41 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main body frame 3 is attached to the outer frame 2. Can be opened.

  Note that when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in contact with the restriction protrusion 1031, and thus the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member The positional relationship with 1032 is substantially the same as the state shown in FIG. When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing protrusion 41 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 contact from the front, and finally the state shown in FIG. 79 (A) is obtained. . For this reason, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 do not get in the way when the main body frame 3 is closed. In the present embodiment, the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 prevent only the lowering operation of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 from being illegally performed. If the frame sliding rod 1050 is opened improperly, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be easily opened manually after being released, and the illegal act of raising the sliding rod with a piano wire or the like is practically difficult to perform. For this reason, it has been devised to prevent unauthorized operation of the body frame sliding rod 1050.

  Further, even in the lock mechanism that is the above-described first fraud prevention structure, it is impossible to disable the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first fraud prevention member 1023 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, assuming that the lock function of the lock mechanism is disabled by an unauthorized action, in the present embodiment, in the state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3, the door frame provided inside is used. Since the sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are housed in the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065, they are completely covered. Even if an attempt is made to pull down the body frame sliding rod 1050 provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 by inserting a piano wire or the like, the both sides 1001a and 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 close the closed space of the unauthorized tool. Since the intrusion is prevented, fraudulent acts cannot be easily performed.

  As described above in detail, the lock device 1000 according to the present embodiment has an extremely thin U-shaped base 1001 for a door frame, compared with a lock device whose lateral width is concentrated on a conventional L-shaped base. The sliding hook 1040 and the main body frame sliding hook 1050 are slidably provided, and the mounting position of the cylinder lock 1010 for operating the locking device 1000 to the U-shaped base 1001 is lower than the lower end side of the game board. Therefore, even if the size of the game board 4 in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction is extremely large and the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the main body frame 3 is increased, the lock device 1000 can be 3 can be firmly attached to the back side. And since it is attached so that the open side of the U-shaped cross section faces the back surface of the main body frame 3, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3, the door frame sliding rod 1040 provided inside and the main body Since the frame sliding rod 1050 is completely covered with the U-shaped base body 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065, a main body provided inside by inserting a piano wire or the like. Unauthorized acts such as lowering the frame sliding rod 1050 cannot be easily performed.

  Further, when the locking device 1000 is attached, the locking protrusions 1004 formed at the upper, middle, and lower three positions on the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the locking holes 548 to be positioned and locked. Since the screw fixing portions 1003 and the screw fixing portions 1003 formed at the upper, middle, and lower portions of the closed side (rear portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are fixed to the lock mounting holes 547 with screws, the locking device 1000 The front portion of the lock device is locked by the locking protrusion 1004 and the lock locking hole 548, and the rear portion of the locking device 1000 is fixed by the screw fixing portion 1003 and the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547, so that the structure is extremely simple. The locking device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3.

  In the embodiment described above, the screw fixing portion 1003 formed in the lock mounting piece 1008 and the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 526 of the main body frame 3 are formed as a structure for screwing the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001. However, instead of this, a screw 1012 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010 to the lock attachment piece 1008 is used, and the tip of the screw 1012 penetrates the lock attachment piece 1008. Alternatively, a structure may be employed in which the lock mounting holes to be screwed are formed above and below the cylinder lock through hole 526. Further, even if the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001 is not screwed, the locking device 1000 can be attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3 only by fixing the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547 at the rear portion of the locking device 1000. It is confirmed that it is firmly fixed.

  In the above-described embodiment, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are completely covered with the U-shaped base body 1001 having the left and right side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are slidably mounted on the opposite side surface 1001a not in close contact with the first side wall 540 with a rivet or the like, and the side surface 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540 The L-shaped base (lock base) is omitted, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame are formed in a closed space formed by the side surface 1001a and the first side wall 540 of the L-shaped base (lock base). It is good also as a structure which accommodates the sliding rod 1050. FIG. Even in this case, the same mounting structure and tamper-proof structure as in the embodiment can be obtained.

<Board unit>
Next, the board unit 1100 that is attached to the lower part of the back surface of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 80 is a perspective view of the substrate unit 1100 as seen from the back side, and FIG. 81 is a perspective view of the substrate unit 1100 as seen from the front side.

  The substrate unit 1100 is attached to a plurality of holder mounting holes 527 (see FIGS. 32 and 34) formed in the lower part of the back surface of the main body frame 3, and as shown in FIG. The board holder 1101 is configured by attaching various boards such as a door relay board, a power board box 1103, a terminal board box 1104, a payout control board box 1105, a main drawer relay board, and a sub drawer relay board. Among the above boards, the door relay board, the power board box 1103, the terminal board box 1104, and the payout control board box 1105 are attached to the rear side of the frame board holder 1101 in the front-rear direction, and are attached to the main drawer relay board. The auxiliary drawer relay board is attached to the front side of the frame board holder 1101. A shield plate is attached to the back surface of the payout control board box 1105 to prevent the influence of electromagnetic waves from a power supply board or the like, and the main drawer relay board and the sub drawer relay board are covered with a board cover 1109. Attached.

  First, the frame substrate holder 1101 is formed of a synthetic resin in a horizontally long shape, and as shown in the drawing, a wiring opening 1124 is formed on one side of the rear surface side. A recess for a relay board for attaching the door relay board to the door is formed. At both the left and right sides and the lower side of the frame substrate holder 1101, attachment pieces 1122 for attaching the substrate unit 1100 to the main body frame 3 are projected outward, and the attachment pieces 1122 are attached to the attachment hole portions of the main body frame 3. The board unit 1100 is attached to the lower part of the back surface of the main body frame 3 by fastening with screws (not shown) corresponding to 527 (see FIG. 32). As shown in FIG. 34, the mounting hole 527 is formed with an outer peripheral wall that matches the outer shape of the mounting piece 1122. Further, a wiring latching piece 1123 for locking the wiring is formed on the outside of the side wall on the other end side (right side in FIG. 81) of the frame substrate holder 1101.

  Further, an out-sphere passage 1119 is formed in an inverted L shape substantially at the center of the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101. The out ball passage 1119 is formed broadly on the upper side so as to correspond to the above-described out port 606 (see FIG. 41), the downstream side of the ball discharge passage 524 (see FIG. 32), and the drop port 629 (see FIG. 39). In addition, the downstream side is formed narrow so that the spheres are discharged in a row. Therefore, when the board unit 1100 is attached to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. ing. Then, an out ball, a winning ball, or a ball without ball is discharged from the downstream end of the out ball passage 1119 toward the outside of the pachinko machine (generally, an island recovery basket).

  The board cover 1109 includes a main drawer relay connector 1200 and a payout control board connector 1201 provided on the main drawer relay board, and a sub drawer relay connector 1202 and a door frame connector 1203 provided on the sub drawer relay board. A rectangular connector opening for projecting outward is formed.

  The payout control board box 1105 includes a box main body to which a horizontally long rectangular payout control board is fixed, and a cover body that is attached to the box main body and covers the surface of the payout control board. One side of the box main body and the cover body are engaged, and the other side is caulked and fixed by a separation cutting portion 1183. Thus, in order to separate the box main body and the cover body, the separation cannot be performed unless the separation cutting portion 1183 is cut. However, caulking and fixing in the separation / cutting portion 1183 may be performed by caulking any one of a plurality of locations (in the illustrated case, four locations indicated by numerals 1 to 4) with a caulking member. If necessary, it can be done up to 3 times. Of course, in the case of illegal separation, a cut trace remains, so that it is possible to immediately know whether there has been an illegal act.

<Cover body>
Next, the cover body 1250 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6, 34 and 38. The cover body 1250 covers the rear surface opening 580 of the main body frame 3, and is inserted from above into a cover body supporting cylinder portion 575 formed on one side of the back surface of the main body frame 3 at one of the upper, middle, and lower sides on one side. A shaft support pin 1251 is formed, and an engagement piece 1252 that engages with a cover body engagement groove 785 formed in the spherical passage unit 770 is formed at substantially the center of the other side. Thus, by inserting the shaft support pin 1251 of the cover body 1250 into the cover body support cylinder portion 575, the cover body 1250 is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 so as to be freely opened and closed, and the engagement piece 1252 is inserted into the cover body engagement groove 785. By locking, the cover body 1250 can be closed to the main body frame 3, and the back of various components provided on the game board 4 can be protected. In the case of releasing, the engagement between the engagement piece 1252 and the cover body engagement groove 785 may be released.

  Further, in the cover body 1250 in the illustrated case, a locking hole 1253 is formed on the upper and lower sides of the engagement piece 1252 on the open side, and a locking protruding hook piece 570 protruding from the locking wall 569 of the main body frame 3 is provided. A through hole 1254 to be penetrated is formed, and although not shown in detail, a connection operation opening 1255, a standing wall, an abutting protrusion, and a reinforcing rib are formed in the same manner as a cover body 1270 according to a second embodiment described below. Has been. The connection operation opening 1255, the standing wall, the contact protrusion, and the reinforcing rib are provided at the same position as the connection operation opening 1283, the standing wall 1284, the contact protrusion 1285, and the reinforcing rib 1286 of the cover body 1270 according to the second embodiment. Have the same function. Then, in a state where the cover body 1250 is closed, the stop hole 1253 of the cover body 1250 and the stop hole 568 on the main body frame 3 side are matched and fixed with a screw (not shown), whereby the cover body 1250 is attached to the main body frame 3. The rear opening 580 can be closed and fixed. Since the locking protrusion 570 passes through the through hole 1254 of the cover body 1250 with the cover body 1250 closed with respect to the main body frame 3, for example, a lock such as a padlock is locked. The cover body 1250 can be opened only by the person in charge having the padlock key.

[Game device and effect device]
Next, a gaming device and a rendering device arranged on the gaming board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 is a front view of the game board 4 having the game area 605, FIG. 83 is a perspective view of the game board 4 having the game area 605, as seen from the front upper right, and FIG. 84 has the game area 605. FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board 4 as viewed from the front upper left, and FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board 4 having the game area 605 as seen from the oblique front.

  The game panel 599 forming the game area 605 is provided with an opening 1400 (see FIG. 85) at the center, and a frame-shaped center accessory 1401 is attached so as to surround the opening 1400. That is, a game area 605 is defined on the surface of the game panel 599 by the center combination 1401, and a number of obstacle nails (not shown) are provided in a predetermined gauge arrangement in the game area 605. In addition, a entrance unit 1402 into which a game ball rolling in the game area 605 can enter is disposed. Although details will be described later, an open / close prize device 1404 and a passing gate 1405 are formed on the outer peripheral surface (particularly, the right side edge) of the center accessory 1401 facing the game area 605.

  A specific configuration of the center accessory 1401 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 86A is a perspective view of the center accessory 1401 as seen from the front upper right, and FIG. 86B is a perspective view of the center accessory 1401 as seen from the upper left. The center accessory 1401 is formed of a mirror-finished member, and a warp inlet 1408 that opens to the outside of the center accessory 1401 and an opening to the inside of the center accessory 1401 are formed on the left side edge of the center accessory 1401. And a warp passage (not shown) that connects the warp inlet 1408 and the warp outlet 1409 is formed.

  Further, a sub-stage 1407 is formed on the upper surface of the lower edge portion of the center accessory 1401. The sub-stage 1407 is capable of rolling a game ball that deviates from a stage 1443, which will be described later, in the left-right direction. In the central portion of the substage 1407, an outflow portion 1407a having a forward descending slope for allowing the game ball, which has become weaker to flow out, to the front is formed. A communicating outflow passage 1416 is formed in the front-rear direction. In addition, front wall portions 1415 are formed on the left and right side portions of the front edge of the substage 1407 to prevent the game ball from deviating from the front wall portions 1415. That is, the game ball discharged from the stage 1443 is received and rolled in the left-right direction.

  In addition, a plurality of colorful decorative portions 1412 are formed on the front surface of the center accessory 1401 to enhance the design of the center accessory 1401. In addition, a plurality of light emitting portions 1413 are embedded in the decoration portion 1412 so that light is emitted based on the gaming state.

  The open / close winning device 1404 is arranged at the lower right side edge portion of the center accessory 1401, and includes a large winning opening (not shown) that opens to the outside of the center winning component 1401 and a game ball that has won the large winning opening. The prize winning hole sensor 2370 (see FIG. 100) for detecting the position and the streamline shape extending in the vertical direction capable of closing the prize winning opening is pivotally supported on the lower side, and can be rotated clockwise from the upright state. Movable piece 1430, attacker solenoid 1429 having a plunger that can be moved back and forth in the up-and-down direction, and a transmission member that rotates around the axis extending in the front-rear direction as the plunger moves forward and backward in the attacker solenoid 1429 (Not shown). Note that the game ball that enters from the big prize opening and is detected by the big prize opening sensor 2370 is discharged as it is below the opening / closing prize winning device 1404, but one of the game balls is a stop that will be described later. The vehicle is stopped by means 1515.

  The passage gate 1405 includes a gate inlet 1432 and a gate outlet 1433 that are open to the outside of the center accessory 1401, a gate passage (not shown) that communicates these, and a gate sensor 2990 that detects a game ball that passes through the gate passage (see FIG. 100).

  A specific configuration of the entrance unit 1402 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 87 is a perspective view of the entrance unit 1402 viewed from the front upper right. The entrance unit 1402 includes a plurality of general winning ports 1419 through which game balls can enter, a first start port 1420 disposed below the outlet 1416 of the center accessory 1401, and a right side of the first start port 1420. And a second start port 1421 disposed at the same position. More specifically, the general winning opening 1419 is divided into a right side, a central side, and a left side of the game area 605, and a first start is made between the general winning opening 1419 on the left side and the general winning opening 1419 on the central side. A mouth 1420 is disposed, and a second start port 1421 is disposed between the general winning port 1419 on the center side and the general winning port 1419 on the right side. Note that the arrangement position with respect to the center accessory 1401 is such that the first start port 1420 is slightly to the left of directly below the center accessory 1401 and the second start port 1421 is to the lower right of the center accessory 1401. That is, the first start port 1420 is arranged on the left side of the center of the game area 605, and the second start port 1421, the above-described opening / closing prize winning device 1404 and the passing gate 1405 are arranged on the right side of the game area 605. .

  The first start opening 1420 is a pocket type winning opening device that allows a game ball to always win, and includes a first start opening sensor 2416 (see FIG. 100) that detects a winning game ball. Here, the first start port 1420 corresponds to the start port of the present invention, and the first start port sensor 2416 corresponds to the winning state detecting means of the present invention.

  On the other hand, the second start port 1421 is configured to be openable and closable by a pair of movable pieces 1427. That is, the second start port 1421 further includes a start port opening / closing drive unit (not shown) that drives the pair of movable pieces 1427 to open and close, and this start port opening / closing drive unit has a plunger that can be moved forward and backward. The starting port solenoid 2352 and a projecting pin that rotates about the axis extending in the horizontal direction and the left and right direction as the plunger moves forward and backward in the starting port solenoid 2352 and extends rearward from the pair of movable pieces 1427 And a transmission member (not shown) that is movable in the vertical direction. In addition, a second start port sensor 2358 (see FIG. 100) is provided below the start port solenoid 2352, and a game ball won in the second start port 1421 passes through the through hole of the second start port sensor 2358. The second starting port sensor 2358 is detected by passing. The movable piece 1427 is opened for a predetermined time when it is detected that a game ball has passed through the passing gate 1405, and a normal lottery is performed based on the detected result. That is, the second start port 1421 is opened only when a winning is made in the normal lottery, and a game ball can be won. Here, the second start port 1421 corresponds to the start port of the present invention, and the second start port sensor 2358 corresponds to the winning state detecting means of the present invention.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1, when a game ball is fired from the ball hitting device 650 corresponding to the sliding operation of the sliding operation unit 1703 in the operation unit 1700, the game ball is moved by the inner rail 603 and the outer rail 604. Guided to the upper left part of the game area 605 and released from the part into the game area 605. Since the first start port 1420 is arranged at a position slightly to the left of the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction in the game area 605, as a normal gaming method, many game balls are placed in the first start port 1420. It is preferable to launch a game ball aiming at the left side of the center actor 1401 so as to win a prize. This is because the second starting port 1421 and the passing gate 1405 are arranged on the right side or lower right side of the center combination 1401 in the game area 605, but the second starting port 1421 is opened as long as it is not hit in the normal lottery. Even if the game ball can be passed through the passing gate 1405 that triggers the normal lottery, the probability that the second start port 1421 is difficult to open in normal times, that is, the probability of winning in the normal lottery Is set to be extremely low. That is, even if the game ball is launched aiming at the right side of the center accessory 1401 (so-called “right hit”), it is not possible to expect a big hit.

  On the other hand, when a big hit lottery is performed based on the winning of a game ball to the first start port 1420 and the lottery result is a specific result, a specific profit is given. Specifically, the opening / closing operation of the open / close winning device 1404 is repeated a plurality of times, and the opening time per time in the open state is set to a time that allows a plurality of game balls to win with a margin. Here, since the open / close winning device 1404 is arranged on the right side of the center bonus 1401 in the game area 605, it is preferable that the open / win winning device 1404 be hit to the right so that many game balls are won. In addition, after the specific profit is given, the probability of the normal start lottery wins and the second start port 1421 is opened increases. That is, it is possible to easily win a game ball with respect to the second start port 1421. For this reason, it is preferable that the player continues to make a right turn so as to win a lot of game balls in the passing gate 1405 and the second start port 1421.

  As described above, it is preferable to operate the sliding operation unit 1703 to change the way of hitting the game ball between the normal time and the specific game state, and the original interest of the pachinko machine can be improved. . In addition, since the game is performed in different regions and under different conditions in the normal time and in the specific game state, the monotony of the game content can be suppressed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 82, between the first start port 1420 and the second start port 1421, the game region 605 above the second start port 1421 is changed to the game region 605 above the first start port 1420. An obstruction nail 1426 is provided to prevent the game ball from flowing. Therefore, for example, when a game ball is hit to the right, it is possible to prevent a game ball that has not won the second start port 1421 from flowing down toward the first start port 1420, and a game area 605 that is normally used and a specific area It is possible to clearly distinguish the game area 605 used in the gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 87, a passage blocking member 1424 for preventing the game ball from rolling through the region below the second starting port 1421 extends downward from the second starting port 1421. Further, on the left side of the passage blocking member 1424, a right out port 1425 is provided that allows a game ball that has flowed down through the right side of the center accessory 1401 to be discharged from the game area 605. Therefore, the game ball that has flowed down through the left side of the center accessory 1401 is discharged from the out port 606 (see FIG. 82) disposed on the left side of the passage blocking member 1424, while passing through the right side of the center accessory 1401. The game ball that has flowed down is discharged from the right-out port 1425. In other words, the game balls that have flowed down without winning the respective start ports 1420 and 1421 and the open / close winning device 1404 are discharged from the game area 605, but game balls that have been driven into the left and right sides of the center accessory 1401. Are discharged from separate out ports 606 and 1425 without joining to the end. For this reason, it can be made to feel as if the area on the right side and the area on the left side of the center combination 1401 are partitioned, and it is possible to easily recognize that it is necessary to switch how to hit the game ball.

  Further, a special symbol display 1428 for displaying a special symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the big hit lottery is attached to the passage preventing member 1424. For this reason, the lottery result for the second start port 1421 can be easily recognized, and attention to the second start port 1421 can be further attracted.

<Frame decoration unit>
Next, the frame-shaped decoration unit 1440 arranged inside the winning space forming cover body 1621 will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 90. 88 is a front view of a winning space forming cover body 1621 having a frame-shaped decorative unit 1440, and FIG. 89 is a perspective view of the winning space forming cover body 1621 having a frame-shaped decorative unit 1440 as viewed from the front upper right. 90 is a perspective view showing the relationship between the stage 1443 and the distribution effect device 1444 provided in the frame-shaped decoration unit 1440. FIG.

  As described above, the winning space forming cover body 1621 is attached to the back side of the game panel 599 (see FIG. 85). Then, a frame-shaped decorative unit 1440 configured in a frame shape is accommodated inside the winning space forming cover body 1621, and from the player side through the opening 1401a of the center accessory 1401, as shown in FIG. It is possible to make it visible. That is, as shown in FIG. 85, the size of the opening in the frame-shaped decorative unit 1440 is smaller than the opening 1401a of the center accessory 1401, and the inner peripheral surface of the frame-shaped decorative unit 1440 is the center accessory. 1401 extends from the inner peripheral surface toward the center. The frame-shaped decorative unit 1440 is provided with a decorative portion 1441 integrally formed over the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface of the inner peripheral surface, and an electric decoration portion 1442 arranged on the decorative portion 1441 and capable of emitting light. ing. The lighting unit 1442 accommodates four light emitting cases each having the letters “L”, “O”, “V”, and “E”, each having a transparent lid on the front, and the light emitting cases. The light emitting substrates 2892a to 2892c (see FIG. 101) that emit light toward the transparent lid, and interposed between the light emitting substrates 2892a to 2892c and the transparent lid, diffusely reflect the light emitted from the light emitting substrates 2892a to 2892c. And a reflecting member (not shown).

  Further, the bottom surface portion (that is, the upper surface of the lower edge portion) on the inner peripheral surface of the frame-shaped decorative unit 1440 is formed so as to extend rearward from the substage 1407 of the center accessory 1401, and is formed on the upper surface of the lower edge portion. As shown in FIG. 90, a stage 1443 and a distribution effect device 1444 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and a guide passage member 1445 for feeding game balls to the distribution effect device 1444 is further disposed.

<Stage structure>
First, the stage 1443 will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 is a perspective view of the stage 1443 as viewed from the front upper right, FIG. 92 is a plan view of the stage 1443, FIG. 93 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 92, and FIG. 95 is a sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. 92, FIG. 96 is a sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. 92, and FIG. 97 is a sectional view taken along the line EE in FIG. FIG.

  The stage 1443 is arranged on the left side of the upper surface of the lower edge of the frame-shaped decoration unit 1440, and the game ball that has entered the frame-shaped decoration unit 1440 through the warp passage formed in the center accessory 1401 is placed on the stage 1443. It has a rolling surface that rolls in the left-right direction or diagonal left-right direction. In particular, the stage 1443 has n (five in this example) rolling surfaces arranged in a stepwise manner in the front-rear direction so that the rear stage side is higher than the front stage side, and the frame passes through the warp passage. The game balls that have entered the decorative unit 1440 can be caused to flow while rolling in order from the first rolling surface 1450 at the uppermost stage toward the fifth rolling surface 1454 at the lowermost stage. That is, the game ball that enters the frame-shaped decoration unit 1440 is first sent to the uppermost first rolling surface 1450 and rolls on the first rolling surface 1450 in the left-right direction or the diagonal left-right direction. Thereafter, the game balls flow down while rolling in order toward the fifth rolling surface 1454 at the lowest stage, such as the second rolling surface 1451 at the second stage, and the third rolling surface 1452 at the third stage. To do. In addition, the game ball that has rolled to the lowermost fifth rolling surface 1454 flows out of the stage 1443 and flows down toward the first start port 1420 disposed below the center accessory 1401. As described above, by providing a plurality of rolling surfaces formed in a staircase shape, the behavior of the game ball on the stage 1443 can be varied, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, each of the rolling surfaces 1450 to 1454 is set such that the length in the left-right direction becomes shorter as the lower rolling surface. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the behavior of the game ball on each rolling surface from becoming unnecessarily long. In addition, since each of the rolling surfaces 1450 to 1454 is gradually shortened, it is possible to gradually converge the rolling range of the game ball and feel that it is approaching a predetermined target arrival position (that is, the first start port 1420). It becomes possible to make it. Further, the rolling surfaces 1451 to 1454 other than the first rolling surface 1450 are arranged with the right end side close to the central portion (the distribution effect device 1444 side). For this reason, it differs from a conventional gaming machine (that is, a gaming machine in which a stage is arranged directly above the first starting port 1420) for a player who pays attention to whether or not a winning is made at the first starting port 1420. The stage 1443 can be visually recognized by the line of sight. In other words, not only the configuration of the stage 1443 but also the arrangement of the stage 1443 is unique and can be characterized as a gaming machine concept.

  As shown in FIGS. 91 and 93, the first rolling surface 1450 is a substantially arc-shaped first arc surface capable of reciprocating the game ball entered in the frame-shaped decoration unit 1440 in the left-right direction. 1460, the first arc of the first descending slope in which the weakened game ball flows out toward the second rolling surface 1452 of the second stage at the central portion of the first arc surface 1460 in the left-right direction. An outflow portion 1461 is formed. 92, at the left end portion of the first arc surface 1460, a guide passage 1449 extending forward and connecting the warp outlet 1409 of the center accessory 1401 and the first arc surface 1460 is a stage 1443. And is formed integrally. For this reason, the game ball is moved on the first rolling surface 1450 for a relatively long time by feeding a vigorous gaming ball to the left end portion of the first rolling surface 1450 through the warp passage and the guide passage 1449. As a result, it is possible to easily recognize that a game ball has entered the stage 1443. That is, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game ball reaches the lower rolling surface without being noticed by the player and the game ball is discharged without delighting the behavior of the game ball.

  As shown in FIGS. 91 and 94, the second rolling surface 1451 moves the game ball that has flowed out from the first outflow portion 1461 of the first rolling surface 1450 toward the left end side of the second rolling surface 1451. The second inclined surface 1462 to be rolled and the second outflow of the downward slope that causes the game ball rolled to the left end side by the second inclined surface 1462 to flow toward the third rolling surface 1452 at the third stage. A portion 1463 is formed. For this reason, the game ball sent to the second rolling surface 1451 does not reciprocate like the first rolling surface 1450, and rolls straight in the left direction and flows out as it is. Therefore, it is possible to cause a movement completely different from the behavior of the game ball on the first rolling surface 1450, and it is possible to further enhance the visual interest.

  Further, the second rolling surface 1451 rolls a game ball that has flowed out of the first outflow portion 1461 of the first rolling surface 1450 and deviated from the upstream end side of the second inclined surface 1462 on the second inclined surface 1462. A second special path 1464 is further provided to allow the flow from the portion located on the opposite side of the second outflow portion 1463 to the third rolling surface 1452 without being moved. That is, the second rolling surface 1451 is configured to allow the game ball sent from the first outflow portion 1461 of the first rolling surface 1450 to deviate from the upstream end side of the second inclined surface 1462, The game ball that has deviated from here bypasses the second inclined surface 1462 by passing through the second special path 1464, and proceeds from the portion located on the opposite side of the second outflow portion 1463 toward the third rolling surface 1452. Spilled. Therefore, the game balls are distributed on the second rolling surface 1451, and the behavior of the game balls can be further paid attention.

  As shown in FIGS. 91 and 95, the third rolling surface 1452 has a substantially arc shape that can reciprocate the game ball flowing out from the second outflow portion 1463 of the second rolling surface 1451 in the left-right direction. The third arcuate surface 1465 and the forward descending flow of the game ball, which is formed at the center portion of the third arcuate surface 1465 in the left-right direction and weakened, flows toward the fourth rolling surface 1453 of the fourth stage. A portion different from the third outflow portion 1466 without rolling the game ball that has flowed out through the second outflow portion 1466 of the gradient and the second special path 1464 of the second rolling surface 1451 on the third arc surface 1465. And a third special path 1467 for flowing out toward the fourth rolling surface 1453. Therefore, the game ball that has flowed out from the second outflow portion 1463 and sent to the third rolling surface 1452 is repeatedly rolled in the left-right direction by the substantially arc-shaped third arc surface 1465, and then the momentum is weakened. It flows out from the third outflow portion 1466 toward the fourth rolling surface 1453 of the fourth stage. Therefore, the game ball can be reciprocated again, and the change in the behavior of the game ball can be further varied. Further, the game ball that has flowed out through the second special path 1464 of the second rolling surface 1451 flows out from the second special path 1464 toward the fourth rolling surface 1453 without passing through the third arc surface 1465. Be made. In other words, the game balls distributed to the second special route 1464 side on the second rolling surface 1451 are sent to the fourth rolling surface 1453 without joining the game balls passing through the normal route. For this reason, the advantage of a special passage can be maintained and a player can be given a sense of security.

  The third rolling surface 1452 further includes a third discharge portion 1468 that is formed integrally with the third outflow portion 1466 and can discharge the game ball that has weakened momentum from the stage 1443. For this reason, since the game balls are distributed at the exit of the third rolling surface 1452, the whereabouts of the game balls can be focused to the end.

  As shown in FIGS. 91 and 96, the fourth rolling surface 1453 includes a game ball that has flowed out from the third outflow portion 1466 of the third rolling surface 1452 and a third special path 1467 of the third rolling surface 1452. And the game balls that have flowed out through the four arc surfaces 1469 in a substantially arc shape capable of reciprocating these game balls in the left-right direction, and the left-right direction in the fourth arc surface 1469 A fourth outflow portion 1470 having a forward and downward slope that causes the game ball formed at the center portion and having weakened momentum to flow out toward the fifth rolling surface 1454 of the fifth stage is integrated with the fourth outflow portion 1470. A fourth discharge portion 1471 that can discharge the formed game ball that has been weakened from the stage 1443 is provided. For this reason, it is possible to roll the game ball largely by the relatively large fourth arc surface 1469 without forming a special passage. Moreover, since what was once distributed in the 2nd rolling surface 1451 is merged in the 4th rolling surface 1453, expectation about the future whereabouts also about the game ball which was not distributed to the 2nd special path 1464 Can be generated.

  By the way, if the game balls once distributed are simply joined, the advantage of the game balls distributed to the second special path 1464 is lost, and the distribution itself becomes meaningless. Therefore, in the present example, the fourth outflow portion 1470 and the fourth discharge portion 1471 are configured such that the game balls that have flowed out through the third special path 1467 are more out of the game balls that have flowed out of the third outflow portion 1466. The arrangement position is set so that the probability of going to 1470 is high. That is, by changing the position at which the game ball is sent to the fourth arc surface 1469 from each other, the position where the game ball is discharged while using the common fourth arc surface 1469 is changed to the fourth outflow portion 1470 or the fourth discharge portion. 1471 is biased to one of them. For this reason, the advantage of the game balls distributed to the second special route 1464 can be maintained, and the expectation can be maintained. In addition, since the game balls having different advantages roll in the left-right direction on the common fourth rolling surface 1453, it becomes possible to make the difference in a slight momentum.

  As shown in FIGS. 91 and 97, the fifth rolling surface 1454 is the lowermost rolling surface, and the game ball that has flowed out from the fourth outflow portion 1470 of the fourth rolling surface 1453 is directed to the right. A fifth inclined surface 1472 to be rolled is provided, and an inflow port 1473 through which the game ball rolled to the right end portion of the fifth inclined surface 1472 is introduced. The inflow port 1473 communicates with a passage (not shown) formed in the upper surface of the lower edge portion of the frame-shaped decorative unit 1440, and an outflow passage formed in the lower end portion of the center accessory 1401 through the passage. 1461 is sent. That is, all the game balls that have reached the fifth rolling surface 1454 of the stage 1443 enter the inflow port 1473 and flow out to the game area 605 above the first start port 1420 through the outflow path 1461. That is, it is possible to win the first start port 1420 with a relatively high probability.

  By the way, the substage 1407 of the center accessory 1401 described above with reference to FIGS. 82 and 86 is disposed in front of the stage 1443 and discharged from the stage 1443 through the third discharge portion 1468 or the fourth discharge portion 1471. The game ball is received and the game ball is configured to roll in the left-right direction. For this reason, even if it is discharged from the third rolling surface 1452 or the fourth rolling surface 1453 to the outside of the stage 1443, it can be rolled in the left-right direction by the sub-stage 1407, and thus the behavior of the game ball can be changed. It is possible to fully enjoy and reduce the disappearance of expectations. The sub-stage 1407 is formed so that the ease of winning a game ball with respect to the first start port 1420 is lower than that of the stage 1443. For this reason, the advantage of when it flows out from the fifth rolling surface 1454 of the stage 1443 and when it is discharged from the middle rolling surface (the third rolling surface 1452 or the fourth rolling surface 1453) is clarified. Can be differentiated.

  Further, the substage 1407 and the stage 1443 are formed of different materials. For this reason, different textures can be created, and it can be visually recognized that the functions and advantages are different from each other. In particular, the sub-stage 1407 is directly formed on the upper surface of the lower edge portion of the center accessory 1401, whereas the stage 1443 is a stage component 1455 (mounted on the upper surface of the lower edge portion of the frame-shaped decorative unit 1440). 91). Therefore, only the stage 1443 can be made conspicuous, and the master-slave relationship between the stage 1443 and the sub-stage 1407 can be visually grasped. Further, it is necessary that the game balls discharged from the third rolling surface 1452 or the fourth rolling surface 1453 of the stage 1443 flow down toward the sub-stage 1407. In this example, the stage 1443 has a frame shape. The third rolling surface 1452 or the fourth rolling surface 1453 can be formed at a higher position than the substage 1407 because the stage constituent member 1455 is different from the decoration unit 1440.

  The stage constituent member 1455 is made of a light-transmitting member, and a light emitting means 1456 for irradiating light from below toward the stage constituent member 1455 is disposed below the stage constituent member 1455 (FIG. 94 to 96). For this reason, it is possible to make the stage 1443 conspicuous and to create illusion due to light.

  Further, the substage 1407 is formed to extend from the front of the stage 1443 to the front of the sorting effect device 1444. That is, while the stage 1443 and the distribution effect device 1444 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the lower edge of the frame-shaped decoration unit 1440, the sub-stage 1407 is not only the front of the stage 1443 but also the vibration. The minute effect device 1444 extends to the front. For this reason, the length of the substage 1407 in the left-right direction is considerably longer than that of the stage 1443, and the game ball can be greatly rolled in the left-right direction. Therefore, according to the sub-stage 1407, it is possible to easily execute dynamic rolling in the left-right direction, which was difficult with the stage 1443, and a plurality of rolling surfaces 1450 formed in a step shape in the front-rear direction. -1454 and the stage 1443 that extends in the left-right direction can realize a more varied behavior.

  Moreover, the 2nd rolling surface 1451-the 5th rolling surface 1454 are the front-back direction so that the edge part (right end) of the distribution presentation apparatus 1444 in planar view may be located back rather than the edge part (left end) of an other side. The game ball is configured to roll obliquely in the left-right direction. For this reason, even if the space in which the stage 1443 is disposed, in particular, the width in the left-right direction in the space is relatively narrow, the second rolling surface 1451 to the fifth rolling surface 1454 are tilted in the front-rear direction. This makes it possible to increase the length of the second rolling surface 1451 and the like. In addition, by rolling in the left-right direction, the game ball is displaced not only in the left-right direction but also in the front-rear direction, and the perspective of the game ball can be changed. Furthermore, since the right end portion on the distribution effect device 1444 side is arranged so as to be located behind the left end portion, the line of sight of the player who plays the game in front of the center of the game board 4, that is, the center front of the game board 4 Thus, it is possible to roll the game ball in a direction perpendicular to the line of sight of the player who sees the stage 1443 obliquely. Therefore, although the stage 1443 is provided only on the left side of the frame-shaped decoration unit 1440, it is possible to eliminate the sense that the stage 1443 is biased and to visually recognize the behavior of the game ball. . The first rolling surface 1450 is straightly formed in the left-right direction without being tilted in the front-rear direction. For this reason, the rolling direction of the game ball on the first rolling surface 1450 and the rolling direction of the game ball on the rolling surface after the second rolling surface 1451 are different from each other, further changing the behavior of the gaming ball. Can be rich. Moreover, since the 1st rolling surface 1450 is formed in the back | innermost side and the uppermost stage, it arrange | positions in the space above the distribution production | presentation apparatus 1444, ie, extends to the distribution production | presentation apparatus 1444 side. Becomes easy.

<Configuration of distribution production device>
Next, the distribution effect device 1444 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 98 is a plan view showing the relationship between the distribution effect device 1444 and the guide passage member 1445, and FIG. 99 is an exploded perspective view of the distribution effect device 1444 seen from the upper right.

  As shown in FIG. 99, the distribution effect device 1444 includes a base member 1479 having a semicircular shape in plan view, and a plurality of (three in this example) in which game balls can be inserted by being assembled on the upper surface of the base member 1479. ) An inlet unit 1481 having an inlet 1480, a distribution unit 1482 that distributes game balls to the inlet 1480 of the inlet unit 1481, a transparent cover 1483 that covers the inlet unit 1481, and a base member 1479. And a light emitting substrate 1484 that emits light to the inlet unit 1481 and a lower case 1485 attached to the lower portion of the base member 1479.

  The inlet 1480 in the inlet unit 1481 includes a right inlet 1480a, a middle inlet 1480b, and a left inlet 1480c, which are arranged side by side on the circular arc at a predetermined interval. The periphery of each inflow port 1480 is formed of a transparent member that can transmit light, and a mirror-finished member 1485 having three through holes drilled to divide each inflow port 1480 is laid on the upper surface thereof. ing.

  In addition, a fan-shaped opening 1486 is provided at the center of the inlet unit 1481, and the guide member 1490 of the sorting unit 1482 is inserted into the opening 1486. Further, a lower stage illumination part 1488 and an upper stage illumination part 1487 are formed on the same arc as the arc in which the three inlets 1480 are arranged, and is irradiated by the light emitting substrate 1484 assembled to the base member 1479. It is like that.

  The sorting unit 1482 has a bowl-shaped guide member 1490 that guides a game ball that is opened only at the front end side toward the inflow port 1480 and is fed to the rear end side toward any of the inflow ports 1480. A support member 1491 that supports the guide member 1490 so that the guide member 1490 can rotate (that is, turn in the horizontal direction) about the rear end side, a distribution motor 1493 that rotates the guide member 1490 within a predetermined range, and a distribution motor 1493. And a reduction mechanism 1494 that reduces the number of rotations of the sorting motor 1493 and transmits it to the induction member 1490. The reduction mechanism 1494 is connected to the induction member 1490 via the rotation support shaft 1492. ing. Note that the speed reduction mechanism 1494 is provided with reference position detection means 1495 for detecting whether or not the guide member 1490 has reached a predetermined reference point.

  The cover 1483 covers the entire inlet unit 1481 so that the game ball rolling in the game area 605 does not jump into the inlet unit 1481, but the center part of the rear end has a rotation center portion of the guide member 1490. An insertion notch 1498 for dropping a game ball is formed. In addition, a plurality of cylindrical fastening holes 1499 are formed on the peripheral surface of the cover 1483, and fastening means such as screws are provided by abutting with the fastening holes 1489 provided in the inlet unit 1481. It is possible to fix the cover 1483 to the inlet unit 1481.

  The light emitting substrate 1484 is disposed below the inlet 1480 in the inlet unit 1481, and the first light emitting substrate 1500 that irradiates the periphery of the inlet 1480, the left lower stage lighting unit 1488 and the upper stage lighting in the inlet unit 1481. A second light emitting substrate 1501 that irradiates the portion 1487 from below, and a third light emitting substrate 1502 that irradiates the lower and upper illumination parts 1488 and 1487 on the right side of the inlet unit 1481 from below. Each light-emitting substrate 1484 is equipped with a plurality of light-emitting diodes 1503 serving as light-emitting sources. In particular, the first light emitting substrate 1500 is separately disposed so as to face the respective inflow ports 1480 and can selectively emit two colors (for example, red and blue) of light 2. A color light emitting diode is mounted. Therefore, when some of the multiple inlets 1480 are selected as specific inlets, the color of the light corresponding to the specific inlets and the light corresponding to the other inlets are selected. It becomes possible to make colors different from each other.

  The base member 1479 includes an accommodating portion 1505 that accommodates the first light emitting substrate 1500, three ball insertion holes 1506 that overlap the plurality of inlets 1480 in the inlet unit 1481, the second light emitting substrate 1501, and the third light emitting substrate. A window portion 1507 that allows light emitted from 1502 to pass therethrough and a through hole 1508 that passes through the rotation shaft 1492 are formed. Further, the lower case 1485 is formed with a housing portion 1509 for housing the speed reduction mechanism 1494 and a through hole 1510 through which the rotation spindle of the sorting motor 1493 can be inserted. Note that the base member 1479 and the lower case 1485 are formed of a non-conductive member such as a resin.

  In this way, in the distribution effect device 1444 of this example, all the inflow ports 1480 are arranged on the player side with respect to the rotation center of the guide member 1490, and the guide member 1490 plays the game ball toward the player side. It is configured to roll. Therefore, the operation of the guide member 1490, the behavior of the game ball on the guide member 1490, and the behavior of the game ball flowing into the inflow port 1480 can be clearly recognized. In addition, it is possible to make the game ball appear to be sucked into the inflow port 1480, and it is possible to further enhance the interest with respect to the distribution effect device 1444.

  In addition, since the bowl-shaped guide member 1490 is rotatably supported by a rotating shaft 1492 having the vertical direction as an axial direction, it is rotated within a predetermined range by the operation of the sorting motor 1493. On the other hand, since the plurality of inlets 1480 are arranged along an arc on a substantially horizontal plane with the rotation axis 1492 as the center, the leading ends of the guide members 1490 can be opposed to the plurality of inlets 1480 in order. In addition, the distance between the tip of the guide member 1490 and each of the inlets 1480 can be made substantially constant. Accordingly, regardless of which inflow port 1480 is selected, the game ball sent to the guide member 1490 can reach the inflow port 1480 at substantially the same timing, and as a result, variations in performance time can be suppressed as much as possible. become.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 98, a guide passage member 1445 that guides the game ball to the distribution effect device 1444 is formed at the tip of the passage constitution portion 1513 and a pipe-like passage constitution portion 1513 formed from a transparent resin. And an outflow port 1514 for dropping the game ball guided by the passage constituting unit 1513 onto the guide member 1490 of the stage 1443. The outflow port 1514 communicates with an insertion notch 1498 formed in the cover 1483 and is arranged to drop the game ball toward the rotation center of the guide member 1490. Therefore, the game ball can be sent to the guide member 1490 regardless of the position of the guide member 1490. In other words, it is possible to send the game ball while rotating the guide member 1490, and thus it is possible to predict the whereabouts of the game ball while associating the operation of the guide member 1490 with the timing at which the game ball is sent. become. Moreover, since the path | route structure part 1513 is formed from the transparent member, the behavior of a game ball can be visually recognized from the stage before being sent to the guidance member 1490 of the distribution direction device 1444. Therefore, it is possible to arouse the impression that the guide member 1490 and the passage component 1513 are integrally formed, that is, the impression that the guide member 1490 is extended, and the size of the distribution effect device 1444 is relatively large. Even in a small case, it is possible to realize a dynamic effect with a long rolling distance. Further, since the rolling distance of the game ball becomes long, it becomes possible to attract the player's attention for a relatively long time.

  Further, at the right end portion of the passage constituting portion 1513, a stopping means 1515 supported rotatably by a rotating shaft 1516 and a ball receiving surface 1515a of the stopping means 1515 can be stopped by rotating the rotating shaft 1516. A stopping motor 2560 (see FIG. 101) that switches between a release position (shown by a solid line) and a release position (shown by a solid line) is provided, and a game that wins the open / close winning device 1404 and is discharged to the discharge path 1518 is provided. It is possible to stop one of the balls and release the stopped game ball at a predetermined timing (that is, release the stopped state). The operation of the distribution effect device 1444 will be described later.

[Configuration of main board and peripheral board]
The configurations of the main substrate and the peripheral substrate will be described with reference to FIGS. 100 and 101 are block diagrams schematically showing the control configuration. In these drawings, bold arrows indicate the connection and direction of the power source, and thin arrows indicate the connection and direction of the signal. The control of the pachinko machine 1 of this example is broadly divided into a group of main boards 2810 (shown in FIG. 100) and a group of peripheral boards 2811 (shown in FIG. 101). The group controls gaming operations (winning detection, winning judgment, special symbol display, prize ball payout, etc.), and the peripheral board 2811 group performs staging operations (light emitting decoration, sound output, liquid crystal display, decoration body operation, etc.) ) Is controlling.

  As shown in FIG. 100, the main board 2810 includes a main control board 1350 and a payout control board 1186. The main control board 1350 includes a CPU 2812 as a central processing unit, a ROM 2813 as a read-only memory, and a RAM 2814 as a readable / writable memory. The CPU 2812 controls various games performed in the pachinko machine 1 by executing a control program stored in the ROM 2813, and creates a command signal to be output to the peripheral board 2811 and the payout control board 1186. The RAM 2814 temporarily stores information such as various data and input signals generated in various processes executed by the main control board 1350. The main board 2810 is connected to the power supply board 2131 via the power supply relay terminal plate 2860, and operating power is supplied from the power supply board 2131.

  The input interface of the main control board 1350 includes a first start port sensor 2416 for detecting a winning state for the first start port 1420 and a second start port sensor 2358 for detecting a winning state for the second start port 1421. An all winning opening winning number counting sensor 2870 for counting the number of winning with respect to the winning opening is connected. Further, a gate sensor 2990 for detecting that a game ball has passed through the passage gate 1405 and a right general prize for detecting that a game ball has won the right general prize opening 1419 are provided via the panel relay terminal board 2866. The mouth sensor 2417a is connected to the left and center general winning openings 1419 to the left and middle general winning opening sensors 2417b for detecting that a game ball has won, and is further connected to the panel relay terminal board 2866. A big prize opening sensor 2370 is connected via a relay terminal board 2867. Detection signals from these sensors are input to the main control board 1350. Also connected to the input interface of the main control board 1350 are an inner frame opening switch 2862 for detecting the opening state of the front frame body 11 and a door opening switch 2863 for detecting the opening state of the front frame 4.

  On the other hand, a normal symbol / special symbol display board 2869 is connected to the output interface of the panel relay terminal board 2866 via a symbol limiting resistor board 2868. A normal symbol display (not shown) is connected from the main control board 1350. And it is possible to output a drive signal to the special symbol display 1428 (see FIG. 82). Further, an attacker solenoid 1429 for driving the opening / closing prize winning device 1404 and a start port solenoid 2352 for driving the movable piece 1427 of the second start port 1421 are connected to the output interface of the large winning port relay terminal board 2867. These drive signals are output from the control board 1350.

  On the other hand, the payout control board 1186 includes a CPU 2815 as a central processing unit, a ROM 2816 as a read-only memory, and a RAM 2817 as a readable / writable memory. The payout control board 1186 processes the command signal input from the main control board 1350 and outputs a drive signal to the prize ball unit 800 and the rotary solenoid 653 connected to the firing control board 2865. Thus, the prize ball unit 800 pays out a game ball in accordance with the drive signal, and the rotary solenoid 653 can fire the game ball with a resilient force corresponding to the drive signal. In particular, a first variable resistor 1762 provided on the operation base 1702 of the operation unit 1700 is connected to the payout control board 1186, and sliding is performed by a voltage signal corresponding to the resistance value of the first variable resistor 1762. The operation position of the operation unit 1703 is recognized, and the pulse signal supplied to the rotary solenoid 653 is duty ratio controlled based on the operation position (voltage signal). For this reason, the exciting force of the rotary solenoid 653 changes according to the pulse signal, and it becomes possible to launch a game ball with a resilient force (that is, firing strength) according to the position of the sliding operation unit 1703. The payout control board 1186 is also connected with a stop switch 1806 provided on the sliding operation unit 1703, an origin switch 1743 provided on the operation base 1702, and a touch detection circuit 1810 for detecting contact with the touch plate 1802. The origin switch 1743 is off (ie, the sliding operation unit 1703 is not the origin), the stop switch 1806 is off (ie, the stop button 1804 is not operated), and the player's hand is Only when the touch plate 1802 is in contact with the touch plate 1802, the operation of the ball hitting device 650 is controlled to be permitted.

  In addition, bidirectional communication is performed between the main control board 1350 and the payout control board 1186 via the respective input / output interfaces. For example, when the main control board 1350 transmits a prize ball command, it responds to this. An ACK signal is returned from the payout control board 1186 to the main control board 1350. The payout control board 1186 is also connected to a full tank switch 916 that detects that the game balls stored in the full tank unit 900 are full.

  In addition, an external terminal board 2861 is connected to the main control board 1350 and the payout control board 1186, and the winning status to the first starting port 1420, the second starting port 1421 and the open / close winning device 1404, normal symbols / special symbols. Various information such as the fluctuation state of the game and the game state based on the lottery result are output to a hall computer or the like provided in the game facility.

  On the other hand, the peripheral substrate 2811 includes a peripheral control substrate 2830 and a liquid crystal control substrate 2832 as shown in FIG. Note that only one-way communication is performed between the input / output interface and the input interface between the main control board 1350 and the peripheral control board 2830, and the main control board 1350 to the peripheral control board 2830. The command is sent to, but not the other way around. Also, the operating power is supplied from the power supply board 2131 to the peripheral board 2811 via the power supply relay terminal plate 2860.

  The peripheral control board 2830 also includes electronic components such as a CPU 2834, a ROM 2835, and a RAM 2836, and a predetermined performance control program can be executed by these electronic components. In addition, the peripheral control board 2830 is provided with a ROM 2883 that stores a sound source that is the basis of voice and music, and a sound source IC 2882 that outputs sound and music according to the production content based on the sound source stored in the ROM 2883. It has been. Note that bidirectional communication is performed between the peripheral control board 2830 and the liquid crystal control board 2832 with each input / output interface.

  On the other hand, a liquid crystal display device 640 (LCD) is connected to the liquid crystal control board 2832 as an effect display device. The liquid crystal control board 2832 processes a command signal transmitted from the peripheral control board 2830, and the liquid crystal display device. A drive signal is output to 640. More specifically, the liquid crystal control board 2832 includes a CPU 2851, a RAM 2857, a ROM 2854, a VDP 2884, and an image ROM 2885. The CPU 2851 receives the command signal sent from the peripheral control board 2830 through the input interface and performs arithmetic processing based on the command to control the VDP 2884. The RAM 2857 provides a work area for the CPU 2851 and temporarily stores information included in the display command. The ROM 2854 holds a program for the CPU 2851 (for display control). Here, the liquid crystal display device 640 corresponds to the effect means and the effect display means of the present invention.

  A VDP (video display processor) 2884 is a drawing circuit that directly operates an LCD driver (liquid crystal driving circuit) incorporated in the liquid crystal display device 640. A register is provided in the VDP 2884, and it is possible to hold the operation mode of the VDP 2884, setting information of various display functions, and the like. Then, the CPU 2851 rewrites various information held in this register, whereby the display mode in the liquid crystal display device 640 can be changed variously. The image ROM 2885 is a non-volatile memory that stores various image data, and stores bitmap image data of various display patterns, JPEG image data for a background image, and the like.

  In addition, an electrical decoration control board 2890 and a drive control board 2891 are connected to the peripheral control board 2830. Furthermore, the electrical decoration control board 2890 includes a plurality of light emitting boards provided in the frame-shaped decoration unit 1440, specifically Specifically, an upper light emitting substrate 2892a provided corresponding to the upper portion, a right light emitting substrate 2892b provided corresponding to the right portion, and a left light emitting substrate 2892c provided corresponding to the left portion are respectively connected. Yes. Furthermore, a stage light emission substrate 2892d that irradiates the stage 1443 and three distribution light emission substrates 1484 that are provided in the distribution effect device 1444 and irradiate the inlet unit 1481 are connected to the electrical control board 2890.

  In addition, a speaker 163 and a frame decoration lamp 2893 are connected to the peripheral control board 2830 via a frame decoration relay terminal board 2886, and sound and music output from the sound source IC 2882 are generated from the speaker 163, The frame decoration lamp 2893 can be turned on in a manner according to the contents of the performance. The frame decoration relay terminal plate 2886 is also connected to a push button device 330 provided in the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5, and a specific effect mode displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640 is displayed on the push button device 330. It is made to change in relation to the operation of. Furthermore, in this example, the effect switch 1805 (that is, the switch for detecting the operation of the effect operation button 1803) provided in the sliding operation unit 1703 is also connected to the frame decoration relay terminal board 2886, and a specific effect mode is executed. In doing so, it is also changed in association with the operation of the effect operation button 1803. Note that the peripheral control board 2830 recognizes the operation of the effect operation button 1803 and the operation of the push button device 330 without distinction. That is, the effect operation button 1803 arranged in the sliding operation unit 1703 and the push button device 330 arranged in the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5 function as the same operation button. For this reason, the player can select a desired button according to the gaming state and usability. For example, when the operation itself is interesting, such as when the button is repeatedly hit, When the push button device 330 fixed to the dish unit 300 is used, and when it is desired to operate quietly using a dominant hand, it is possible to select to use the effect operation button 1803 provided on the sliding operation unit 1703. become.

  It is also possible to set the effect operation buttons 1803 arranged in the sliding operation unit 1703 and the push button device 330 arranged in the dish unit 300 as buttons having different functions. According to this, when the production operation button 1803 is operated, the first production mode can be changed, and when the push button device 330 is operated, the second production mode different from the first production mode is changed. It becomes possible to make it. In other words, it is possible to share and associate the function of changing the effect mode between the effect operation button 1803 and the push button device 330. For this reason, it is possible to further enhance the interest in the production by changing the production mode in a more complicated manner and by making the change of each production mode correspond to the button suitable for the change.

  Further, on the peripheral control board 2830, the second variable resistor 1762 provided on the operation base 1702 of the operation unit 1700 and the light emitting part provided on the sliding operation unit 1703 via the frame decoration relay terminal plate 2886. 1809 is connected. Although specific control of the light emitting unit 1809 will be described later, the operation position of the sliding operation unit 1703 is recognized based on the voltage signal corresponding to the resistance value of the second variable resistor 1763, and based on the operation position (voltage signal). Thus, the light emission state and light emission mode of the light emitting unit 1809 are switched.

<Main control board processing>
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 1350 (particularly the CPU 2812) will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 102A is a flowchart showing an example of main processing executed by the CPU 2812 mounted on the main control board 1350, and FIG. 102B is a flowchart showing an example of processing at the time of power-off occurrence. FIG. 103 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol / special electric accessory control process. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the start opening winning process. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the variation start process. FIG. 107 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variable display pattern setting process. FIG. 108 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the changing process. FIG. 109 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the big hit game start process. FIG. 110 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the small hit game start process. FIG. 111 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the special electric utility jackpot control process. FIG. 112 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the special electric accessory small hit control process. The timer interrupt process is executed at a predetermined timing (every 4 ms in this embodiment) by the CPU 2812 mounted on the main control board 1350.

  As shown in FIG. 102 (a), when the supply of power to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the CPU 2812 executes a power-on process (step S1). In this power-on process, it is determined whether or not the backup data stored in the RAM 2814 is normal (is a set value when a power failure occurs). If normal, the backup data stored in the RAM 2814 is determined. Executes processing to return to the state at the time of power failure (power recovery processing), and if the backup data is abnormal, clears RAM2814 and performs CPU peripheral device settings (normal initial settings: interrupt timing settings, etc.) . When power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped during the game, the current game state is stored in the RAM 2814 as backup data. If the RAM erase switch that instructs to clear the backup data stored in the RAM 2814 is turned on in the power-on process, the RAM 2814 is cleared and normal initialization is performed. If the backup data is not stored in the RAM 2814 mounted on the main control board 1350 during the power-on process, the RAM 2814 is cleared and normal initialization is performed. In the power-on process, a process of setting a power-on command indicating that the main control board 1350 has been activated to the peripheral control board 2830 when normal initialization is executed is also executed. The power-on command notifies the peripheral control board 2830 that the main control board 1350 has been activated. Note that backup data is also stored in the RAM 2814 even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped (when the power is turned off) when the amusement store is closed, etc. Processing at the time of execution is executed.

  When the power-on process ends, the CPU 2812 starts a loop process that repeatedly executes each process for gaming. At the start of this loop processing, the CPU 2812 first determines whether or not a power failure notice signal has been detected (step S2). In this embodiment, the power supply voltage used in the pachinko machine 1 is generated by a power supply board (not shown). That is, since the plurality of types of devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1 operate with different power supply voltages, the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is converted into a predetermined power supply voltage on the power supply board, Supplying to the device. Therefore, when a power failure occurs and the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the power supply board is equal to or lower than the predetermined power supply voltage, the power failure notice signal indicating that the supply of power supply voltage from the power supply board 2131 to the main control board 1350 is stopped Is sent. Then, when a power failure notice signal is detected by the CPU 2812 mounted on the main control board 1350 in step S2, a process at the time of power failure occurrence is executed (step S4). When the power interruption occurs, the processing of the gaming machine is in the state before the power failure when the power supply voltage (24V in this embodiment) supplied to the power supply board after the power failure is restored (hereinafter referred to as power recovery). This is a process of storing the state at the time of the occurrence of a power failure as backup data in the RAM 2814 in order to start from the beginning. Although the processing content will be described later, in the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the power failure occurrence processing is not interrupt processing, but as branch processing that is executed immediately after the start of the loop depending on whether or not a power failure warning signal is detected. It is incorporated in the main process (main control process).

  When the power failure warning signal is not detected in step S2, that is, when the power from the external power supply is normally supplied, random number update processing 2 for updating various random numbers used in the game is performed (step S3). . The random number updated in the random number update process 2 will be described later.

  FIG. 102 (b) is a flowchart showing an example of the process at the time of power-off occurrence (step S4). As described above, the power-off occurrence process is a process executed when a power failure warning signal is detected in the main process. First, the CPU 2812 performs an interrupt prohibition setting so that the interrupt process is not executed (step S4a). Then, the checksum of the RAM 2814 is calculated and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 2814 (step S4b). This checksum is used to check whether or not the contents of the RAM 2814 before the power failure is retained at the time of power recovery.

  Next, the CPU 2812 sets a specified value indicating that the process at the time of power-off occurrence has been performed in a backup flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 2814 (step S4c). When the above processing is completed, the CPU 2812 prohibits access to the RAM 2814 (step S4d) and enters an infinite loop to prepare for the stop of power supply. In this process, if the power supply voltage becomes unstable due to a very short power failure, etc. (hereinafter referred to as “instantaneous power outage”), the process at the time of the occurrence of power interruption has started. Since the power supply voltage is not stopped, there is a possibility that it is impossible to return from the infinite loop in the above processing. In order to avoid such adverse effects, the CPU 2812 of this embodiment is provided with a watchdog timer, and is configured to be reset if the watchdog timer is not updated for a predetermined time. The watchdog timer is periodically updated while the process is normally performed. However, the watchdog timer enters the process when the power is cut off and is not updated. As a result, even when the power interruption occurs due to a momentary power failure and the infinite loop of FIG. 102 is entered, a reset is applied after a predetermined period of time, and the CPU 2812 is started in the same process as when the power is turned on.

  FIG. 103 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing. As described above, in this embodiment, the timer interrupt process is executed every 4 ms by the CPU 2812 mounted on the main control board 1350 during the execution of the main process. In the timer interrupt process, the CPU 2812 executes the process of steps S11 to S18 after executing the register saving process (step S10). In the switch input process of step S11, a process of monitoring the detection signal of the above-described switches (gate switch, start port sensor, count sensor, general winning switch, etc.) is executed. In the random number update process 1 in step S12, a process of updating various random numbers used in the game is executed. In this embodiment, the random number updated in the random number update process 1 is different from the random number updated in the random number update process 2 described above. Although the random number will be described later, the random number updated in the random number update process 2 may be updated in the random number update process 1 as well. In the payout operation process in step S13, a payout command for instructing the payout control board 1186 to pay out the game ball is set based on the signal detected in the switch input process (step S11).

  In the normal symbol / ordinary electric accessory control process in step S14, the normal symbol is changed based on the progress of the game, and the normal electric accessory (that is, the movable piece 1427 opened and closed by the start port solenoid 2352) is changed. The control is executed to change the open / close state of the second start port 1421. In the special symbol / special electric accessory control process in step S15, the special symbol display 1428 displays the first special symbol and the second special symbol variably on the basis of the progress of the game, or the special electric accessory (that is, the attacker solenoid). The movable piece 1430 that is opened and closed by 1429 is controlled to execute a process of changing the open / closed state of the special prize opening, etc. In the output data setting process of step S16, the pachinko machine 1 (for example, a management computer) is externally set. A process of outputting a state signal indicating a gaming state, a process of outputting a drive signal to a special figure start memory lamp (not shown), etc. are executed, etc. In the command transmission process of step S17, an effect command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 2830. In the command transmission process, the power is turned on when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started. Processing to transmit the power-on command set in the processing (step S1) is also performed to the peripheral control board 2830. When the processing from step S11 to step S17 is executed, the return processing of the register (step S18) is executed, and processing is performed. Exit.

  Here, various random numbers that are updated by the CPU 2812 mounted on the main control board 1350 in the random number update process 1 (step S12) and the random number update process 2 (step S3) described above will be described. In this embodiment, as the various random numbers used in the game, the big hit determination random number used for determining whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state (including “small hit” described later) (big hit determination), the big hit determination Is a random number for a big hit symbol used to determine whether or not to make a promiscuous big hit when it is determined that a big hit gaming state will be generated (special change determination), special when a big hit gaming state is determined in the big hit determination Random for jackpot symbol used to determine the symbol to stop the symbol, used to determine whether or not to release with a reach mode when it is determined that the big hit gaming state does not occur in the jackpot determination (reach determination) Reach determination random number, variation used to determine the variation display pattern (variation time) of the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display 1428 Display pattern random (random number change time) Average per determining random number used for determining whether to control the movable piece 1427 in an open state (usually the lottery per determination), and the like. In this example, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a small hit gaming state using a big hit determination random number. It is also determined whether or not to make a probability variation jackpot (the probability that a specific profit is given is set higher than usual) using a jackpot symbol random number. It should be noted that the variation display pattern of the special symbol may be determined using the reach determination random number, and the variation display pattern of the decorative symbol controlled by the liquid crystal display device 640 may be determined.

  Among these random numbers, in the random number update processing 1, the big hit determination random number related to the occurrence of the big hit gaming state, the big hit symbol random number, and the normal symbol per random number related to whether or not the movable piece 1427 is controlled to be in the open state Update. That is, the random number used for the determination relating to the occurrence of the big hit gaming state and whether or not to control the movable piece 1427 to the open state is updated every 4 ms as a predetermined timing. By doing in this way, the probability (probability to determine that the big hit gaming state is generated, probability to determine that the movable piece 1427 is controlled to be in the open state) in a predetermined period with each random number can be made constant. It can be prevented that the person becomes disadvantageous. On the other hand, in the random number update process 2, the reach determination random number and the variable display pattern random number that are not related to the occurrence of the big hit gaming state and the normal lottery are updated.

  FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol / special electric accessory control process (step S15). In the special symbol / special electric accessory control process, the CPU 2812 executes the processes from step S20 to step S90. In the start opening winning process in step S20, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won the first start opening 1420 or the second start opening 1421. When winning, a process of updating the lottery hold state is executed. In the variation start process of step S30, the number of starting memories (holding number) in each big hit lottery is confirmed, and if the number of starting memories (total number of starting memories) is not 0, the corresponding special symbol variation display is started. Make settings for As will be described in detail later, specifically, it is determined whether or not a big hit gaming state is to be generated, and if a big hit gaming state is to be generated, whether or not to be a promising big hit is determined. In the variation pattern setting process in step S40, settings related to variation display of each special symbol and each decorative symbol are performed. As will be described in detail later, specifically, a variable display pattern for each special symbol is determined, and a variable time set in accordance with the variable display pattern (the special symbol display unit 1428 starts the variable symbol variable display). Set the timer to the time until the stop.

  In the changing process of step S50, the timer set with the changing time in the changing display pattern setting process (step S40) is monitored, and the first special symbol display 2390a or the second special symbol display is performed based on the timer timed out. Processing to stop the special symbol variation display in the device 2390b (equivalent to the special symbol display 1428) is performed. At this time, if it is determined in any one of the big win lotteries in the variation start process (step S30), the process selection flag is updated to “3”, and the small win game state is set in the same lottery. If the determination is made, the process selection flag is updated to “4”, and if it is not determined to be the big hit or small hit gaming state, the process selection flag is updated to “0”.

  In the jackpot game start process in step S60, settings for starting the jackpot game state are performed. Specifically, as described later, the number of times of opening the movable piece 1430, the opening time, and the like are set according to the type of jackpot. In addition, in the small hit game start process in step S70, setting for starting the small hit game state is performed. Specifically, as described later, the number of times of opening the movable piece 1430 at the small hit, the opening time, and the like are set. In the special electric utility jackpot control process of step S80, the winning a prize opening is opened and the movable piece 1430 is closed when a predetermined number of game balls have won the winning a prize opening or when a predetermined period has elapsed. Process. Further, if the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state has not reached the predetermined number, the process for making the movable piece 1430 open again is performed. When the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state has reached the predetermined number, the processing selection flag Is updated to “5”. In addition, after the number of rounds reaches a predetermined number, processing for generating a probability variation state and a short-time gaming state is executed. In the special electric accessory small hits control process in step S90, the big winning opening is opened, and the movable piece 1430 is closed when a predetermined number of game balls have won the big winning opening or when a predetermined period has elapsed. Process to do. As will be described in detail later, the opening of the big prize opening in the special electric accessory small hit control process is such that the profit to the player is extremely low compared to the special electric accessory big hit control process (step S80). Is set. Next, specific processing in steps S20 to S90 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 105, in the start opening winning process, first, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is output from the second start opening sensor 2358, and when the detection signal is output from the second start opening sensor 2358. Then, it is determined that the game ball has won the second start port 1421 (YES in step S201), and if the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2358 is not output, the game ball has won the second start port 1421. (NO in step S201). When it is determined in step S201 that the game ball has won at the second start port 1421, various random numbers for the second big hit lottery (random numbers for big hit determination, random numbers for big hit symbols, etc.) are acquired and provided in the RAM 2814. It is determined whether or not the value of the second reserved ball number counter is less than 4 which is the upper limit value (step S202). Then, if the second reserved ball number counter is less than 4 in step S202, a second start hold storage process (step S203) and a hold history update process (step S204) are executed. These processes will be described later. If the value of the second reserved ball number counter is 4 in step S202, the second start hold storage process and the hold history update process are not executed.

  On the other hand, when a detection signal is not output from second start port sensor 2358 in step S201 (NO in step S201), or when the value of the second reserved ball number counter is 4 (NO in step S202). Determines whether or not a game ball has won the first start port 1420 (step S205). Specifically, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is output from the first start port sensor 2416. When it is determined in step S205 that a game ball has won at the first start port 1420 (YES), various random numbers for the first big hit lottery are obtained, and the value of the first reserved ball number counter provided in the RAM 2814 is It is determined whether or not the upper limit is less than 4 (step S206). If the first held ball number counter is less than 4 in step S206, the first start hold storage process (step S207) and the hold history update process (step S208) are executed. If the value of the first reserved ball number counter is 4 in step S206, the first start hold storage process and the hold history update process are not executed.

  As shown in FIG. 106, in the variation start process, first, it is determined whether or not the process flag is “0”. If it is “0” (YES in step S301), the processes after step S302 are executed. If it is not “0” (NO in step S301), the variation start process is terminated. In step S302, it is determined whether or not the values (the first start memory number and the second start memory number) of the two reserved ball number counters corresponding to the special symbol indicators 2390a and 2390b are “0”. . The sum of the values of the two reserved ball counters indicates the number of random numbers stored in the start memory storage area (special symbol random number storage means 2939, 2940 (see FIG. 123)). If the values of any of the held ball number counters are both “0” (YES), it is determined that the starting conditions for the first big hit lottery and the second big hit lottery are not satisfied, and the routine goes to Step S317.

  On the other hand, if the value of any of the held ball number counters is not “0” in step S302 (NO), the start memory transfer process is executed (steps S303 to S311). As shown in FIG. 123 (a), the first special symbol random number storage means 2939 is provided with four storage areas (storage area [1] 2939a to storage area [4] 2939d). Each is associated with the value of the stored number (“1” to “4”). Also, as shown in FIG. 123 (b), the second special symbol random number storage means 2940 is also provided with four storage areas (storage area [1] 2940a to storage area [4] 2940d). The two start memory numbers (“1” to “4”) are associated with each value. Each of the storage areas 2939a to 2939d, 2940a to 2940d has a big hit determination random number storage area 2946 in which a big hit determination random number is stored, and a big hit symbol random number storage area 2947 in which a big hit symbol random number is stored. . In the start memory transfer process, first, whether or not the value of the reserved ball number counter (second start memory number) corresponding to the second special symbol display 2390b is “0”, that is, the second special symbol random number. It is determined whether or not random numbers are stored in the storage area [1] 2940a of the storage unit 2940 (step S303). If random numbers are stored (NO), each of the nth storages (n is a natural number of 2 or more) is stored. Various random numbers stored in the areas (storage area [2] 2940b to storage area [4] 2940d) are shifted to the (n-1) th storage area (storage area [1] 2940a to storage area [3] 2940c), respectively. A process (step S304) and a process (step S305) of acquiring a random number related to the second special symbol stored in the storage area [1] 2940a are executed. Further, “1” is set to the special symbol variation flag (step S306), and a process of subtracting “1” from the reserved ball number counter corresponding to the second special symbol is executed (step S307).

  On the other hand, when the random number is not stored in the storage area [1] 2940a of the second special symbol random number storage means 939, that is, the value of the reserved ball number counter corresponding to the second special symbol display 2390b is “0”. (YES in step S303), in each of the nth storage areas (storage area [2] 2939b to storage area [4] 2939d) of the first special symbol random number storage means 2939 (n is a natural number of 2 or more). A process (step S308) of shifting various random numbers stored in the storage area [1] 2939a to the n−1th storage area (storage area [1] 2939a to storage area [3] 2939c). In addition, a process of acquiring a random number related to the second special symbol (step S309) is executed. Further, a process of subtracting “1” from the reserved ball number counter corresponding to the first special symbol (step S311) is executed. That is, regarding the first special symbol, when holding, as in the case of the second special symbol, the value of the held ball number counter (first start memory number) is increased by “1” and the extracted random number is increased. , Stored in the storage area corresponding to the value of the first start memory number, but only when the second start memory number is "0" when starting the change of the first special symbol, that is, according to the first special symbol Each random number is read from the first storage area “1” 2939a of the first special symbol random number storage means 2939 only when the first processing is waiting and the second processing by the second special symbol is not waiting. I have to. This control enables the second process to be performed with priority over the first process.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the probability variation function is in operation, that is, whether or not the probability variation state has a high probability (step S312). If not the probability variation state (NO in step S312), the probability variation is not activated. Jackpot determination table, that is, a table set with a low probability of being a jackpot, on the other hand, in the case of a probability variation state (YES in step S312), the table at the time of probability variation operation, that is, the probability of being a jackpot Select a highly set table. In this example, the probability of a big hit is set to 1/163 when the probability fluctuation is not activated (ie, normal), and the probability of a big hit is 1 when the probability fluctuation is activated (ie, when the probability is high). /166.3 is set.

  After any table is selected in step S313 or step S314, the random number related to any special symbol obtained in step S305 or step S309 based on the table is a random number corresponding to the big hit (big hit value) It is determined whether or not (step S315). If it is a big hit value (YES in step S315), the big hit flag is set to "ON" (step S316), and the process proceeds to step S317. On the other hand, if the acquired random number is not a big hit value (NO in step S315), it is determined whether or not the random number is a random number corresponding to a small hit (small hit value) (step S318). If it is a small hit value (YES in step S318), the small hit flag is set to “ON” (step S319), and the process proceeds to step S317. (NO in S318), the process proceeds to step S317 without going through step S319. In step S317, the process flag is updated to “1”, and the variation start process is terminated. Note that the ON / OFF states (set state and reset state) of the big hit flag and the small hit flag are stored in the RAM 814. The OFF state (reset state) of the big hit flag and the small hit flag means that a value of “0” is set, and the ON state (set state) of the big hit flag and the small hit flag is a value of “1”. Is set.

  In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 107, first, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is “1”. If the process is not “1” (NO in step S401), the variation pattern setting process is terminated. In step S402, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is “ON”. If the flag is “ON” in step S316 (YES in step S402), the probability variation jackpot or It is determined which of the big hits is a normal big hit (step S403). If it is a big hit with probability fluctuation (YES in step S403), it is determined whether or not it is a special hit (step S404). As will be described in detail later, any of the probability variation jackpots is “in the subsequent lottery, the probability variation state in which the probability that a specific profit is given is set higher than usual, and any of the special symbol indicators 1428 is set. A short game state is generated when the variation time of the special symbol that fluctuates is shortened (relatively shorter than the normal time) and the ease of winning a prize at the second start port 1421 is increased more than usual. In other words, the probability variation jackpot that is a special hit and the general probability variation jackpot that is not a special hit are set so that the level of profit given to the player is greatly different. That is, in the general probability fluctuation big hit, the opening time per one of the movable piece 1430 is set to a time that allows a plurality of (for example, ten) game balls to win with plenty of room, and the movable piece Control is performed so that the opening / closing operation 1430 is performed a number of times (for example, 7 times) in which many benefits are given. On the other hand, in the probability variation big hit which is a special hit, the opening time per one of the movable pieces 1430 is set to a time at which several (for example, one or two) game balls can barely win. The opening / closing operation of the movable piece 1430 is controlled to be performed twice, for example.

  If it is determined in step S404 that it is not a special hit, that is, if it is determined that it is a general probability fluctuation big hit (NO), a probability variation big hit variation display pattern table is selected (step S405), while a special hit is determined. If it is determined that it is a hit (YES in step S404), the probability variation special hit fluctuation display pattern table is selected (step S406). If it is determined in step S403 that the probability variation is not big hit, that is, if it is decided that the normal big hit is made (YES), the normal big hit fluctuation display pattern table is selected (step S407).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S402 that the big hit flag is not “ON” (NO), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is “ON” (step S408), and “ON” is determined in step S319. If YES (YES in step S408), the small hit change display pattern table is selected (step S409). When the small hit flag is not “ON” (NO in step S408), it is determined whether or not the acquired reach determination random number is a random number (reach value) corresponding to reach (step S410). ) If it is a reach value (YES in step S410), a deviation reach fluctuation display pattern table is selected (step 411). If it is not a reach value (NO in step S410), a deviation fluctuation display is performed. A pattern table is selected (step S412).

  As described above, when the variable display pattern table is selected in any step, the variable display pattern is calculated based on the variable display pattern table and the variable display random number acquired in either step S305 or step S309. Determine (step S413). Next, a selection value is set as an effect command for designating the variation display pattern determined in step S413 (step S414), and a variation time corresponding to the variation display pattern is set in a timer provided in the RAM 2814 mounted on the main control board 1350. (In this embodiment, the valid period timer) is set (step S415). In step S415, the variation time set in the variation display pattern determined in step S413 is set in the effective period timer. Note that the variable display pattern command set in step S414 is transmitted to the peripheral control board 2830 by command transmission output processing. When a variable display pattern command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 2830 by command transmission output processing, a drive signal is output to the first special symbol display 2390a and the second special symbol display 2390b, and the special symbol variation display is started. Let Thereafter, the processing flag is updated to “2” (step S416), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

  In the changing process shown in FIG. 108, first, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is “2” (step S501). If it is “2” in step S416 (YES in step S501), The processing after S502 is executed, and if it is not “2” (NO in step S501), the changing processing is ended. In step S502, the first special symbol display 2390a or the second special symbol display 2390b determines whether or not the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changing. It is determined whether or not the variation time of the symbol or the second special symbol is up (step S503). When the fluctuation time is up, that is, when the fluctuation time is ended (YES in step S503), the fluctuation is stopped (step S504). If none of the special symbols have changed (NO in step S502), or if the change time has not ended (NO in step S503), the special symbols are changing without being stopped. The process ends.

  After stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol in step S504, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is “ON” (step S505). If the big hit flag is “ON”, the processing flag is updated to “3”. (Step S506). On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not “ON” (NO in step S505), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is “ON” (step S507). If it is “ON”, the processing flag is set to “4”. Is updated to “0” (step S508). If it is not “ON”, the processing flag is updated to “0” (step S509). In this way, after the processing flag is updated in any of step S506, step S508, or step S509, the changing process is ended.

  In the jackpot game start process shown in FIG. 109, first, it is determined whether or not the process flag is “3”. If it is “3” in step S506 (YES in step S601), the process after step S602 is performed. If the process is not “3” (NO in step S601), the big hit game start process is terminated. In step S602, it is determined whether or not the probability variation function is operating, that is, whether or not it is in the probability variation state. If the probability variation state is present (YES), the operation of the probability variation function is temporarily stopped, and the process proceeds to step S604. To do. If the state is not the probability variation state, that is, if it is the normal low probability state (NO in step S602), the process proceeds to step S604 without executing the process of step S603. In step S604, it is determined whether or not the time saving function is operating, that is, whether or not the time saving gaming state is set. If the time saving gaming state is set (YES), the operation of the time saving function is stopped (step S605). The process proceeds to S606. On the other hand, if it is not the short-time gaming state (NO in step S604), the process proceeds to step S606 without executing the process in step S605.

  In step S606, it is determined whether the type of jackpot is a general jackpot or a special jackpot. If the jackpot is a general jackpot (NO in step S606), the condition for opening the jackpot by the movable piece 1430 is determined. That is, the number of times of opening for big hits (for example, a maximum of 7 times), the opening time for each time (for example, a maximum of 18 seconds), and the limited number of winnings to a big winning opening (for example, a maximum of 10 per time) are set (step S607). ). On the other hand, if the big hit is a special hit (YES in step S606), the special winning opening number (for example, twice) at the big winning opening (for example, twice), the winning limit number (for example, 6), and the opening time per time. (For example, 1.8 seconds) is set (step S608). Thereafter, the process flag is updated to “5” (step S609), and the big hit game start process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the small hit game start processing shown in FIG. 110, first, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is “4”. If “4” is determined in step S508 (YES in step S701), step The processing of S702 and step S703 is executed, and if the processing flag is not “4” (NO in step S701), the small hit game start processing is ended without executing the processing of step S702 and step S703. In step S702, the condition for opening the big prize opening in the case of a small hit, that is, the number of small winning openings for the big prize opening by the movable piece 1430, and the opening time per one are set. It should be noted that the number of times of opening in the small hit, the limited number of winnings, and the opening time are set to be the same as the conditions (step S608) set in the case of special hit. That is, the special hit and the small hit are set so that they cannot be visually discriminated. Thereafter, the process flag is updated to “6” (step S703), and the small hit game start process is terminated.

  In the special electric utility jackpot control process shown in FIG. 111, first, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is “5”. If it is “5” in step S609 (YES in step S801), step The processing after S802 is executed, and if it is not “5” (NO in step S801), the special electric utility jackpot control processing is terminated. In step S802, it is determined whether or not the big prize opening is open. If it is open (YES), the opening time (elapsed time after opening) of the big prize opening reaches a predetermined time set in advance. In step S803, if it has elapsed (YES in step S803), the movable piece 1430 is actuated to close the special winning opening (step S805). Even if the set opening time has not elapsed (NO in step S803), the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening after the big winning opening has been opened is the limit number set in step S607. If (for example, 10) is exceeded (YES in step S804), the process proceeds to step S805 to close the special winning opening. Also, if the opening time of the big prize opening has not reached the set time (NO in step S803) and the number of winning game balls has not reached the limit (NO in step S804), a special The electric utility jackpot control process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in step S802, when the big winning opening is not open (NO), the number of opening of the big winning opening by the movable piece 1430 is set in the number of big hits opened in step S607 or in step S608. It is determined whether or not the special hit opening number has been reached (step S806). If not reached (NO in step S806), the movable piece 1430 is controlled to open the special winning opening (step S807), and the special electric utility big hit control process is terminated. As a result, a large amount of game balls can be awarded to the grand prize opening.

  In step S806, when the number of times of opening the big prize opening reaches the set number (YES), that is, when the big hit gaming state is finished, the processing of step S808 to step S813 is executed, and the subsequent lottery is performed. Set all game states. Specifically, first, the jackpot flag is set to “OFF” (step S808), and it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is a win that activates the probability variation function (step S809). That is, it is determined whether the probability variation big hit including the special hit or the normal big hit. If the winning is a probability variation jackpot (YES in step S809), the operation of the probability variation function is started and a probability variation state with a high probability is set (step S810). That is, in the subsequent lottery, the probability of winning the jackpot is set higher than usual, and the time-shortening function is activated until the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol or the second special symbol due to the lottery reaches a predetermined number (a specified number). . If the big hit is a special hit (YES in step S811), it is determined whether or not the probability variation function or the short-time function is in operation (step S814). If it is not a special hit, that is, if it is a general probability fluctuation big hit (NO in step S810), or if the special hit is won when the probability fluctuation function or the time reduction function is already activated, The operation is started (step S812), and then the processing flag is updated to “0” (step S813). That is, the first special symbol or the second special symbol that fluctuates on the first special symbol indicator 2390a or the second special symbol indicator 2390b is shortened, and the movable piece 1427 is opened to the second start port 1421. Increase the ease of winning a prize. On the other hand, if the probability variation function and the time reduction function are not in operation, that is, if neither the probability variation state nor the time reduction gaming state has occurred and the special win is won (NO in step S814), the time reduction function is activated. The process proceeds to step S813 without being operated.

  On the other hand, if it is not a win that activates the probability variation function in step S809, that is, if it is a normal big hit (NO), the operation of the time reduction function is started and the specified number of operations in the time reduction function is set (step S815). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S813. That is, the time-shortening function is operated until the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol or the second special symbol due to the lottery reaches a predetermined number (specified number).

  In the special electric accessory small hitting control process shown in FIG. 112, first, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is “6”. If it is “6” in step S703 (YES in step S901), The process after step S902 is executed, and if it is not “6” (NO in step S901), the special electric accessory small hit control process is terminated. In step S902, it is determined whether or not the number of winning game balls for the grand prize opening has reached a preset maximum number of winnings (step S902). If the maximum number of winnings has not been reached yet (NO). Then, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening is open (step S903). If it is determined in step S903 that the special winning opening is open (YES), whether the opening time of the special winning opening (elapsed time after opening) has reached a predetermined time set in advance. If it has elapsed (YES in step S904), the movable piece 1430 is actuated to close the special winning opening (step S905). After that, it is determined whether or not the number of times the special winning opening is opened has reached a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) (step S906). If this number is reached (YES), the processing flag is set to “0”. (Step S907), and the special electric accessory small hit control process is terminated. If the opening time of the special winning opening has not reached the predetermined time in step S904 (NO), or if the number of opening has not reached the predetermined number in step S906 (NO), the process of step S907 is executed. Then, the special electric accessory small hit control process is terminated. In step S903, if the big prize opening is not open (NO), the big prize opening is opened, and the game ball can be won (step S908). In step S902, if the number of game balls won for the big prize opening reaches the preset maximum number of prizes (YES), it is determined whether or not the big prize opening is open (step S909). If it is open (YES), the special winning opening is closed (step S910), and the process proceeds to step S907. On the other hand, when the special winning opening is not open (NO in step S909), the process proceeds to step S907 without executing the process of step S910. In step S907, the processing flag is updated to “0”.

<Processing of peripheral control board>
Next, processing executed by the integrated CPU 2834 mounted on the peripheral control board 2830 will be described. FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing an example of sub-main processing, and FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing an example of 16 ms steady processing.

  As shown in FIG. 113, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the integrated CPU 2834 performs an initial setting process (step S1001). In this initial setting process, a process of clearing the integrated RAM 2836 mounted on the peripheral control board 2830 is performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S1001) is completed, a loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set is started (step S1002).

  In this embodiment, the integrated CPU 2834 generates an interrupt every 2 ms and executes a 2 ms steady process. In the 2 ms steady process, a process of counting up the 16 ms progress monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16 ms progress monitoring counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16 ms progress monitoring counter reaches 8, that is, 16 ms elapses. A process of setting the flag T and resetting (setting to 0) the 16 ms progress monitoring counter is executed. In this way, the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set (set) to “1” every 16 ms in the 2 ms steady process, and is normally set (reset) to “0”. If the 16 ms elapsed flag is set in step S1002 (the 16 ms elapsed flag T is “1”), the 16 ms elapsed flag is reset (step S1003), and then a 16 ms steady process is performed (step S1004).

  In the 16 ms steady process, a process of controlling the liquid crystal display device 640, the frame lamp, the game board lamp, the speaker and the like is executed based on the effect command received from the main control board 1350. When the 16 ms steady process ends, the process returns to step S1002 again, and the above-described steps S1003 to S1004 are repeated every time the 16 ms elapse flag T is set, that is, every 16 ms. On the other hand, if the 16 ms elapsed flag T is not set in step S1002 (the 16 ms elapsed flag T is “0”), loop processing is performed until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set.

  FIG. 114 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a 16 ms steady process executed every 16 ms in the sub main process. In the 16 ms steady process, the sub-integrated CPU 2834 executes the processes of steps S1100 to S1600. In the command analysis process in step S1100, the effect command received from the main control board 1350 is analyzed. In the effect control process in step S1200, a control process related to the liquid crystal display device 640 is executed based on the variable display pattern command. Specifically, setting of a notice effect, determination of a stop symbol of a decorative symbol, and the like are performed.

  Moreover, in the sound control process of step S1300, the control process regarding a speaker for generating the sound effect (for example, BGM) which promotes a production effect is performed. In the lamp control process in step S1400, control processes related to the game board lamp and the frame lamp are executed. In the information output process of step S1500, a lamp effect command is transmitted to the electrical decoration control board 2890 and the drive control board 2891. In the random number update process of step S1600, a process of updating random numbers used for various settings in the effect control process (step S1200) is executed.

  In addition, the process of step S1100 to step S1600 in the 16 ms steady process ends within 16 ms. Even if it takes 16 ms or more from the start of the 16 ms steady process to the end of the 16 ms steady process, the 16 ms steady process is started from the beginning immediately after the 16 ms has elapsed since the start of the 16 ms steady process (step S1100 described later). Do not execute) That is, when 16 ms elapses during execution of the 16 ms steady process, only the 16 ms elapse flag is set. When it is determined in step S1002 that the 16 ms elapse flag is set after the end of the 16 ms steady process, the 16 ms elapse process is performed. To start.

  In this embodiment, the random number update process (step S1600) is executed in the 16 ms steady process to update various random numbers. However, the timing (timing) for updating the various random numbers is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, various random numbers may be updated in one or both of the loop processing in the sub-main processing and the 16 ms steady processing.

  FIG. 115 is a flowchart illustrating an example of command analysis processing (step S1100). In the command analysis process, the integrated CPU 2834 first determines whether or not an effect command has been received from the main control board 1350 (step S1101). In this embodiment, when an effect command is received from the main control board 1350, other processes such as a 16 ms steady process are interrupted to generate a command reception interrupt process, and the received command is mounted on the peripheral control board 2830. Are stored in the received command storage area in the integrated RAM 2836. The reception command storage area is provided with a plurality of areas corresponding to the reception order of the production commands, and in the command reception interrupt process, the reception command storage areas are stored in the respective areas corresponding to the reception order of the production commands. In step S1101, the contents of the received command storage area are confirmed, and if the effect command is stored, the effect command in the reception order of the reception command storage area is read (step S1102).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the read effect command is a variable display pattern command (step S1103). If the read effect command is a variable display pattern command (YES in step S1103), a variable display pattern reception flag is set. Then, it is stored in the variable display pattern storage area in the integrated RAM 2836 mounted on the peripheral control board 2830 (step S1104).

  On the other hand, if the read effect command is not a variable display pattern command (NO in step S1103), it is determined whether the read effect command is a probability change jackpot command (step S1105), and if the read effect command is a probability change jackpot command. If (YES in step S1105), a probability variation jackpot flag is set (step S1106). If the read effect command is not a probability change jackpot command (NO in step S1105), a flag corresponding to the received effect command is set (step S1107).

  FIG. 116 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control process (step S1200). In the effect control process, the integrated CPU 2834 performs one of steps S1210 to S1230 with reference to the value of the process selection flag indicating the progress state of the game.

  In the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210) executed when the process selection flag is “0”, a setting for starting the decorative symbol variation display is performed if a variation display pattern command is received. Specifically, the decorative symbol stop symbol is determined according to the variable display pattern command and the probability variation jackpot command, and a notice effect is set.

  In the decorative symbol variation process (step S1220) executed when the process selection flag is “1”, when a variation stop command is received, a display command is transmitted to the electrical control board 2832 to stop the decorative symbol variation display. To control.

  In the jackpot display process (step S1230) executed when the process selection flag is “2”, an indication indicating the start of the jackpot gaming state is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640 in accordance with the jackpot start command transmitted from the main control board 1350. Control is performed to display during the big hit gaming state (for example, round display).

  FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210). In the decorative symbol variation start process, the integrated CPU 2834 first determines whether or not the variation display pattern reception flag is set (step S1221). The variation display pattern reception flag is a flag that is set in step S1104 of the command analysis process (step S1100) described above and indicates that a variation display pattern command has been received from the main control board 1350. If the variable display pattern reception flag is not set in step S1221, (NO), it is determined that the variable display pattern command has not been received, and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if the variable display pattern reception flag is set (YES in step S1221), the variable display pattern reception flag is reset (step S1222), and the variable display pattern based on the received variable display pattern command generates a big hit. It is determined whether it is a variable display pattern (whether it is a hit pattern) (step S1223a).

  If the variable display pattern is not a winning pattern (NO in step S1223a), a stop symbol for the off symbol is determined (step S1224). If the variation display pattern is a hit pattern (YES in step S1223a), it is determined whether the probability variation big hit flag is set (step S1223b). If the probability variation big hit flag is set (YES), the probability variation big hit symbol is determined. Is determined (step S1225). If the probability variation big hit flag is not set (NO in step S1223b), the stop symbol of the non-probable big hit symbol is determined (step S1226). In addition, the probability variation jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot gaming state is started in the jackpot display process (step S1230). The time when the probability variation big hit flag is reset is not limited to this. For example, when the variation display of the decorative symbol is stopped in the decorative symbol variation processing (step S1220), specifically, when the variation stop command is received. You may make it reset, and you may make it reset when ending a jackpot game state by jackpot display processing (step S1230).

  In this embodiment, the first decorative symbol corresponding 1: 1 with the first special symbol, the second decorative symbol corresponding 1: 1 with the second special symbol, the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol. A common decorative symbol sequence (hereinafter referred to as “common decorative symbol sequence”) associated with both symbols and corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed. The first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are composed of combinations of figures such as circles, crosses, sankaku, and the like. , And combinations that are out of place are set in advance. In other words, if the variable display pattern is a winning pattern, the combination symbol of the combination set as the probable big hit symbol of the first decorative symbol or the combination set as the non-probable big hit symbol is stopped. Determine as a symbol.

  Next, the integrated CPU 2834 executes a notice selection process for determining whether or not a notice effect is to be executed based on the notice determination random number (step S1227), and then the change display pattern and the notice stored in the notice type storage area. A display command corresponding to the pattern and the stop symbol of the common decorative symbol sequence determined in steps S1225, S1226, and S1227 is set (step S1228). Then, the process selection flag is updated to “1” and the process ends (step S1229). The display command set in step S1228 is transmitted to the illumination control board 2832 in the information output process (step S1500), and the display CPU 2851 mounted on the illumination control board 2832 receives the display command. Based on this, the liquid crystal display device 640 starts execution of the decorative symbol variation display. When the notice pattern stored in the notice type storage area is read in step S1228, the contents of the notice type storage area are cleared after reading the notice pattern. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the notice effect based on the notice pattern determined when the previous decoration pattern change display is erroneously started in the next decoration design change display from being executed.

<Functional configuration for production display>
Next, a functional configuration related to the effect display including the special symbol, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the common decorative symbol sequence will be described based on the block diagrams of FIGS. 118 shows a functional configuration related to the first big hit lottery on the main control board 1350, FIG. 119 shows a functional configuration related to the second big hit lottery on the main control board 1350, and FIG. FIG. 121 shows a functional configuration related to the normal lottery on the main control board 1350, and FIG. 122 shows a peripheral board 2811 (mainly a main lottery). A functional configuration related to effects on the peripheral control board 2830, the illumination control board 2890, and the drive control board 2891) is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 118, the main control board 1350 includes a first hit determination table 2911a, a first hit symbol table 2912a, a first hit variation time setting table 2913a, and a configuration related to the first big hit lottery. The first off time variation time setting table 2914a is stored in advance. Based on these tables 2911a to 2914a, whether or not the lottery is selected in the first big hit lottery, the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 2390a, and the variation time. Is determined. The first hit determination table 2911a shows the relationship between the big hit determination random number value and the success or failure of the big hit or the small hit, and the winning ratio is different between the normal time and the high probability. The first hit symbol table 2912a shows the relationship between the big hit symbol random number value and the stop symbol in the first special symbol indicator 2390a. The range is associated with the lighting state of the two LEDs (first special symbol). The first hit time varying time setting table 2913a is used when the result of winning or failing in the first big hit lottery is big hit or small hit, and the first random time random number and the first special symbol display 2390a that are extracted. The first off time variation time setting table 2914a is used when the result of winning or failing in the first big hit lottery is out of the way and is extracted. It shows the relationship between the random time for variation time and the variation time of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 2390a. Note that the first lottery probability selection means 2920a performs processing for selecting one of the normal table and the high probability table based on the gaming state. Although not shown, the first hit symbol table 2912a includes a probability variation big hit table, a special hit table, a normal big hit table, and a small hit table, respectively. A table corresponding to the type of winning determined by the first winning / failing determining means 2930a described later is selected.

  Further, when a winning to the first start port 1420 is detected by the first start port sensor 2416 on the main control board 1350, a first hit determination for extracting a big hit determination random number from a random counter (random number generating means). Random number extracting means 2916a for use and a first winning design random number extracting means 2917a for extracting a big hit design random number are provided. In addition, first variation time random number extraction means 2918a is provided for extracting variation time random numbers based on the determination random numbers and jackpot symbol random numbers. When the big hit determination random number is extracted by the first hit determination random number extraction means 2916a, the first hit determination means 2930a for determining whether or not the big hit is determined using the first hit determination table 2911a, and the first hit symbol When the big hit symbol random number extraction means 2917a extracts the big hit symbol random number, first stop symbol determination means 2931a for determining the stop symbol in the first special symbol indicator 2390a using the first hit symbol design table 2912a is provided. Yes. Further, when the random time random number extraction means 2918a extracts the random time for variation time, and the first hit / fail determination means 2930a determines that it is a big hit, the first variation time random time setting table 2913a is used. When the variation time of the first special symbol is determined, and when the variation time random number is extracted and determined to be out of the range by the first success / failure determination means 2930a, the first out-of-range variation time setting table 2914a is determined. The first variation time determining means 2932a is provided for determining the variation time of the first special symbol using.

  In addition, on the main control board 1350, the first special symbol display 2390a (corresponding to the lottery result display unit of the present invention) starts the variation of the first special symbol and is determined by the first variation time determination unit 2932a. After the lapse of the variation time, the special symbol variation control means 2934 for variably stopping at the stop symbol determined by the first stop symbol determination means 2931a and the first success / failure determination means 2930a before the first special symbol variation start. A command transmission means 2935 is provided for transmitting a control command including a success / failure command relating to the presence / absence of a big hit and a variation display command corresponding to the variation mode (time) of the first special symbol. Further, the main control board 1350 has a fixed number of balls (four times) when a winning to the first start port 1420 is detected by the first start port sensor 2416 during the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. ) Is counted as an upper limit, and the first start memory number is counted and stored, and the first reserved digesting means 2922a is provided to repeatedly display the first special symbol as many times as the start memory number. In other words, the first holding digesting means 2922a for waiting for execution of the first process based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port sensor 2416 is provided. The first reservation digesting means 2922a will be described in more detail. The first reservation digesting means 2922a is provided with a first reservation control means 2941a and a first digestion control means 2942a, and the first reservation control means 2941a is in the process of changing the first special symbol or the second special symbol. When the first start port sensor 2416 detects a winning to the first start port 1420, if the first start memory number does not reach the upper limit value “4”, the value of the first start memory number is set to “1”. In addition, the first big hit determination random number and the first big hit symbol random number are extracted, and each extracted random number is stored in the highest-order storage area in the first special symbol random number storage means 2939. On the other hand, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped changing and the first first special symbol can be changed, the first digestion control means 2942a has the start memory number for the first special symbol “ If not "0", the first big hit determination random number and the first big hit symbol random number are read from the storage area corresponding to the starting stored number [1], the first starting stored number is reduced by "1", and Each random number value stored in each storage area n is shifted to n-1 storage areas. Here, the combination of the first hit determination random number extraction means 2416a, the first variation time random number extraction means 2918a, the first win / fail determination means 2930a, the first stop symbol determination means 2931a, and the like is the lottery means of the present invention. Equivalent to.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 119, the main control board 1350 includes a second hit determination table 2911b, a second hit symbol table 2912b, and a second hit variable time setting table 2913b as configurations relating to the second big hit lottery. , And a second off-time variation time setting table 2941b are stored in advance. Based on these tables 2911b to 2914b, whether or not the lottery is selected in the second big hit lottery, the second special symbol display 2390b (the lottery of the present invention) The stop symbol and the variation time in the result display means) are determined. Since the configuration of each table is the same as the configuration of each table in the first big hit lottery, detailed description is omitted here.

  The main control board 1350 also includes second hit determination random number extraction means for extracting a big hit determination random number related to the second big hit lottery when the second start port sensor 2358 detects a winning at the second start port 1421. 2916b, a second hit random number extracting means 2917b for extracting a big hit symbol random number related to the second big hit lottery, and a second random time random number for extracting a variable random number based on the determination random number and the big hit symbol random number Extraction means 2918b is provided. Further, when the big hit determination random number extraction means 2916b extracts the big hit determination random number, the second hit determination means 2930b for determining whether or not the big hit is determined using the second hit determination table 2911b, and the second hit symbol When the big hit symbol random number extraction means 2917b extracts the big hit symbol random number, second stop symbol determination means 2931b for determining the stop symbol in the second special symbol display 2390b using the second hit symbol design table 2912b is provided. Yes. Further, when the random time for variation time is extracted by the random number extraction unit for second variation time 2918b and the big hit determination is determined by the second success / failure determination unit 2930b, the second variation time variation time setting table 2913b is used. When the variation time of the second special symbol is determined and the random number for variation time is extracted and determined to be out of place by the second success / failure determination unit 2930b, the second out-of-variation variation time setting table 2914b The second variation time determination means 2932b is provided for determining the variation time of the second special symbol by using. Note that the second win / fail determination means 2930b includes a winning restriction means 2921b, and restricts the “special big hit”, which is a big hit that does not give a specific profit to the player, so as not to occur.

  The special symbol variation control means 2934 starts the variation of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 2390b, and after the lapse of the variation time determined by the second variation time determination unit 2932b, The change is stopped at the stop symbol determined by the stop symbol determining means 2931b. Further, the main control board 1350 has a fixed number of balls (four times) when the second starting port sensor 2358 detects a winning to the second starting port 1421 during the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. ) Is counted as an upper limit, and the second reserved memory number 2922b is provided which repeatedly displays the variation display of the second special symbol by the number of the started memory number. In other words, the second reserved digesting means 2922b for waiting for the execution of the second process based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port sensor 2358 is provided. The second reservation digesting means 2922b will be described in further detail. The second reservation control means 2922b is provided with a second reservation control means 2941b and a second digestion control means 2942b, and the second reservation control means 2941b is used during the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. When the second start port sensor 2358 detects a winning to the second start port 1421, if the second start stored number has not reached the upper limit value “4”, the value of the second start stored number is set to “1”. While increasing, the second big hit determination random number and the second big hit symbol random number are extracted, and each extracted random number is stored in the uppermost storage area in the second special symbol random number storage means 2940. On the other hand, when the change of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and the change of the new second special symbol becomes possible, the second digestion control means 2942b has the start memory number related to the second special symbol “ If it is not “0”, the second big hit determination random number and the second big hit symbol random number are read from the storage area corresponding to the starting stored number [1], the second starting stored number is decreased by “1”, and Each random number value stored in each storage area n is shifted to n-1 storage areas.

  Here, the combination of the second hit determination random number extraction means 2916b, the second variation time random number extraction means 2918b, the second winning / failing determination means 2930b, the second stop symbol determination means 2931b, etc. is the lottery means of the present invention. Equivalent to.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 120, the main control board 1350 has five advantageous games that give a game state advantageous to the player based on the lottery result by the first success / failure determination means 2930a or the second success / failure determination means 2930b. State control means is provided. Here, the advantageous game state includes opening the movable piece 1430 and allowing a game ball to be awarded to the big prize opening. The specific profit granting means 2981 or the predetermined profit granting means 2982 The movable piece 1430 of the open / close prize winning device 1404 is controlled to be opened by either one of them.

  More specifically, the predetermined profit granting means 2982 sets the opening time per one movable piece 1430 as a first predetermined time that allows several (for example, 1 to 2) game balls to barely win, By performing the opening / closing operation of the movable piece 1430 at least once (in this example, twice), a predetermined profit is given to the player. This makes it possible to win a predetermined number of game balls in the big winning opening, but since the number that can be won is extremely small, the profit received by the player is relatively small. On the other hand, the specific profit granting unit 2981 sets the opening time per movable piece 1430 to a second predetermined time that allows a plurality of (for example, ten) game balls to win with a margin, and the movable piece By performing the opening / closing operation 1430 more times (7 times in this example) than the number of opening / closing operations in the case of giving a predetermined benefit, a specific benefit is given to the player. According to this, it becomes possible to make a large number of game balls enter the big winning opening, and the player can obtain a large profit.

  The main control board 1350 is provided with a first advantageous gaming state control means 2933a and a second advantageous gaming state control means 2933b as means for giving a specific profit by the specific profit giving means 2981, and a predetermined profit giving means 2982. As a means for giving a predetermined profit, a third advantageous gaming state control means 2933c, a fourth advantageous gaming state control means 2933d, and a fifth advantageous gaming state control means 2933e are provided.

  The first advantageous gaming state generated by the first advantageous gaming state control means 2933a is a so-called “probability change big hit”, and when the lottery result of the first winning / decision determining means 2930a or the second winning / decision determining means 2930b is the first result. Occur. At this time, the specific profit is given by the specific profit giving means 2981, and the probability that the specific profit is given in the subsequent lottery is set higher than the normal time by the high probability state setting means 2983. That is, a probability variation state with a high probability is assumed. In this example, in the jackpot determination table at high probability, 60 jackpot determination values that are determined to generate a jackpot gaming state are set out of 499 jackpot determination random numbers from 0 to 498. The jackpot probability, which is the probability of a jackpot, is 60/499. On the other hand, in the normal jackpot determination table, six jackpot determination values are set out of 499 jackpot determination random numbers from 0 to 498, and the jackpot probability is 6/499. In the first advantageous gaming state, the first short symbol state setting means 2984 allows the first special symbol display unit 2390a or the second special symbol display unit 2390b to change the variation time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. In addition to shortening the frequency, the frequency at which the movable piece 1427 of the second start port 1421 is opened and closed until the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol or the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number (that is, the probability of winning in the normal lottery) is increased. By doing so, the easiness of winning a prize to the second start port 1421 is increased as compared with the normal time.

  The second advantageous gaming state generated by the second advantageous gaming state control means 2933b is a so-called “ordinary big hit”, and occurs when the lottery result of the first winning / failing determining means 2930a or the second winning / failing determining means 2930b is the second result. To do. In this win, the specific profit is given by the specific profit granting means 2981 in the same way as in the first advantageous gaming state, but in this win, the probability that the specific profit will be given in the subsequent lottery Remains a low probability. That is, the probability fluctuation state is not entered, and the normal probability is maintained. Even in the second advantageous gaming state, the time is reduced by the temporary short state setting means 2984 until the predetermined number of times the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changed after the specific profit is given. It becomes a gaming state, shortens the fluctuation time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and increases the frequency that the movable piece 1427 is opened and closed (that is, the probability of winning in the normal lottery), thereby holding the ball of the game ball Suppress.

  The third advantageous gaming state generated by the third advantageous gaming state control means 2933c is a so-called “special big hit”, and occurs when the lottery result of the first winning / decision determining means 2930a is the third result. In this win, first, a predetermined profit is given to the player by a predetermined profit giving means 2982 (a profit having a lower advantage than a specific profit). For the subsequent lottery, the probability that a specific profit is given is increased. That is, as in the first advantageous gaming state, the probability variation state is set. However, the short-time gaming state is generated only when the gaming state before the advantageous gaming state is generated satisfies a predetermined condition. That is, when the third advantageous gaming state occurs when the state is not the probability variation state and is not the short-time gaming state, the short-time gaming state is not generated and the probability variation state is set. On the other hand, when the gaming state is the probability variation state or the short-time gaming state and the third advantageous gaming state occurs, the second short-time state setting means 2985 is activated to generate the short-time gaming state. Yes.

  The fourth advantageous gaming state generated by the fourth advantageous gaming state control means 2933d occurs when the lottery result of the first winning / decision determining means 2930a is the fourth result. At this time, as in the third advantageous gaming state, a predetermined profit is given to the player by the predetermined profit giving means 2982. However, for the subsequent lottery, a new probability fluctuation state is not generated. Whether or not the short-time gaming state is added is determined based on the gaming state.

  The fifth advantageous game state generated by the fifth advantageous game state control means 2933e occurs when the lottery result of the first win / fail decision means 2930a is the fifth result. At this time, giving a predetermined profit to the player by the predetermined profit granting means 2982 and giving a predetermined profit by the high probability state setting means 2983 are the same as in the third advantageous gaming state. In the advantageous gaming state, when the third advantageous gaming state is generated when not in the short-time gaming state, the short-time gaming state is not generated and the probability variation state is set. On the other hand, when the gaming state is the short-time gaming state, when the third advantageous gaming state occurs, the second short-time state setting means 2985 is operated to generate the short-time gaming state.

  In this example, the winning ratio of each big hit is distributed differently in the case of the first winning / failing determination means 2930a and the second winning / failing determination means 2930b. Specifically, in the lottery result of the first win / fail determination means 2930a, the first big hit generated by the first advantageous gaming state control means 2933a, that is, the probability fluctuation state where both the probability fluctuation state and a certain number of short-time gaming states are given. The big hit is set to 22% of the total big hit, and the second big hit generated by the second advantageous gaming state control means 2933b, that is, the normal big hit where the short-time gaming state is given a certain number of times without being given the probability variation state. It is set to 45%. Further, the third big hit generated by the third advantageous gaming state control means 2933c, that is, the probability variation state and the special big hit to which the conditional short time gaming state is given is set to 11%, and the fourth advantageous gaming state control means 2933d. Is set to 11%, and the fifth big hit generated by the fifth advantageous gaming state control means 2933e is set to 11%. That is, the special jackpot to which the probability variation state and the conditional short-time game state are given is set to 11%.

  On the other hand, in the lottery result of the second win / fail decision means 2930a, the first big hit generated by the first advantageous gaming state control means 2933a is set to 44% of the entire big hit, and the second advantageous gaming state control means 2933b generates the first big hit. The two big hits are set to 56%. The second hit / fail determining means 2930b is set so as not to generate a special big hit, that is, the third big hit, the fourth big hit and the fifth big hit. For this reason, it is possible to reliably prevent the probability fluctuation state from being terminated without giving a specific profit, and to suppress a significant decrease in gaming motivation due to sudden demotion. In addition, the ratio of the first big hit to the fifth big hit, which is the first big hit or the second big hit that gives a specific profit, is higher in the second winning / decision determining means 2930b. In the jackpot lottery by the first winning / decision determining means 2930a, it is possible to limit the occurrence of jackpots to which a specific profit is given to some extent while the opening / closing prize winning device 1404 is opened relatively frequently. On the other hand, in the big hit lottery by the second winning / decision determining means 2930b that is substantially effective in the short-time gaming state, there is a high possibility that a specific profit will be given. However, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming motivation.

  By the way, as shown in FIG. 121, the main control board 1350 has a normal winning determination random number extraction means 2924 as a configuration related to the normal lottery (lottery for increasing the ease of winning the second start port 1421). A normal hit determination table 2926 and a normal hit determination unit 2925 are provided. The normal hit determination random number extraction means 2924 extracts a normal hit determination random number from a random counter (random number generation means) when the entrance to the passing gate 1405 is detected by the incoming ball state detection means 2990 (gate sensor). To do. The normal hit determination table 2926 is divided into a high probability table and a normal probability table. In the high probability normal hit determination table, 251 normal hit determination random numbers from 0 to 250 are stored. Of these, 250 determination values for normal hit are set, and the probability of normal hit is 250/251. On the other hand, in the normal normal hit determination table, one of the determination values for normal hit is set out of 251 normal hit determination random numbers from 0 to 250, and the probability of normal hit is 1/251. ing. In the normal lottery at high probability, the variation time of the normal symbol is set to 13.56 seconds, the opening time of the movable piece 1427 by the start port solenoid 2352 is 1180 ms, the number of times of opening is 3, and the interval between opening is It is set to 512 ms. On the other hand, in the normal lottery at the normal time, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to 13.6 seconds on average, the opening time of the movable piece 1427 is set to 180 ms, and the number of times of opening is set once.

  Further, when the normal hit determination random number extraction means 2924 extracts the normal hit determination random number 2924, the normal hit determination unit 2925 extracts the random number and the normal hit determination value stored in the normal hit determination table 2926. Are determined to be normal hits if they match. At this time, the gaming state determination means 2923 determines whether or not the gaming state is a specific gaming state, that is, a short-time gaming state, and if it is a short-time gaming state, a table with a high probability is selected and the short-time gaming is selected. If not, the normal table is selected. For this reason, even in the case of the first big hit generated by the first advantageous gaming state control means 2933a, when the short-time gaming state is completed for a certain number of times, the table at the high probability is switched to the normal table.

  When the normal lottery determination unit 2925 determines whether or not the normal lottery is determined on the main control board 1350, the normal symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display 2928 in a variable manner and the change time (about 14 seconds or about 1 second). After the elapse of time, a normal symbol fluctuation control means 2927 is provided for displaying the result of success / failure. Further, when the normal hit determination unit 2925 determines that the normal hit is determined, after the normal symbol fluctuation is stopped, the movable piece 1427 is opened, and the opening control unit 2929 that makes it easy to win the game ball in the second start port 1421. Is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 122, when the control information command transmitted from the main control board 1350 is received by the command receiving means 2951, the peripheral board 2811 has various functions for controlling the liquid crystal display device 640 on the basis thereof. Is provided.

  That is, as the effect table corresponding to the first big hit lottery, the first hit effect mode table 2952a and the first off time effect mode table 2953a are stored in advance, and based on these tables 2952a and 2953a, The production mode in the step production and the development production is determined.

  First, the production mode tables 2952a and 2953a will be described in detail. The first hit effect mode table 2952a is used in the case of a big hit (or small hit), and shows the relationship between a random number for determining an effect (described later) and an effect mode (in this case, an effect pattern in a step effect or an extended effect). It is shown. The first off-time effect mode table 2953a is a table used in the case of a loss, and shows the relationship between the effect determination random number and the effect pattern.

  Peripheral board 2881 is provided with first effect random number extraction means 2957a for extracting effect determination random numbers from a random counter (not shown) and first effect mode determination means 2958a for determining effect patterns. Upon receiving the control command via the command receiving means 2951, the first effect mode determining means 2958a extracts the effect random number by the first effect random number extracting means 2957a and the success / failure command included in the control command is a big hit (or In the case of indicating a small hit), an effect pattern is determined from the effect random number extracted by the first effect random number extraction means 2957a and the effect effect table 2952a at the time of first hit, while the success / failure command is determined. In the case of indicating an outage, the effect pattern is determined from the effect random number extracted by the first effect random number extraction means 2957a and the effect-of-first effect mode table 2953a.

  The effect pattern determined by the first effect mode determining means 2958a is extracted from the effect pattern storage means (not shown) and sent to the first effect display control means 2975a. The first effect display control means 2975a reads out the images of those effects from the image storage means (not shown) and derives them to the liquid crystal display device 640. Here, the first effect display control means 2975a corresponds to the effect control means of the present invention.

  On the other hand, a first decorative symbol variation control means 2976a is provided as a functional configuration relating to the production of the first decorative symbol. Based on the control command received by the command receiving unit 2951, the first decorative symbol variation control unit 2976a reads and varies the stop symbol from the first decorative symbol storage unit (not shown), and includes the variation included in the control command. The decorative design is stopped based on the time, the success / failure command, etc. (that is, the lottery result).

  In the above description, the effects related to the first big hit lottery have been described, but the peripheral board 2881 is also provided with a functional configuration for performing effects related to the second big hit lottery. Specifically, a second winning effect mode table 2952b and a second off-time effect mode table 2953b are stored in advance as effect tables corresponding to the second big hit lottery, and these tables 2952b and 2953b are Based on this, the production mode in the step production and the development production is determined. The production mode tables 2952b and 2953b have the same configuration as the production mode tables 2952a and 2953a corresponding to the first big hit lottery, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted here.

  In addition, on the peripheral board 2881, corresponding to the second big hit lottery, the second effect random number extraction means 2957b, the second effect mode determination means 2958b, the second effect display control means 2975b, and the second decorative symbol variation control means. 2976b is provided, but since these configurations also have the same functions as the functional configurations corresponding to the first big hit lottery, detailed description thereof is omitted. Here, the second effect display control means 2975b corresponds to the effect control means of the present invention.

  The peripheral board 2881 is provided with a decorative symbol sequence variation display means 2960 and a big hit display means 2964. The decorative symbol sequence fluctuation display means 2960 is based on the outputs of the first decorative symbol fluctuation control means 2976a and the second decorative symbol fluctuation control means 2976b or based on the control command received by the command receiving means 2951. While changing a row | line | column, based on the fluctuation | variation time contained in the control command, a success / failure command, etc. (namely, lottery result), a common decoration symbol row | line | column is stopped in order. In particular, a combination of decorative symbols (stopped symbols) that have already stopped on the active line at the stage before the last stopped symbol sequence that is stopped last among a plurality of common decorative symbol sequences is a specific decorative symbol When the above combination is satisfied, the reach state is established by using the already stopped decorative symbol as the reach formation symbol.

  The jackpot display means 2964 performs the lottery when the lottery result of the first jackpot lottery or the second jackpot lottery is the first jackpot or the second jackpot, that is, when the “probable big hit” or “normal jackpot”. After stopping the variation of the common decorative design sequence, it is displayed that “big hit”. In addition, when the lottery result of the first big hit lottery or the second big hit lottery is the third big hit, the fourth big hit, or the fifth big hit, it is not displayed as “winning”, and the common decorative design column After the change is stopped, the effect related to the lottery is finished.

<Operation of distribution effect device 1444>
Next, the operation in the distribution effect device 1444 will be described with reference to FIGS. 98, 124, and 125. 124 is a block diagram showing a control configuration in the distribution effect device 1444, and FIG. 125 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration when a table is used in the control in the distribution effect device 1444.

  As described above, as shown in FIG. 98, the distribution effector 1444 is provided with the three inflow ports 1480. These inflow ports 1480 are the latent expectation large region and the latent expectation small region, respectively. It is to be assigned. Here, the latent expectation large region is a region that suggests that there is a high possibility that the probability variation state is latent (probability of generating the probability variation state). In addition, the latent expectation small region is a region that suggests that the probability variation state is latent (the probability of generating the probability variation state) is low. As shown in FIG. 124, the distribution effect device 1444 includes a lottery result recognition unit 3001 and a region selection unit 3010 as functional configurations. The lottery result recognition unit 3001 determines whether the lottery result by the first win / fail decision unit 2930a or the second win / fail decision unit 2930b is the first result or the second result and a specific profit is given, and further specifies In the case where the profit is given, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit that gives the probability fluctuation state, that is, whether the probability change big hit by the first result or the normal big hit by the second result. The area selection means 3010 determines an area into which a game ball is sent based on the determination result of the lottery result recognition means 3001 when performing an effect.

  More specifically, the area selection means 3010 determines the ratio of the latent expectation large area to be selected when the lottery result by the first success / failure determination means 2930a or the second success / failure determination means 2930b is the first result. On the other hand, if the lottery result by the first success / failure determination means 2930a or the second success / failure determination means 2930b is the second result, the ratio that the latent expectation small area is selected is set as the latency expectation. It is higher than the ratio that the large area is selected. For this reason, when the probability variation big hit occurs (when the probability variation state is latent), the rolling direction of the game ball is switched to the latent expectation large region side and the game ball reaches the latent expectation large region. Is more likely to do. On the other hand, when a big hit usually occurs (when the probability variation state is not latent), the rolling direction of the game ball can be switched to the latent expectation small area side and the game ball can reach the latent expectation small area Increases nature. Therefore, the probability variation state is latent by recognizing whether the inlet 1480 that the game ball has reached is the inlet 1480 corresponding to the large latent expectation region or the inlet 1480 corresponding to the small latent expectation region. It is possible to grasp the possibility (expectation). As a result, attention can be paid to the behavior of the game ball, and the visual interest can be enhanced by the effect using the game ball.

  In addition, the region selecting unit 3010 determines an inflow port assigned as a large expected latent region from among the plurality of inflow ports 1480. That is, before starting the production, a lottery for assigning each inflow port 1480 to the latent expectation large area and the latent expectation small area is performed. This makes it possible to change the position of the latent expectation large region every time, and to make the rolling direction of the game ball rich in changes. That is, it is possible to eliminate distrust due to reaching only the same inlet 1480.

  Particularly, the area selecting means 3010 is provided with a number determining means 3011, and the number of inflow ports 1480 to be assigned as the latent expectation large area is determined based on the lottery. For this reason, when the number of inflow ports 1480 assigned as the latent expectation large region is large, it is felt that the possibility of reaching the latent expectation large region has increased, while the number of inflow ports assigned as the latent expectation small region is high. If there are many, it can be felt that the possibility of reaching the large latent expectation area has decreased, and as a result, the production can be sharpened.

  In addition, the distribution effect device 1444 is provided with a notification unit 3017, which is assigned when the region selection unit 3010 assigns each inflow port 1480 to the latent expectation large region and the latent expectation small region. The player is notified of the information on the information, that is, which inflow port 1480 is set as the latent expectation large area. Specifically, the notification means 3017 controls the first light emitting substrate 1500 to light up the light emitting diodes 1503 arranged around the inflow port 1480 assigned to the latent expectation large area in red, while in the latent expectation small area. The light emitting diodes 1503 arranged around the assigned inlet 1480 are lit in blue. For this reason, it is possible to easily identify the large latent expectation region and the small latent expectation region based on the emission color.

  The distribution effect device 1444 also includes a drive pattern storage unit 3003 that stores a plurality of drive patterns in advance as the operation mode of the guide member 1490, and one drive pattern from the drive pattern storage unit 3003 prior to the start of the operation. Drive pattern determining means 3002 determined based on the lottery and operation control means 3008 for operating the sorting motor 1493 according to the drive pattern determined by the drive pattern determining means 3002 are further provided. Therefore, not only the behavior of the game ball but also the movement of the guide member 1490 can be varied, and the visual interest can be further enhanced.

  The drive pattern will be described in detail. The drive pattern storage unit 3003 stores at least four drive patterns, that is, a continuous operation pattern 3004, a frame advance pattern 3005, a movable range restriction pattern 3006, and a fixed pattern 3007. When the continuous operation pattern 3004 is selected, the guide member 1490 is rotated like a pendulum at a substantially constant speed, and the tip of the guide member 1490 is sequentially opposed to the respective inflow ports 1480. On the other hand, when the frame advance pattern 3005 is selected, the guide member 1490 is intermittently operated, and the guide member 1490 is temporarily stopped every time the leading end of the guide member 1490 is opposed to each inflow port 1480. For this reason, even when the timing at which the stopped state of the game ball is released is the same and the position of the guide member 1490 at the time of release is the same, different inflow ports 1480 may be reached. As a result, it is possible to pay attention to the whereabouts of the game ball while associating the drive pattern of the guide member 1490 and the timing at which the game ball is released.

  When the movable range restriction pattern 3006 is selected, two inlets including an inlet selected from among the three inlets 1480 are specified, and the guide member 1490 is moved to the two specified inlets. The operation of rotating so as to oppose only to is performed. For this reason, even when the number of inflow ports allocated as the large latent expectation region is smaller than the number of inflow ports allocated as the small latent expectation region, for example, the movable range of the guide member 1490 is two flow regions. When restricted between entrances (expected latent area and small expected latent area), it is possible to make the game ball feel more likely to reach the large expected latent area, increasing the game motivation. It becomes possible.

  When the fixed pattern 3007 is selected, the leading end of the guide member 1490 is fixed in a state of facing the latent expectation large region. For this reason, when this fixed pattern 3007 is reached, it is almost determined that the game ball reaches the latent expectation large area, and the expectation for the occurrence of the probability variation state is surely increased, and the player has a sense of superiority. Can be given.

  The area selection unit 3010 including the number determination unit 3011 and the drive pattern determination unit 3002 determine all the distribution conditions based on the lottery result determined by the lottery result recognition unit 3001 and one random number. It is also possible. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 125, a distribution random number extraction means 3020 for extracting distribution random numbers for determining control in the distribution effect device 1444, a first distribution operation variable table 3022, and the like. The second distribution operation variable table 3023 and the distribution condition determination means 3021 may be provided. The first distribution operation variable table 3022 is used when the lottery result by the first success / failure determination unit 2930a or the second success / failure determination unit 2930b is the first result, and is used as a latent expectation large region from among the plurality of inflow ports 1480. The distribution conditions including the position of the inflow port 1480 to be assigned, the position of the inflow port 1480 to which the game ball is sent, and the drive pattern which is the operation mode of the guide member 1490, and the distribution extracted by the random number extraction means 3020 for distribution This shows the relationship with the random number. The second sorting operation variable table 3023 is used when the lottery result by the first winning / failing determination unit 2930a or the second winning / failing determination unit 2930b is the second result. The relationship with the random number for distribution extracted by the random number for random number extraction means 3020 is shown.

  Then, the distribution condition determining unit 3021 extracts the distribution random number from the distribution random number and the first distribution operation variable table 3022 when the random number for distribution is extracted and the lottery result is the first result. When the distribution condition in 1444 is determined and the random number for distribution is extracted and the lottery result is the second result, the distribution condition is determined from the distribution random number and the second distribution operation variable table 3023. To decide.

  The first distribution operation variable table 3022 and the second distribution operation variable table 3023 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. FIG. 126 is a table showing the relationship between the distribution condition and the distribution rate in the first distribution operation variable table 3022 and the second distribution operation variable table 3023. In this table, “the driving pattern and the position of the inlet 1480 through which the game ball is sent” is shown as “how to move” as the variation condition, and “the flow assigned to the large expected latent area from the plurality of inlets 1480”. The “position of the entrance 1480” is shown as the “red position”. The combinations of these variation conditions are distinguished into 40 patterns, and one pattern is selected from the 40 patterns based on the random number for distribution. Here, in “how to move”, “normal” refers to the continuous motion pattern 3004, “frame advance” refers to the frame advance pattern 3005, and “alternate choice” refers to the movable range restriction pattern. It is 3006 and “all the middle” is the fixed pattern 3007. Further, “right” refers to the right inlet 1480a, “middle” refers to the middle inlet 1480b, and “left” refers to the left inlet 1480c. Also, “right”, “middle”, “left”, etc. in which only one direction is shown is “the game ball reaches when the tip of the guide member 1490 faces the selected inlet 1480. "Indicating that a game ball is to be sent to", and "Left → middle", "Right → middle", etc., indicating a change in direction, indicate that "the tip of the guide member 1490 is directed toward the selected inlet 1480. The game ball is sent in such a way that it can be reached in the middle of turning.

  In the “red position”, the state of the left inlet 1480c, the middle inlet 1480b, and the right inlet 1480a is shown in order from the left, and “◯” indicates the latent expectation large region. “×” indicates a small latent expectation region. In other words, as shown in Pattern 2, if the “red position” is “XXX” and the “movement” is “normal right”, the right flow that is the large latent expectation region is performed while performing the continuous motion pattern. This indicates that the game ball is sent so that the game ball reaches the entrance 1480a.

  On the other hand, regarding the allocation rate, the allocation rate when the lottery result is the first result is shown as “probability change (7 symbols)” and “probability change (other than 7 symbols)”, and the lottery result is the second result The distribution rate is shown as “when uncertain change”. In addition, when the lottery result is the first result, the case where the decorative symbol sequence is stopped at the stop symbol of “7, 7, 7” (probability change (7 symbols)) and the case where the symbol is stopped at another stop symbol (probability change). (Other than 7 symbols)), and when stopping at “7, 7, 7”, all “middle” of the pattern 40 is selected.

  As can be seen from this distribution table, a probability variation jackpot has occurred (in the case of the first result), and in all cases other than “7” symbols, all 40 types of patterns are to be selected. . In this case, the possibility of selecting the large latent expectation area is very high, but the distribution ratio is set so that the small latent expectation area may be selected. On the other hand, when a big hit has occurred (when the lottery result is the second result), the latent expectation small area is always selected without selecting the latent expectation large area. For this reason, when a game ball reaches the latent expectation large area, it can be suggested that the probability variation state is very likely to be hidden, while the game ball has reached the latent expectation small area. In some cases, although the probability is low, it is possible to suggest that there is still a possibility that the probability variation state is latent. Therefore, it is impossible to clearly grasp that the lottery result is the second result (that is, usually a big hit), the loss of expectation due to the inflow of game balls into the latent expectation small area, and the accompanying game motivation It is possible to reduce the decrease.

  In this way, using the first sorting action variable table 3022 corresponding to the first result (probability big hit) and the second sorting action variable table 3023 corresponding to the second result (normal big hit), In order to determine the distribution condition, allocation when the probability variation state occurs and allocation when the probability variation state does not occur can be set individually, and the distribution condition is relatively easy It becomes possible to decide. In particular, since each of the sorting operation variable tables 3022 and 3023 is stored in a form in which a plurality of sorting conditions are combined, all the sorting conditions are determined by only one sorting random number. As a result, it is possible to reduce the burden of control related to the distribution effect and to quickly determine the distribution condition.

  On the other hand, as described above with reference to FIG. 98, the guide passage member 1445 is provided with the stopping means 1515 so that one of the game balls won in the big winning opening can be stopped. As shown in FIG. 124, the distribution effect device 1444 includes release control means 3016. The release control means 3016 releases the game ball from being stopped by the stop means 1515, and the game balls being stopped are displayed. It flows down to the guide passage member 1445 at a predetermined timing. In particular, the release control means 3016 includes the inlet 1480 selected by the area selecting means 3010 so that the game ball that has reached the guide member 1490 rolls toward the inlet 1480 selected by the area selecting means 3010. Based on the position of the guide member 1490, the timing for releasing the stationary state is determined, and the stationary motor 2560 is driven at the determined timing. Note that the timing for releasing the stationary state is individually set for each of the 40 types of patterns shown in FIG.

  Further, as a means for detecting the position of the guiding member 1490, a reference position detecting means 3015 and a time measuring means 3014 are provided. The reference position detection unit 3015 detects that the guide member 1490 is positioned at a predetermined reference point, and can be exemplified by a switch (switch), for example. The time measuring means 3014 measures the elapsed time from the time point away from the reference point. That is, the current position of the guide member 1490 is recognized based on the elapsed time measured by the time measuring means 3014. According to this, since the position of the guide member is detected based on the reference point and the elapsed time, it can be realized with a very simple configuration.

  By the way, the distribution effect device 1444 is configured to execute the operation of the guide member 1490 and the operation of feeding the game ball while giving a specific benefit. For this reason, it can be made to recognize that the specific profit was provided and the production contents to be performed are related to each other. In particular, while giving a specific profit, an effect for suggesting a future gaming state is performed, so that a sense of satisfaction and a sense of tension are mixed, and the interest in the pachinko machine 1 can be further enhanced. In addition, the guide member 1490 is stopped in the normal state, and the guide member 1490 starts to move when the probability variation state may occur. Therefore, the operation of the guide member 1490 that cannot be normally seen is visually recognized. By this, it is possible to make the player know that there is a possibility that a probability variation state will occur, and this can arouse an exciting mood.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 122, the distribution effect device 1444 includes operation explanation notification means 964 and distribution result notification means 2996, and the operation explanation notification means 964 repeats the opening / closing operation of the open / close prize winning device 1404. Of the plurality of rounds to be performed, the operation explanation of the distribution effect device 1444 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640 in the initial round. Then, in the middle or final round of the plurality of rounds, the game ball feeding operation, that is, the stopping control of the stopping means 1515 is performed, and then the distribution result notifying means 2996 is based on the destination of the game balls. The effect is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640 as a lottery result.

  A specific effect example will be described with reference to FIGS. 127 and 128. 127 and 128 are specific effect images displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640 during the distribution effect. First, as shown in FIG. 127 (a), the liquid crystal display device 640 displays the character C and displays that an effect of selecting either “chance time” or “special time” is performed. The Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 127 (b) and 127 (c), when entering the red inflow port, it is displayed that the transition to the “special time” with a high degree of expectation is made, and otherwise, the transition to the “chance time” is displayed. . Further, as shown in FIG. 127 (d), “shuffle start” indicating that the position of the red inflow port is changed is displayed, and after a predetermined time from the display, or the player operates the push button device 330 or the rendering operation. After the time determined based on the timing when the button 1803 is pressed, “the position of the red inflow port has been determined” is displayed (see FIG. 128 (e)).

  After that, as shown in FIG. 128 (f), it is displayed that attention is paid to the pounding stage, that is, attention is paid to the distribution of the game balls in the distribution effect device 1444. Canceled.

  When the game balls are distributed and flow into one of the inlets 1480, either one of FIG. 128 (g) or FIG. 128 (h) is displayed based on the inlet. That is, when the game ball reaches the inflow port 1480 (red inflow port) corresponding to the large latent expectation area, “entering special time” is displayed as shown in FIG. When the inflow port 1480 (blue inflow port) corresponding to the area is reached, “entering the chance time” is displayed as shown in (h). Thus, since the operation explanation and the distribution result regarding the contents of the effect are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640, it is possible to easily understand the contents of the effect and to increase the player's motivation.

  By the way, in the above distribution effect, it is necessary to enter a game ball from the open / close winning device 1404 arranged on the right side of the center accessory 1401 and guide it to the distribution effect device 1444 by the guide passage member 1445. That is, when performing this effect, it is necessary to maximize the firing strength of the hitting ball launcher 650 and send the game ball to the game area 605 on the right side of the center accessory 1401.

  Therefore, in the effect example shown in FIG. 27, the shooting information is displayed in the effect image as “Please hit right”, so that the player is notified of the so-called “right strike”. That is, as shown in FIG. 129, the peripheral control board 2830 is provided with the advantageous target display control means 1866 as a functional configuration, and the shooting information is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640. However, it may be difficult for a player unfamiliar with the game to understand where or how much to operate with only the shooting information displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640. There is a risk that you will miss the chance of distribution.

  Therefore, in this example, the light emitting unit 1809 of the sliding operation unit 1703 is turned on in accordance with the shooting information displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640. That is, as shown in FIG. 129, as a functional configuration, the state recognition means 1860 for recognizing the game state and the game content, and the advantageous game state advantageous to the player based on the recognized game state or game content. Advantageous target identifying means 1861 for identifying an advantageous target such as an advantageous region that can be generated, and light emission control means for suggesting an advantageous target to the player by controlling the light emitting unit 1809 based on the identified advantageous target. 1862. Specifically, when displaying the effect image of the distribution effect, the light emitting element 1856 provided in the light emitting unit 1809 is controlled to emit red light. According to this, light is transmitted only from the first and second color filters provided on the translucent resin member 1838 of the sliding operation unit 1703, and as shown in FIG. M appears. Therefore, the player can grasp the advantageous target (in this case, increase the firing strength) by visually recognizing the display mode of the sliding operation unit 1703 so that the advantageous target is reached. The sliding operation unit 1703 can be operated. In addition, it is possible to assist the player's operation by turning on the light emitting portion 1809 and the appearance of the letter M, so that even an inexperienced player can enjoy the game with peace of mind.

  Further, the peripheral control board 2830 is recognized as an operation position recognition unit 1864 that recognizes the operation position of the sliding operation unit 1703 by a voltage signal corresponding to the resistance value of the second variable resistor 1863 as a functional configuration. When the sliding operation unit 1703 matches the operation position of the sliding operation unit 1703 specified by the advantageous target specifying means 1861 (specifically, the sliding operation unit 1703 has been operated to the position corresponding to the maximum strength). ), A target position arrival notifying means 1865 for changing the light emission state of the light emitting unit 1809 is provided. The light emission control unit 1862 includes a light emission mode switching unit 1863, and changes the color of light emitted from the light emitting unit 1809 from red to green based on the output of the target position arrival notification unit 1865. According to this, light is transmitted only from the first and third color filters provided on the translucent resin member 1838, and a “smile pattern” E appears as shown in FIG. For this reason, the player can tell the sliding operation unit 1703 whether or not the operation position of the sliding operation unit 1703 can be adjusted to an appropriate position, that is, a position suitable for driving the game ball into the advantageous area. This can be confirmed on the basis of the displayed picture E and the change in the emission color. As a result, the game ball can be driven with an appropriate strength, and a sense of security can be given to the player.

  Note that the peripheral board 2881 is provided with information presentation control means 1867, and information on a change in the light emission state that occurs when the operation position of the sliding operation unit 1703 coincides with the target operation position is stored in the liquid crystal display device 640 in advance. It is made to display. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 127, an effect image in which a character C wearing the same face and green clothes as the “smile pattern E” shown in FIG. 130 (b) appears is displayed. ing. According to this, even a player who does not grasp the relationship between the operation position of the sliding operation unit 1703 and the light emission mode (the pattern E appearing on the sliding operation unit 1703) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640. Based on the information (that is, the color of the face and clothes of the character C), it is possible to predict how the light emission mode changes, and the change in the light emission mode can be used as guide information.

  Thus, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the sliding operation unit 1703 is placed on the sliding guide surface 1720, the sliding operation is performed in a substantially horizontal direction. With the hand placed on the sliding operation unit 1703 or with the sliding operation unit 1703 gripped from above, the firing strength of the ball striking device 650, that is, a game ball that is driven into the game area 605 is displaced in the horizontal direction. It becomes possible to adjust the momentum. Therefore, it is easy to adjust the launch intensity in the hit ball launching device 650, and it is possible to operate with a comfortable posture. In addition, since the sliding operation unit 1703 placed on a substantially horizontal plane is gripped from above, the sliding operation unit 1703 can be stably held with a light force. In particular, friction between the sliding operation unit 1703 and the sliding guide surface 1720 can be generated using the weight of the hand or arm, and the arm force necessary to hold the sliding operation unit 1703 can be increased. It can be greatly reduced. Furthermore, since the entire palm can be positioned on the operation base 1702, there is no unstable feeling that the arm is floating, and there is no twist of the arm, so that the player's fatigue is greatly reduced. Can do.

  In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the sliding guide surface 1720 of the operation base 1702 has a fan shape in plan view, and the sliding operation unit 1703 has a rotary shaft coupling portion whose axial direction is a substantially vertical direction. Since the sliding guide surface 1720 is relatively small, the tip portion of the sliding operation unit 1703 can be greatly displaced, and the firing strength can be finely adjusted easily. It becomes. Moreover, the sliding operation part 1703 can be slid only by the wrist bending operation, and the operability and stability can be further enhanced.

  In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the presentation operation button 1803 that functions as a presentation switch is provided in the sliding operation unit 1703, and thus the presentation operation button is held at the fingertip of the hand holding the sliding operation unit 1703. 1803 can be pressed. For this reason, it becomes possible to operate the production operation button 1803 with the finger of the dominant hand without interrupting the game ball. In addition, the player can operate the production operation button 1803 with almost no change in posture, thereby reducing the player's burden and quietly participating in the production without worrying about the eyes of others. be able to. In particular, since the presentation operation button 1803 is disposed on the distal end side of the sliding operation unit 1703, it is possible to press the presentation operation button 1803 with the fingertip while holding the sliding operation unit 1703 with the palm. Therefore, one-handed operation is facilitated and the willingness to operate can be increased.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a signal corresponding to the operation position of the sliding operation unit 1703 is output from the sliding position detection means 1714, and the firing strength of the hitting ball launching device 650 is controlled based on the output. Therefore, it is possible to adjust the launch intensity by electrically controlling the hit ball launching device 650, and the configuration of the hit ball launching device 650 can be simplified. Furthermore, the operation unit 1700 including the sliding operation unit 1703 can be arranged at a position away from the ball hitting device 650, and the degree of design freedom can be increased.

  In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the push button device 330 that is fixedly mounted on the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5 is further provided, and an effect mode that appears is an operation of the push button device 330. Since it can be changed based on the combination of the push button device 330 arranged on the plate unit 300 and the production operation button 1803 arranged on the sliding operation unit 1703, the production mode can be changed in various ways. And the usability of the player can be improved. For example, if the effect operation button 1803 and the push button device 330 are caused to function as the same switch, the player can select a desired switch according to the gaming state and usability, and repeatedly press the switch. If the operation itself is interesting, use the push button device 330 that is relatively large and fixed to the dish unit 300, while if you want to operate quietly with your dominant hand, use the sliding operation Selection such as using a presentation operation button 1803 provided in the section 1703 becomes possible. Therefore, usage according to the player's preference is possible, and interest in the production can be further enhanced.

  On the other hand, if the production operation button 1803 and the push button device 330 are recognized as separate switches, the production operation button 1803 and the push button device 330 can share and associate the function of changing the production mode. It becomes possible. Therefore, by changing the production mode in a more complicated manner and by making the change in each production mode correspond to the switch suitable for the change, the interest in the production can be further enhanced.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the slide operation unit 1703 slides in a substantially horizontal direction, whereas the effect operation button 1803 is pressed in a direction substantially perpendicular to the slide direction, that is, downward. Therefore, even if the presentation operation button 1803 is pressed, it is possible to prevent a force from being applied to the side where the sliding operation unit 1703 is displaced, and the sliding operation unit 1703 held at a predetermined position is used for the presentation operation button 1803. It can suppress that it moves unexpectedly by operation of. In other words, the effect operation button 1803 can be operated while keeping the firing strength of the hit ball launching device 650 constant.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation base 1702 is provided with a wiring hole 1724 for inserting an electric wire connected to the effect switch 1805 and the stop switch 1806 near the rotation center. Therefore, even if the sliding operation unit 1703 is displaced, the rotating shaft side of the sliding operation unit 1703 and the wiring hole 1724 can always be overlapped, and consequently, the sliding guide surface 1720 without exposing the electric wire. To the space below.

  In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the light emitting unit 1809 is disposed inside the sliding operation unit 1703, a part of the sliding operation unit 1703 can be seen shining. The decoration of the operation unit 1703 can be enhanced and the presence thereof can be made conspicuous. In particular, since the light emitting unit 1809 is displaced together with the sliding operation unit 1703, it is possible to clearly see how the sliding operation unit 1703 slides, and to greatly enhance the effect of light.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the light emission mode of the light emitting unit 1809 changes based on the advantageous target, the player visually recognizes the light emission state of the sliding operation unit 1703, so that the advantageous target ( That is, it is possible to grasp that the firing intensity is the strongest). In addition, since the light emitting unit 1809 functions not only as a decoration effect but also as a means for allowing the player to grasp a change in the gaming state, the light emitting state of the sliding operation unit 1703 can be visually recognized while being associated with the gaming state. The degree of attention of the sliding operation unit 1703 can be further increased.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the light emitting unit 1809 is turned on, the translucent resin member 1838 of the sliding operation unit 1703 is warmed by the generated Joule heat, so that the player's hand has a sense of temperature. Can be generated. Accordingly, even if the user does not directly notice that the light emitting unit 1809 is turned on, attention can be directed to the sliding operation unit 1703 by a unique sensation that is not usually felt, such as a temperature sensation. In particular, when the sliding operation unit 1703 is covered with a hand, the light-transmitting resin member 1838 is looked into from the gap between the sliding operation unit 1703 and the hand, or the hand is removed from the sliding operation unit 1703. Thus, since the lighting state of the light emitting unit 1809 can be visually recognized, it is possible to arouse a feeling of excitement as if opening the ball box, and to further enhance the interest of the game.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation position of the sliding operation unit 1703 is detected, and the operation position matches the target operation position (specifically, the strongest position) of the sliding operation unit 1703. In order to change the light emission state of the light emitting unit 1809, the player determines whether or not the operation position of the sliding operation unit 1703 can be adjusted to the maximum intensity position based on the light emission mode of the light emitting unit 1809. Can be confirmed, and as a result, a sense of security can be given to the player.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the operation position of the sliding operation unit 1703 coincides with the target operation position, the emission color of the light emitting unit 1809 changes from red to green. Prior to this, since information regarding the change is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640, the color of the light emitting unit 1809 arranged on the sliding operation unit 1703 is slid so as to match the color displayed on the liquid crystal display device 640. It is possible to make the operation position of the sliding operation unit 1703 coincide with the target operation position simply by operating the dynamic operation unit 1703. Therefore, it can be adjusted to the target operation position very easily, and the interest can be enhanced by the color matching.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the first to fourth color filters 1839 are provided on the surface of the translucent resin member 1838, corresponding to the color of light projected from the light emitting unit 1809, The display mode can be changed. For this reason, giving a monotonous impression to a player can be suppressed and it becomes possible to raise interest. In addition, since the display mode of a pattern or the like can be changed simply by changing the color of the light emitting portion 1809, the configuration can be extremely simple and small.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation base 1702 of the operation unit 1700 is installed on the front surface of the door-shaped front member 5 positioned below the dish unit 300, so that the operation positions are compared. And the player's fatigue can be further suppressed. Further, since the upper tray unit 300 is provided so as to protrude toward the player side, the operation unit 1700 can be prevented from being a target for hitting the player's dissatisfaction or the player's feet being placed. .

  The present invention has been described with reference to preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above embodiment, two types of light emitting elements 1856 that emit light of different colors are provided, and the emission color is switched according to the sliding operation of the sliding operation unit 1703. Depending on the sliding operation, the energization amount to each light emitting element 1856 may be changed stepwise or continuously. Specifically, it includes a light emitting element that emits “red” light and a light emitting element that emits “blue” light, and emits “blue” light for the weakest emission intensity. For a strong state, “red” light may be emitted, and the energization amount ratio may be changed stepwise so that “redness” increases as the emission intensity increases. If comprised in this way, it will become possible to raise the production effect by light significantly.

  In the above-described embodiment, the character M and the pattern E are shown by using the plurality of color filters 1839. However, the light emitted from the light emitting unit 1809 is directly emitted through the translucent resin member 1838. You may do it. In this case, the shape of each light emitting element 1856 in the light emitting portion 1809 may be clearly seen, but the translucent resin member 1838 may be formed of a translucent member or radiated through an irregular reflection sheet. By doing so, the translucent resin member 1838 may be made to shine as a whole.

  In the above-described embodiment, the light emitting mode of the light emitting unit 1809 is changed in accordance with the execution of the distribution effect and the operation position of the sliding operation unit 1703. However, other game states, operation states, or players The light emission mode of the light emitting unit 1809 may be changed based on other operation states. For example, the light emission mode may be changed according to the operation of the effect operation button 1803.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the light emission mode of the light emitting unit 1809 is shown by changing the emission color. However, the luminance of the light emitting unit 1809 is changed by controlling the amount of current supplied to the light emitting unit 1809. Also good. According to this, it is possible to make the firing intensity of the hit ball launching device 650 correspond to the luminance (brightness) of the light emitting unit 1809, and the player can grasp the launching intensity based on the brightness of the light emitting unit 1809. Become. In particular, when control is performed such that the energization amount to the light emitting unit 1809 increases as the emission intensity increases, the light emitted from the sliding operation unit 1703 increases because the luminance of the light emitting unit 1809 increases as the emission intensity increases. Can be given an impression that the energy is converted into energy that blows out the game ball, and the willingness to operate the sliding operation unit 1703 can be increased.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 131, a plurality of light emitting elements 1872a to 1872c associated in advance with the magnitude of the firing intensity in the ball hitting device 650 are provided, and the ball hitting device 650 is selected from among the plurality of light emitting elements 1872a to 1872c. The light emitting element corresponding to the firing intensity (specifically, the operation position of the sliding operation unit 1703) may be turned on. According to this, the player can grasp the firing strength of the hit ball launching device 650 by visually recognizing the position of the light emitting element to be lit. In particular, by switching the light emitting states of the plurality of light emitting elements 1872a to 1872c, it becomes possible to show the emission intensity stepwise and to clearly discriminate changes in the light emitting state. It is also possible to turn on or blink a light emitting element corresponding to an advantageous target from among a plurality of light emitting elements 1872a to 1872c. According to this, the player visually recognizes the position of the light emitting element to be turned on or blinked. By doing so, it becomes possible to grasp the advantageous target.

  In the above embodiment, the slide operation unit 1703 is provided with the effect operation button 1803 that can be pressed, but as shown in FIG. 132, the slide operation unit 1875 can be viewed from the upper surface of the touch plate 1876. A rotary operation body 1877 (so-called “trackball”) supported so as to be rotatable in a state in which a part thereof is protruded may be provided, and the production mode may be changed in association with the operation of the rotary operation body 1877. It is also possible to apply an operation disk (so-called “scroll wheel”) instead of the trackball. When these configurations are applied, it is possible to change the effect mode according to the rotation amount and the rotation direction of the rotary operation body 1877, and the change in effect can be further diversified.

1 Pachinko machine (game machine)
2 Outer frame 3 Body frame (body housing)
4 Game board 5 Door frame (door-shaped front member)
300 dish unit (storage tray unit)
330 push button device 605 game area 640 liquid crystal display device (effect means, effect display means)
650 Ball launcher (launcher)
800 prize ball unit (game ball dispensing device)
1404 Opening / Closing Prize Winner 1420 First Start Port 1421 Second Start Port 1700 Operation Unit 1702 Operation Base 1703 Sliding Operation Unit 1720 Sliding Guide Surface 1724 Wiring Hole 1762 First Variable Resistor (Position Signal Output Unit)
1803 Production operation buttons (operation switches)
1877 Rotary operation body 2358 Second start port sensor (winning state detection means)
2390a First special symbol display (lottery result display means)
2390b Second special symbol display (lottery result display means)
2416 First start sensor (winning state detection means)
2916a First hit determination random number extraction means (lottery means)
2916b Second hit determination random number extraction means (lottery means)
2930a First success / failure determination means (lottery means)
2930b Second success / failure determination means (lottery means)
2931a First stop symbol determining means 2931b Second stop symbol determining means 2933a First advantageous game state generating means 2933b Second advantageous game state generating means 2933c Third advantageous game state generating means 2933d Fourth advantageous game state generating means 2934 Special symbol variation Control means 2975a First effect display control means (effect control means)
2975b Second effect display control means (effect control means)

JP 2008-043810 A JP 2004-141521 A JP 2007-089968 A

Claims (2)

A door frame located in front and facing the player;
A game board with a game area formed on the front;
A launcher for driving a game ball into the game area;
Launch intensity adjusting means for adjusting the launch intensity of the launcher;
An operation base installed in front of the door frame;
The launch intensity of the launching device is adjusted by the launch intensity adjusting means according to the operation position from the initial position while being supported so as to be rotatable with respect to the operation base and to be displaced in the vertical direction. An operation part for manual operation formed so as to
Return means for urging the operation unit to return to the initial position;
A friction resistance portion that converts a force that vertically displaces the operation portion into a resistance force due to friction against the bias of the return means, and
In the gaming machine that can stop the operation unit steplessly at an arbitrary position using the resistance force due to the friction,
The frictional resistance portion is adapted to receive a force from two oblique directions with respect to a vertical action line of the force displaced in the vertical direction and convert it into the resistance force.
Further, the game machine characterized in that the operation base, the operation section, the return means, and the friction resistance section are made into one operation unit and can be attached to and detached from the door frame together with the operation unit. .   The operation unit has a light emitting unit that emits light toward the outside in the operation unit.